sjzl20081768-ZXWM M900 (V2.20) Hardware Manual_156108.pdf

ZXWM M900Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

Optical Transmission System Hardware Manual

Version 2.20

ZTE CORPORATION ZTE Plaza, Keji Road South, Hi-Tech Industrial Park, Nanshan District, Shenzhen, P. R. China 518057 Tel: (86) 755 26771900 800-9830-9830 Fax: (86) 755 26772236 URL: http://support.zte.com.cn E-mail: [email protected]

http://support.zte.com.cn/

mailto:[email protected]

LEGAL INFORMATION Copyright © 2007 ZTE CORPORATION. The contents of this document are protected by copyright laws and international treaties. Any reproduction or distribution of this document or any portion of this document, in any form by any means, without the prior written consent of ZTE CORPORATION is prohibited. Additionally, the contents of this document are protected by contractual confidentiality obligations. All company, brand and product names are trade or service marks, or registered trade or service marks, of ZTE CORPORATION or of their respective owners. This document is provided “as is”, and all express, implied, or statutory warranties, representations or conditions are disclaimed, including without limitation any implied warranty of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, title or non-infringement. ZTE CORPORATION and its licensors shall not be liable for damages resulting from the use of or reliance on the information contained herein. ZTE CORPORATION or its licensors may have current or pending intellectual property rights or applications covering the subject matter of this document. Except as expressly provided in any written license between ZTE CORPORATION and its licensee, the user of this document shall not acquire any license to the subject matter herein. ZTE CORPORATION reserves the right to upgrade or make technical change to this product without further notice. Users may visit ZTE technical support website http://ensupport.zte.com.cn to inquire related information. The ultimate right to interpret this product resides in ZTE CORPORATION.

Revision History

Date Version No.

Revision No.

Serial No. Description

31/07/2005 V1.0 R1.1 sjzl20040738 The first publication for ZXWM M900 (V1.0).

24/09/2007 V2.0 R1.1 sjzl20051582

This manual is issued due to the upgrade of ZXWM M900 from V2.0 to V2.20. The modifications of new version equipment include:

The installation in 600 mm cabinet is provided.

Centralized wavelength supervision subsystem， optical power automatic equalization, function of wavelength tuneable, and 100M supervision system are provided.

The technical specifications are updated, including board consumption and the specifications of system elements.

30/10/2007 V2.1 R1.0 sjzl20073165

This manual is issued due to the upgrade of ZXWM M900 from V2.0 to V2.1. The modifications of new version equipment include:

OTUE10G, VGSC, DGE and SWE boards are not provided any longer.

New boards EOA and DSAF are available now.

The function of OTU10G, OTUF, OMU, ODU, OBM, OCI, VMUX, OWM and LAC boards are updated.

Date Version No.

Revision No.

Serial No. Description

The SC/PC connector of the board is changed into LC/PC connector.

This new version supports C-band DWDM system over G.653 fiber. This manual is revised according to the modifications of the new version equipment.

05/30/2008 V2.20 R1.0 sjzl20081768

This manual is issued due to the upgrade of ZXWM M900 from V2.1 to V2.20. The modifications of new version equipment include: OA, HOBA and OTUP boards are not

provided any longer.

New boards MCPD and EOTU10G are available now.

48/96-wavelength system in C band is available now, and the functions of Mux/DeMux board are updated, including OMU, ODU, OCI, VMUX and OBM.

ROADM function is available now, the boards include WBU, WSU and WBM.

TMUX subrack with the functions of electric cross and electric layer protection are provided. The boards include DSAE, SMU and CSU.

Convergence boards are provided, including GEM2, GEM8, DSA and DSAF.

Protection boards are provided, including OPCS and OPMS.

The function of EOA, OWM and OPM boards are updated.

The technical specifications are updated, including board consumption and the specifications of system elements.

ZTE CORPORATION Values Your Comments & Suggestions! Your opinion is of great value and will help us improve the quality of our product documentation and offer better services to our customers.

Please fax to: (86) 755-26772236; or mail to Publications R&D Department, ZTE CORPORATION, ZTE Plaza, A Wing, Keji Road South, Hi-Tech Industrial Park, Shenzhen, P. R. China 518057.

Thank you for your cooperation!

Document Name

ZXWM M900 (V2.20) Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing Optical Transmission System Hardware Manual

Product Version V2.20

Document Revision Number R1.0

Equipment Installation Date

Presentation: (Introductions, Procedures, Illustrations, Completeness, Level of Detail, Organization, Appearance)

Good Fair Average Poor Bad N/A

Accessibility: (Contents, Index, Headings, Numbering, Glossary)


Your evaluation of this documentation

Intelligibility: (Language, Vocabulary, Readability & Clarity, Technical Accuracy, Content)


Your suggestions for improvement of this documentation

Please check the suggestions which you feel can improve this documentation: Improve the overview/introduction Make it more concise/brief

Improve the Contents Add more step-by-step procedures/tutorials

Improve the organization Add more troubleshooting information

Include more figures Make it less technical

Add more examples Add more/better quick reference aids

Add more detail Improve the index

Other suggestions

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

# Please feel free to write any comments on an attached sheet.

If you wish to be contacted regarding your comments, please complete the following:

Name Company

Postcode Address

Telephone E-mail

Contents

About this Hardware Manual.......................................................... i

Purpose ............................................................................................i

What’s in This Manual ....................................................................... ii

Related Documentation.................................................................... iii

Conventions.................................................................................... iv

Typographical Conventions..................................................................................iv Mouse Operation Conventions.............................................................................iv

Safety Signs.....................................................................................v

How to Get in Touch ........................................................................ vi

Customer Support ................................................................................................vi Documentation Support.......................................................................................vi

Chapter 1........................................................................................ 1

Cabinet ........................................................................................... 1

ZTE Cabinet .....................................................................................1

Structure............................................................................................................... 1 Basic Fittings in Cabinet....................................................................................... 3

Cabinet Configurations for ZXWM M900..............................................6

Chapter 2........................................................................................ 9

Components ................................................................................... 9

OA Subrack......................................................................................9

Board Slots.......................................................................................................... 12 Common Interface Area..................................................................................... 15

OTU Subrack..................................................................................21

Board Slots.......................................................................................................... 23 Common Interface Area..................................................................................... 24

TMUX Subrack................................................................................25

Board Slots.......................................................................................................... 25

Common Interface Area..................................................................................... 27

Orderwire Phone Bracket.................................................................29

Independent Fan Unit .....................................................................29

Power Alarm Subrack......................................................................31

Power Distribution Subrack............................................................................... 32 Monitoring Plug-in Box....................................................................................... 33

ODF Plug-in Box .............................................................................34

DCM Plug-in Box.............................................................................36

Chapter 3...................................................................................... 39

Boards .......................................................................................... 39

Overview .......................................................................................39

Structure of Boards.........................................................................41

Structure of Boards in OA/OTU/TMUX Subrack............................................... 41 Structure of PBX Board ...................................................................................... 42 Structure of PWSB Board................................................................................... 43 Structure of FCB Board....................................................................................... 43

OTU Board.....................................................................................44

Functions ............................................................................................................ 44 Operating Principle............................................................................................. 45 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ............................................................. 47 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................... 50

OTUF Board ...................................................................................51


OTU10G Board...............................................................................59


EOTU10G Board .............................................................................65


SRM41/SRM42 Board......................................................................75

Operating Principle............................................................................................. 76 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ............................................................. 78 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................... 81

GEM2 Board...................................................................................86


GEMF Board...................................................................................94


GEM8 Board.................................................................................102

Functions .......................................................................................................... 102 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 102 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 104 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 106

DSA Board...................................................................................111

Functions .......................................................................................................... 111 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 112 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 114 Configuration of DSA Board............................................................................. 116 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 119

DSAF Board .................................................................................123

Functions .......................................................................................................... 123 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 125 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 128 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 130 Configuration of DSAF Board ........................................................................... 135

DSAE Board .................................................................................136

Functions .......................................................................................................... 136 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 137 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 139 Configuration of DSAE Board........................................................................... 141 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 143

SMU Board...................................................................................145

Functions .......................................................................................................... 145

Operating Principle........................................................................................... 147 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 149 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 150

OCI Board....................................................................................154

Functions .......................................................................................................... 154 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 154 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 156 Optical Connections of OCI Board ................................................................... 158 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 159

OBM Board ..................................................................................160

Functions .......................................................................................................... 160 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 160 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 161 Optical Connections of OBM Board.................................................................. 164 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 165

OMU Board ..................................................................................166

Functions .......................................................................................................... 166 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 166 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 167 Optical Connections of OMU Board.................................................................. 169 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 170

VMUX Board.................................................................................171

Functions .......................................................................................................... 171 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 172 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 173 Optical Connections of VMUX Board................................................................ 174 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 175

ODU Board ..................................................................................176

Functions .......................................................................................................... 176 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 176 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 177 Optical Connections of ODU Board .................................................................. 179 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 180

OAD Board...................................................................................181

Functions .......................................................................................................... 181 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 181 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 182 Optical Connections of OAD Board .................................................................. 184

Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 185

WBU Board ..................................................................................185

Functions .......................................................................................................... 185 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 185 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 187 Optical Connections of WBU Board.................................................................. 189 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 191

WSU Board ..................................................................................191

Functions .......................................................................................................... 191 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 191 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 196 Optical Connections of WSU Board.................................................................. 198 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 200

WBM Board..................................................................................200

Functions .......................................................................................................... 200 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 201 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 202 Optical Connections of WBM Board................................................................. 203 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 205

SDM Board ..................................................................................205

Functions .......................................................................................................... 205 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 206 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 206 Optical Connections of SDM Board .................................................................. 208 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 209

EOA Board...................................................................................209

Function and Operating Principle .................................................................... 209 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 212 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 215 Optical Connections of EOA Board................................................................... 223 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 224

DRA Board...................................................................................226

Functions .......................................................................................................... 226 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 227 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 229 Optical Connections of DRA Board................................................................... 231 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 231

LAC Board....................................................................................232

Functions .......................................................................................................... 232 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 232 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 233 Optical Connections of LAC Board ................................................................... 235 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 236

OWM Board .................................................................................236

Functions.....................................................................................236

Operating Principle........................................................................................... 237 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicator............................................................. 238 Optical Connections of OWM Board................................................................. 239 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 240

OPM Board...................................................................................240


MCPD Board.................................................................................244

Board Function ................................................................................................. 244 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 245 Performance and Alarm................................................................................... 245 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 246

OP Board .....................................................................................247

Functions .......................................................................................................... 247 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 248 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 249 Optical Connections of OP Board..................................................................... 251 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 255

OPMS Board.................................................................................255

Functions .......................................................................................................... 255 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 256 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 256 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 259 Configuration of OPMS Board .......................................................................... 259

OPCS Board .................................................................................260


Configuration of OPCS Board........................................................................... 264

OMCP Board.................................................................................265

Functions .......................................................................................................... 265 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 265 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 266 Optical Connections of OMCP Board................................................................ 269 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 271

NCP Board ...................................................................................271

Functions and Operating Principle .................................................................. 271 Front Panel: Interface and Indicators............................................................. 272 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 275

OSC Board...................................................................................275

Operating Principle........................................................................................... 276 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 276 Optical Connections of OSC Board................................................................... 278 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 279

OHP Board...................................................................................280

Functions and Operating Principle .................................................................. 280 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 282 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 283

NCPF Board..................................................................................283


OSCF Board .................................................................................286

Operating Principle........................................................................................... 287 Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators ........................................................... 287 Configuration of OSCF Board ........................................................................... 291 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 292

OHPF Board .................................................................................293

Operating Principle........................................................................................... 293 Front Panel: Interface and Indicators............................................................. 294 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 296

APSF Board..................................................................................296


PBX Board ...................................................................................300

Operating Principle........................................................................................... 300 Front Panel and Rear Panel ............................................................................. 301 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 302

PWSB Board ................................................................................302


FCB Board ...................................................................................310

Front Panel........................................................................................................ 310 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 311

CA Board .....................................................................................311


CSU Board...................................................................................316

Functions .......................................................................................................... 316 Operating Principle........................................................................................... 317 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 319 Performance and Alarm Messages.................................................................. 321

Appendix A .................................................................................323

Optical Connections of ZXWM M900..........................................323

8/16/32/40/48-Channel System ....................................................323

80/96-Channel System .................................................................324

160/176-Channel System..............................................................324

Requirements on Operating Wavelength.........................................325

Wavelength Allocation in 8/32/40-Channel Systems.................................... 325

Appendix B .................................................................................331

Configuration of Optical Supervision System............................331

2 M Supervision System................................................................331

Definition .......................................................................................................... 331 System Composition......................................................................................... 331 Hardware Configurations................................................................................. 332 Optional Hardware Configurations.................................................................. 333 EMS Software Configurations .......................................................................... 334

100 M Supervision System ............................................................335

Definition and Features.................................................................................... 335

System Composition......................................................................................... 336 Hardware Configurations................................................................................. 337 EMS Software Configurations .......................................................................... 338

Appendix C .................................................................................341

Configuration of Integrated Wavelength Supervision Subsystem....................................................................................................341

Overview .....................................................................................341

Subsystem Composition................................................................342

Hardware Configurations...............................................................343

Configurations of OTM...................................................................................... 343 Configurations of OADM................................................................................... 344

EMS Software Configurations.........................................................345

Appendix D.................................................................................347

Configuration of OMS Layer Power Management Subsystem..347

Introduction to Automatic Power Management ................................347

Power Management of OMS Layer..................................................348

EMS Configurations.......................................................................352

Creating an OMS Power Management Subsystem ......................................... 352 Configuring the OMS Power Management Subsystem................................... 354

Abbreviations .............................................................................357

Figures........................................................................................361

Tables .........................................................................................365

Index ..........................................................................................371

This page is intentionally blank.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION i

About this Hardware Manual

Purpose The Unitrans ZXWM M900 Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing Optical Transmission System (ZXWM M900 for short) is a kind of DWDM equipment developed by ZTE CORPORATION. Its operating wavelength is located at the C and L bands near the 1550 nm window, with the maximum transmission capacity of 1760 Gbit/s. The ZXWM M900 supports access of multiple services, featuring powerful protection and network management function. Applicable to backbone networks, local switching networks and various private networks, it can meet networking requirements and network management requirements at different levels.

This manual describes the cabinet, components, and available boards of the ZXWM M900 equipment.

ZXMP M900 (V2.20) Hardware Manual

ii Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

What’s in This Manual This manual contains the following chapters and appendixes:

T AB L E 1 C H AP T E R S U M M AR Y

Chapter/Appendix Summary

Chapter 1 Cabinet Describes the appearance, dimensions and structure

of ZTE unified cabinet for transmission equipment used by ZXWM M900.

Chapter 2 Components Describes the outline, structure, dimensions and

functions of ZXWM M900’s components.

Chapter 3 Boards

Provides detailed information about the function, operating principle, panels, interfaces, indicators and performance and alarm messages of all boards in the ZXWM M900.

Appendix A Optical Connections of ZXMP M900

Introduces optical connections of ZXWM M900 equipment in 40/80/160 channel DWDM systems and corresponding wavelength requirements.

Appendix B Configuration of Optical Supervision System

Presents the concepts of 2 M supervision system and 100 M supervision systems, and introduced the software and hardware configurations of a 100 M supervision system.

Appendix C Configuration of Centralized Wavelength Supervision Subsystem

Describes the concept of centralized wavelength supervision subsystem and its software/hardware configurations.

Appendix D Configuration of OMS Layer Power Management Subsystem

Describes the concept of optical multiplex section (OMS) layer power management subsystem and its software/hardware configurations.

Abbreviation Lists the abbreviations of technical terms you

may encounter while reading this manual


Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION iii

Related Documentation There are four manuals associated with the ZXWM M900 equipment:

Unitrans ZXWM M900 (V2.20) Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing Optical Transmission System Technical Manual

Unitrans ZXWM M900 (V2.20) Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing Optical Transmission System Installation Manual

Unitrans ZXWM M900 (V2.20) Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual

Unitrans ZXWM M900 (V2.20) Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing Optical Transmission System RPOA Subsystem User’s Manual


iv Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Conventions Typographical Conventions ZTE documents employ with the following typographical conventions.

T AB L E 2 TY P O G R AP H I C A L C O N V E N T I O N S

Typeface Meaning

Italics References to other guides and documents.

“Quotes” Links on screens.

Bold Menus, menu options, function names, input fields, radio button names, check boxes, drop-down lists, dialog box names, window names.

CAPS Keys on the keyboard and buttons on screens and company name.

Constant width Text that you type, program code, files and directory names, and function names.

[ ] Optional parameters

{ } Mandatory parameters

| Select one of the parameters that are delimited by it

Note: Provides additional information about a certain topic.

Checkpoint: Indicates that a particular step needs to be checked before proceeding further.

Tip: Indicates a suggestion or hint to make things easier or more productive for the reader.

Mouse Operation Conventions

T AB L E 3 M O U S E OP E R AT I O N C O N V E N T I O N S

Typeface Meaning

Click Refers to clicking the primary mouse button (usually the left mouse button) once.

Double-click Refers to quickly clicking the primary mouse button (usually the left mouse button) twice.

Right-click Refers to clicking the secondary mouse button (usually the right mouse button) once.


Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION v

Typeface Meaning

Drag Refers to pressing and holding a mouse button and moving the mouse.

Safety Signs T AB L E 4 S A F E T Y S I G N S

Safety Signs Meaning

Danger: Indicates an imminently hazardous situation, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. This signal word should be limited to only extreme situations.

Warning: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Caution: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.

Erosion: Beware of erosion.

Electric shock: There is a risk of electric shock.

Electrostatic: The device may be sensitive to static electricity.

Microwave: Beware of strong electromagnetic field.

Laser: Beware of strong laser beam.

No flammables: No flammables can be stored.

No touching: Do not touch.

No smoking: Smoking is forbidden.


vi Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

How to Get in Touch The following sections provide information on how to obtain support for the documentation and the software.

Customer Support If you have problems, questions, comments, or suggestions regarding your product, contact us by e-mail at [email protected]. You can also call our customer support center at (86) 755 26771900 and (86) 800-9830-9830.

Documentation Support ZTE welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this document. For further questions, comments, or suggestions on the documentation, you can contact us by e-mail at [email protected]; or you can fax your comments and suggestions to (86) 755 26772236. You can also explore our website at http://support.zte.com.cn, which contains various interesting subjects like documentation, knowledge base, forums and service request.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 1

C h a p t e r 1

Cabinet

This chapter introduces the size, weight, outline and basic fittings of the unified cabinet for ZTE transmission equipment (ZTE cabinet for short). In addition, the cabinet configurations for the ZXWM M900 are described.

ZTE Cabinet This section covers the structure of ZTE cabinet and basic fittings in it.

Structure The ZTE cabinet is designed following unified industrial processes. It is a kind of 19-inch cabinet complying with IEC standards. And it features excellent performances of electromagnetic shield and heat dissipation.

Table 5 lists the structural parameters of ZTE cabinet.

T AB L E 5 S T R U C T U R AL P AR A M E T E R S O F ZTE C AB I N E T

Dimensions (Height × Width × Depth) (mm)

Weight (kg)

2000 × 600 × 300 59

2200 × 600 × 300 65

2600 × 600 × 300 77

2000 × 600 × 600 102

2200 × 600 × 600 114

2600 × 600 × 600 128

Note: The weight listed in the table is that of the cabinet without fittings in.


2 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

For example, the outline and dimensions of the ZTE cabinet with the depth of 300 mm are illustrated in Figure 1 as follows.

F I G U R E 1 OU T L I N E AN D D I M E N S I O N S O F ZTE C AB I N E T (W I T H D E P T H 300 M M )

Unit: mm

Chapter 1 Cabinet


Basic Fittings in Cabinet Take the ZTE cabinet with the dimensions of 2200 mm (height) × 600 mm (width) × 300 mm (depth) as example. Figure 2 illustrates the basic fittings in the cabinet.

F I G U R E 2 B AS I C F I T T I N G S I N ZTE C AB I N E T

1. Outlet for Power Cables 2. Top Outlet 3. Alarm Panel

4. Door Lock 5. Front Door 6. Bottom Outlet

7. Small Door of Cable Area 8. Mounting Bracket

9. Grounding Copper Busbar 10. Cable Area 11. Fiber Cable Reel-in Box

12. Cable Arranging Clip 13. Cable Fixing Clip



Alarm Panel

It is located at the upside of the front door. The running indicator on it indicates the working status of the equipment in the cabinet.

Front Door

The front door of the cabinet has a lock. And on the top right corner of it, there is the equipment nameplate with blue ground and white characters to indicate the type of the equipment.

Outlet

Outlets are located at both the top and bottom of the cabinet. Users can lay cables with either the upper cabling mode or lower cabling mode according to actual situation.

Each outlet has a small active door on it to seal the cabinet after laying cables.

Cable Area

The cable area is located close to the side door of the cabinet. There is a small detachable door which can be opened and closed in the cable area.

The ring trip switch, ring trip reset button and the jack for antistatic wrist strap are located at the middle of the inner frame in the cable area.

Generally, the mounting bracket, cable fixing plate, cable arranging clip and fiber cable reel-in box are mounted in the cable area.

Mounting bracket: used to support components such as subrack of the equipment and power alarm subrack. It can be fixed at any position on the framework of the cabinet.

Cable fixing plate: the cable arranging clip and fiber cable reel-in box are mounted on it.

Cable arranging clip, fiber cable reel-in box: used to fix the internal cables and external optical cables. They are optional fittings for the ZXWM M900.

Mounting Hole

Mounting holes are located at both the top and bottom of the cabinet. Users can use either top mounting holes or bottom mounting holes according to the actual fixing mode of the cabinet: top fixing, combined cabinet fixing, back-to-back fixing or bottom fixing.

Grounding Copper Busbar

It is located at the back in the cabinet. The grounding terminals on the side door, front door, subrack, power alarm subrack and other components are connected to the grounding copper busbar with grounding wires to achieve good electrical connection of the equipment in the cabinet.

Take the ZTE cabinet with the dimensions of 2200 mm (height) × 600 mm (width) × 300 mm (depth) as example. The grounding copper busbar in the cabinet and the grounding terminals on the cabinet’s side door and front door are illustrated in Figure 3.

Chapter 1 Cabinet


F I G U R E 3 GR O U N D I N G TE R M I N AL S I N C A B I N E T

1. Grounding Copper Busbar in Cabinet

2. Grounding Terminals on Side Door

3. Grounding Terminal on Front Door

Heat Dissipation Aperture

Heat dissipation apertures are distributed at the font door, rear door, top and bottom of the cabinet to guarantee good heat dissipation of the equipment.



Cabinet Configurations for ZXWM M900 Corresponding components should be mounted in the ZTE cabinet for ZXWM M900 equipment to perform different system functions. This section introduces the configurations based on the cabinet dimension and equipment type.

For detailed information about components of ZXWM M900, please refer to “Chapter 2 Components”.

Configurations based on the dimension of ZTE cabinet

Table 6 lists the components which can be mounted in corresponding ZTE cabinets and their quantity.

T AB L E 6 C AB I N E T C O N F I G U R AT I O N S O F ZXWM M900

Component/QuantityCabinet (mm)

Power Alarm Subrack

SubrackODF Plug-in Box

DCM Plug-in Box

2000 (H) × 600 (W) × 300 (D) 1 2 1 1

2200 (H) × 600 (W) × 300 (D) 1 3 1 1

2600 (H) × 600 (W) × 300 (D) 1 3 1 2

2000 (H) × 600 (W) × 600 (D) 1 4 2 2

2200 (H) × 600 (W) × 600 (D) 1 6 2 2

2600 (H) × 600 (W) × 600 (D) 1 6 2 4

Note: Additional information about cabinet configurations:

For ZTE cabinets with the depth of 600 mm, the doors should be mounted in both the front and the rear of the cabinets if the subracks are required to be mounted back-to-back. If the doors are only mounted in the front of the cabinets, the configurations for ZTE cabinets with the depth of 600 mm are the same as those with the depth of 300mm.

The optical distribution frame (ODF) plug-in box and dispersion compensation module (DCM) plug-in box are optional components. Table 6 recommends the maximum configuration quantity of them. Equipment of other manufacturers can also be mounted in the cabinet according to user's requirements, such as routers. However, the outline and dimension of the equipment should meet the mounting requirements of ZTE cabinet.

Three kinds of subracks are provided for the ZXWM M900. They are optical transponder unit (OTU) subrack, optical amplifier (OA) subrack, and transparent multiplexer (TMUX) subrack. For the main rack, which is configured with NCP or NCPF board, at least one OA subrack should be mounted.

Chapter 1 Cabinet


Configurations based on the type of ZXWM M900 equipment

The ZXWM M900 can be configured as optical terminal (OTM), optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) or optical line amplifier (OLA) through plugging various functional boards and service boards in the subracks.

OTM

Generally, multiple racks are configured in an OTM. The one configured with the NCP or NCPF board is the main rack. The others are extended racks. Multiple subracks are mounted in each cabinet.

The main rack consists of a power alarm subrack, multiple OTU/TMUX subracks and an OA subrack (with NCP or NCPF board in).

The extended rack consists of a power alarm subrack and multiple OTU/TMUX subracks.

OLA

Generally, only one rack is configured in an OLA. It consists of a power alarm subrack and an OA subrack.

OADM

Generally, only one rack is configured in an OADM. It consists of a power alarm subrack, one or two OTU/TMUX subracks and an OA subrack.

Take a cabinet with the height of 2200 mm for example. Figure 4 illustrates the position of components in the cabinet as typical OTM equipment.



F I G U R E 4 C O M P O N E N T S ’ PO S I T I O N I N C AB I N E T

User equipment can be mounted at the position where the ODF/DCM plug-in box is located. However, the prerequisite is that the outline and dimension of user equipment should meet the mounting requirements of ZTE cabinet.

It is recommended to reserve the distance of 2U between OA subrack and OTU subrack 2 for the mounting of an ODF plug-in box or two DCM/SWE plug-in boxes as needed.

At least 1U space at the bottom of the cabinet should be reserved, so as to ensure enough space for the installation of cabinet on ground. Otherwise the rear door can not be mounted and the connection of grounding wires would be affected.

No Components

DCM

Dustproof Net

Optical Cable Area

Boards

Fan Fan Fan

Common Interface Area

ODF

Dustproof Net

Optical Cable Area

Boards

Fan Fan Fan


Dustproof Net

Optical Cable Area

Boards

Fan Fan Fan


Power Alarm Subrack

OTU Subrack 1

OA Subrack

OTU Subrack 2

or DCM/SWE

or SWE


C h a p t e r 2

Components

This chapter describes the structure and functions of the OA/OTU/TMUX subrack, power alarm subrack, and ODF/DCM plug-in box of the ZXWM M900.

OA Subrack The frame of OA subrack is simple with aluminium front/rear beams, left/right side panels and guide rails. The dimensions are 577 mm (height) × 482.6 mm (width) × 269.5 mm (depth). Figure 5 illustrates the structure of OA subrack.

F I G U R E 5 S T R U C T U R E O F OA S U B R AC K

1. Backplane 2. Lug 3. Fiber Cable Reel-in Box

4. Dustproof Net 5. Chute 6. Board Area

7. Fan Area 8. Orderwire Phone Bracket



Backplane

The backplane supports connections between boards in the subrack. It also provides interfaces through which external signals can be input to the ZXWM M900 equipment.

The backplane can be divided into three area, common interface area, fan interface area and board interface area.

Common interface area: it is located at the upside of the backplane, providing the subrack power socket, and signal interfaces such as network interface, transparent user channel interface, and alarm input/output interface. For the detailed information of the common interface area, please refer to the section “Common Interface Area” in this chapter.

Fan interface area: it is located at the middle of the backplane, providing power socket and signal sockets for three independent fan units.

Board interface area: it is located at the lower side of the backplane, providing power sockets and signal sockets for boards. The transceiving data bus for signal sockets is differential data bus. Signals are transferred to the backplane at the same time through parallel operation, where the signals are input or output.

Board area

14 board slots with guide rails are provided in this area. The space between board slots is 30 mm. For the detailed information of the board slots, please refer to the section “Board Slots” in this chapter.

Fan area

Located above the board area, the fan area provides space for three independent fan units. The fan units are connected to the backplane through connectors. For the detailed information, please refer to the section “Independent Fan Unit” in this chapter.

Orderwire phone bracket

Located at the front of the common interface area, the bracket is used to support the orderwire phone. For the detailed information, please refer to the section “Orderwire Phone Bracket” in this chapter.

Note: Only the OA subrack is configured with the orderwire phone bracket.

Chute

Located at the lower part of the subrack, it is used for the layout of optical cables connected to boards.

Lug

The left and right lugs are provided. The subrack is fixed in the cabinet through captive fasteners across the lugs.

Dustproof net

Located at the underside of the subrack, it is combined with the fan units to form an air circulation system in the subrack. Figure 6 illustrates the outline of the dustproof net.

Chapter 2 Components


An additional plaque is installed to shield the dustproof net after mounting it, as shown in Figure 5

F I G U R E 6 OU T L I N E O F D U S T P R O O F N E T

Fiber cable reel-in box

Located on the left and right side panels in the subrack, they are used to reel in overlong pigtails. The reel-in box can be pulled out along the guide rail on the top and bottom of it.

Generally, overlong pigtails between subracks are reeled in the left box, while pigtails for internal connections of the subrack are reeled in the right box.

For example, the structure and pulling-out direction of the left fiber cable reel-in box are illustrated in Figure 7.

F I G U R E 7 LE F T F I B E R C AB L E R E E L - I N B O X

1. Fixing Plate for Reel-in Box 2. Wheel 3. Guide Rail

4. Left Panel of Subrack



Board Slots The boards in OA subrack can be arranged in three modes depending on the rate of supervisory system and functions to be performed.

For the introduction of supervisory system, please refer to “Appendix B Configurations of Optical Supervisory System”.

Boards arrangement for 2 M supervisory system (without APSF)

The arrangement of boards in the OA subrack is illustrated in Figure 8, where the numerals indicate the serial number of slots.

F I G U R E 8 B O AR D S AR R AN G E M E N T I N OA S U B R AC K (F O R 2 M S U P E R V I S O R Y S Y S T E M W I T H O U T APSF)

5

OHP

6

OSC

7

NCP

8 9 10

Fan Area Fan Area Fan Area


1 4 11 142 3 12 13

Optical Cable Area

Table 7 shows the relationship between the slots and corresponding pluggable boards in the OA subrack.

T AB L E 7 R E L AT I O N S B E T W E E N B O AR D S AN D S L O T S (F O R 2 M S U P E R V I S O R Y S Y S T E M W I T H O U T APSF)

Slot Pluggable Board Remark

6 OHP Each OHP board occupies one slot.

5, 7 OSC

Each OSC board occupies one slot. If two OSC boards are required, they should

be plugged in the slot 5 and 7 respectively. If only one OSC board is required, it should be

plugged in the slot 7.

8 NCP Each NCP board occupies one slot. The NCPF board can also be plugged in instead of NCP board here.

1-4 9-14

Optical transponder boards Convergence boards Mux/DeMux boards Optical amplifier boards Power management boards

No restriction for slots.




Protection boards

Boards arrangement for 2 M supervisory system (with APSF)

In the 2 M supervisory system, the APSF board must be configured in the subrack when the interworking function of automatic protection switching (APS) bus is required in the ZXWM M900 equipment. The interworking of APS bus is mainly used in the following two situations:

The ZXWM M900 would manage APS buses of multiple racks through the APSF board, for example, to perform the automatic power reduction (APR) function in multiple directions. The APSF board is used to transfer APS bus information between the main rack and extended racks in this case.

The ZXWM M900 would implement the access of external clock and perform the function of unified clock distribute through the CA board configured in the TMUX subrack. In this case, the APSF board is used to transfer clock information.


F I G U R E 9 B O AR D S AR R AN G E M E N T I N OA S U B R AC K (F O R 2 M S U P E R V I S O R Y S Y S T E M W I T H APSF)

5

OHP

6

OSC

7

NCP

8

APSF

9 10



1 4 11 142 3 12 13

Optical Cable Area


T AB L E 8 R E L A T I O N S B E T W E E N B O AR D S AN D S L O T S (F O R 2 M S U P E R V I S O R Y S Y S T E M W I T H APSF)


6 OHP Each OHP board occupies one slot.

5, 7 OSC

Each OSC board occupies one slot. If two OSC boards are required, they should be

plugged in the slot 5 and 7 respectively. If only one OSC board is required, it should be

plugged in the slot 7.

8 NCP Each NCP board occupies one slot. The NCPF board can also be plugged in instead of NCP board here.




9 APSF Each APSF board occupies one slot.

1-4, 10-14

Optical transponder boardsConvergence boards Mux/DeMux boards Optical amplifier boards Power management boards Protection boards


Boards arrangement for 100 M supervisory system


F I G U R E 10 B O A R D S AR R AN G E M E N T I N OA S U B R AC K (F O R 100 M S U P E R V I S O R Y S Y S T E M )

5

OHPF

6

OSCF

7

NCPF

8

APSF

9 10



1 4 11 142 3 12 13

Optical Cable Area


T AB L E 9 R E L A T I O N S H I P B E T W E E N B O AR D S AN D S L O T S (F O R 100 M S U P E R V I S O R Y S Y S T E M )


6 OHPF Each OHPF board occupies one slot. Only the main rack is configured with it.

7 OSCF

Each OSCF board occupies one slot. Only the main rack is configured with it. For one or two optical directions, one OSCF should

be plugged in slot 7. For three optical directions or above, multiple OSCF

boards can be plugged in, and each board can only provide two optical directions at most. One of OSCF




boards should be plugged in the slot 7. The others can be plugged in any spare slots.

8 NCPF Each NCPF board occupies one slot. Only the main rack is configured with it.

9 APSF Each APSF board occupies one slot. Only the main rack is configured with it.

1-5 10-14

Optical transponder boards Convergence boards Mux/DeMux boards Optical amplifier boards Power management boards Protection boards


Common Interface Area 16 interfaces, one DIP switch and two slots are provided in the common interface area of the OA subrack, as illustrated in Figure 11. The silkscreen (Jx, x=1-9, 11-17) on the panel indicates the corresponding interface. The J10 is the DIP switch.

F I G U R E 11 C O M M O N I N T E R F AC E AR E A O N B AC K P L AN E O F O A S U B R AC K

1. Slots for Subrack PBX (Power Box Board)

Note: This manaul only describes the basic definition of interfaces. For further information about the optical connection of interfaces, refer to Unitrans ZXWM M900 (V2.20) Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing Optical Transmission System Installation Manual.



DIP Switch and Serial Number of Rack/Subrack An 8-pin DIP switch (J10) is used to set the serial number of racks and subracks when multiple racks/subracks are configured in a NE.

Figure 12 illustrates the pins order of the DIP switch. It indicates “0” when the pin is toggled up to the position “ON”. On the contrary, it indicates “1”. The serial number is calculated from the position of pins with the binary system.

F I G U R E 12 P I N S OR D E R O F D IP S W I T C H (J10)

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DIP

Note: The pin 5 of the DIP switch is reserved.

Serial number of cabinet

Pin 1-4 of the DIP switch are used to set the serial number of racks.

At present, one NCP or NCPF board can manage four racks. The serial number of rack is from 0 to 3. The rack 0 is the main rack, while the others are extended racks.

Table 10 lists the position of pin 1-4 and corresponding serial number of rack.

T AB L E 10 S E R I AL N U M B E R O F R AC K S

1 2 3 4 DIP Pin Cabinet Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 0

Cabinet 0 0 0 0 0

Cabinet 1 0 0 0 1

Cabinet 2 0 0 1 0

Cabinet 3 0 0 1 1

Note: Cabinet 0 means the main cabinet; Cabinet 1 means extended cabinet 1, and so on.

Serial number of subrack

Pin 6-8 of the DIP switch are used to set the serial number of subracks. At present, four subracks can be mounted in a rack at most. The serial number of subrack is from 1 to 4.

Table 11 lists the position of pin 6-8 and corresponding serial number of subrack.



T AB L E 11 S E R I AL N U M B E R O F S U B R AC K S

6 7 8 DIP Pin Subrack Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 0

Subrack 1 0 0 1

Subrack 2 0 1 0

Subrack 3 0 1 1

Subrack 4 1 0 0

Note: The serial number of subrack is arranged based on the position of subrack from the top down. For example, the uppermost subrack mounted in the rack is defined as subrack 1.

Slots for PBX Boards Two slots for PBX boards are located in the middle of the common interface area. Insert two PBX boards to provide power supply to each board in the OA subrack.

By default, the PBX board of master power supply is plugged in the lower slot with the identifier -48V_In1, while the PBX board of slave power supply is plugged in the upper slot with identifier -48V_In2.

Interfaces on Backplane The types and functions of these interfaces are listed in Table 12.

T AB L E 12 TY P E AN D FU N C T I O N O F I N T E R F A C E S O N O A B AC K P L AN E

Silkscreen Name Type Function

J1/J17 -48 V power interface 3-pin power socket

The master and slave power supply for the OA subrack is input through the interface.

J2 RS232 interface DB9 socket (male)

It is used to connect with client equipments.

J3 Alarm output interface DB9 socket (female)

The equipment alarms from NCP boards are output to the Warn interface on the power supervision board (PWSB) through the interface. The PWSB board locates in the DCM plug-in box of power alarm subrack.

J4/J5 Orderwire interface RJ11 socket The orderwire phone of the ZXWM M900 is connected to any of these two




interfaces.

J6/J7 External clock interface CC4 coaxial socket

The external clock 2 Mbit/s and 2 MHz is input through any of two interfaces.

J8 RS422 interface DB9 socket (male)

It is used to connect with the client equipments.

J9 Electrical Ethernet interface RJ45 socket

The network management system is accessed through the interface when the supervision rate is 2 Mbit/s and the NCP board is the main control board.

J11 System test interface DB9 socket (male) It is reserved for testing.

J12 Power alarm interface DB9 socket (female)

The over-voltage/under-voltage alarms of subrack master/slave power supply and in-position signal of PBX are output to the PWSB board through the interface.

J13/J14/J15 Extended data interface

PCB solder 36-pin D-type straight socket (female blade)

When multiple racks are configured in the NE, the subrack can be connected to subracks in other racks with data cables through the interface. The data cable of

extended rack 1 is connected to the J14 interface on the OA subrack of cabinet.

The data cable of extended rack 2 is connected to the J13 interface on the OA subrack of cabinet.

The data cable of extended rack 3 is connected to the J15 interface on the OA subrack of cabinet.

J16 Local data interface


When multiple subracks are configured in the ZXWM M900 equipment, the subrack can be connected to another subrack in the rack with data cable.



The signal definitions of pins in some sockets are described as follows.

3-pin power socket (J1/J17)

Figure 13 illustrates the pins of the socket.

F I G U R E 13 P I N S O F J1 /J17 P O W E R S O C K E T

A2 A3A1

The signal definitions of pins in J1/J17 socket are listed in Table 13.

T AB L E 13 S I G N AL D E F I N I T I O N O F P I N S I N J1 / J 17 S O C K E T

Pin Signal Definition

A1 -48 V ground

A2 Protection ground

A3 -48 V

DB9 socket (male) (J2/J8/J11)

Figure 14 illustrates the pins in the DB9 socket (male).

F I G U R E 14 DB9 S O C K E T (M AL E )

54321

6 7 8 9

The signal definitions of J2 socket are listed in Table 14.

T AB L E 14 S I G N AL D E F I N I T I O N S O F P I N S I N J2 S O C K E T

Pin Signal Definition Description

2 USER_232_RXD Input, RS232 data signals received

3 USER_232_TXD Output, RS232 data signals transmitted

5 GND Ground




T AB L E 15 S I G N AL D E F I N I T I O N O F P I N S I N J8 S O C K E T


1 USER_422_TXD+ Output, RS422 transmitting (positive)

6 USER_422_TXD- Output, RS422 transmitting (negative)

2 USER_422_RXD+ Output, RS422 receiving (positive)

7 USER_422_RXD- Output, RS422 receiving (negative)




1 TEST_TX+ Output, data transmitted (positive)

6 TEST_TX- Output, data transmitted (negative)

2 TEST_RX+ Input, data received (positive)

7 TEST_RX- Input, data received (negative)

DB9 socket (female) (J3/J12)

Figure 15 illustrates the pins in the DB9 socket (female).

F I G U R E 15 DB9 S O C K E T (F E M AL E )

12345

9 8 7 6




1 RING_C1 Output, alarm bell signal (positive)

6 RING_C0 Output, alarm bell signal (negative)

2 YELLOW_C1 Output, yellow alarm indicator signal (positive)

7 YELLOW_C0 Output, yellow alarm indicator signal (negative)

3 RED_C1 Output, red alarm indicator signal (positive)

8 RED_C0 Output, red alarm indicator signal (negative)




4 ALM_PWR_1+ Input, PWSB alarm signal (positive)

9 ALM_PWR_1- Input, PWSB alarm signal (negative)

5 GND Ground

Note: The above table lists four pairs of on-off signal isolated by optical coupler or relay.


T AB L E 18 S I G N AL D E F I N I T I O N S O F P I N S I N J12 SO C K E T


1 Vinu1 Under-voltage alarm signal of subrack input power supply 1

6 Vino1 Over-voltage alarm signal of subrack input power supply 1

2 ONLINE1 In-position signal of PBX1 board in subrack

7 Voutu Under-voltage alarm signal of subrack output power supply

3 ALMCOM Common end of alarm

8 Vouto Over-voltage alarm signal of subrack output power supply

4 ONLINE2 In-position signal of PBX2 board in subrack

9 Vino2 Over-voltage alarm signal of subrack input power supply 2

5 Vinu2 Under-voltage alarm signal of subrack input power supply 2

OTU Subrack The frame of OTU subrack is similar as that of OA subrack with aluminium front/rear beams, left/right side panels and guide rails. The dimensions are 577 mm (height) × 482.6 mm (width) × 269.5 mm (depth).

Figure 16 illustrates the structure of OTU subrack.



F I G U R E 16 S T R U C T U R E O F OTU S U B R AC K

1. Backplane 2. Lug 3. Fiber Cable Reel-in Box

4. Dustproof Net 5. Chute 6. Board Area

7. Fan Area 8. Plaque

The components and their functions are described in Table 19.

T AB L E 19 FU N C T I O N S O F C O M P O N E N T S I N OTU S U B R AC K

Component Function

Backplane

At the upside of the backplane, the common interface area provides the subrack power socket and signal interfaces such as network interface, transparent user channel interface, and alarm input/output interface. For detailed information of the common interface area, please refer to the section “common interface area” in this chapter.

At the middle of the backplane, the fan interface area provides power socket and signal sockets for three independent fan units.

At the lower side of the backplane, the board interface area provides power sockets and signal sockets for boards.

Board Area

14 board slots with guide rails are provided in this area. The space between board slots is 30 mm. For the detailed information of the board slots, please refer to the section “Board Slots” in this chapter.

Fan Area

Located above the board area, the fan area provides space for three independent fan units. For the detailed information of independent fan unit, please refer to the section “Independent Fan unit” in this chapter.

Dustproof Net Located at the underside of the subrack, the dustproof net is combined with the fan units to form an air circulation system in the



Component Function

subrack.

Fiber Cable Reel-in Box

Located on the left and right side panels in the subrack, they are used to reel in overlong pigtails. The reel-in box can be pulled out along the guide rail on the top and bottom of it.

Chute Located at the lower part of the subrack, the chute is used for the layout of optical cables connected to boards.

Plaque Located at the front of dustproof net, the plaque is used to shield the interface area and dustproof net.

Lug The left and right lugs are provided. The subrack is fixed in the cabinet through captive fasteners across the lugs.

Captive Fastener Captive fasteners are used to fix the plaque on the OTU subrack. They are also used to mount the subrack in the cabinet.

Note: The structure and componets of OTU subrack are similar to that of the OA subrack. Refer to “OA Subrack” for detailed introduction to the components.

Board Slots The board slots in OTU subrack are illustrated in Figure 17, where the numeral indicates the serial number of slots.

F I G U R E 17 B O A R D S L O T S I N OTU S U B R AC K

5 6 7 8 9 10



1 4 11 142 3 12 13

Optical Cable Area

Service boards can be plugged in any slots of the OTU subrack, such as main optical channel board, service convergence boards and optical transponder boards.



Common Interface Area 6 interfaces, one DIP switch and two slots are provided in the common interface area of the OTU subrack, as illustrated in Figure 18.

F I G U R E 18 C O M M O N I N T E R F AC E AR E A O N B AC K P L AN E O F OTU S U B R AC K



Type and Functions of Interfaces

Table 20 lists the types and functions of interfaces in the common interface area.

T AB L E 20 TY P E AN D FU N C T I O N O F I N T E R F A C E S O N OTU B AC K P L AN E


J1/J7 -48 V power interface 3-pin power socket The master and slave power supply for the OTU subrack is input through the interface.

J2 System test interface DB9 socket (male) It is reserved for testing.

J4 Power alarm interface DB9 socket (female)

The over-voltage/under-voltage alarms of subrack master/slave power supply and in-position signal of PBX are output to the DCMU plug-in box on the power alarm subrack through any interface from SP_ALM to SP_ALM4.

J5/J6 Local data interface PCB solder 36-pin D-type straight

When multiple subracks are configured in the ZXWM




socket (female blade)

M900 equipment, the subrack can be connected to another subrack in the rack with data cable.

Note: The signal definitions of pins in the J1/J7, J2 and J4 sockets are the same as that of corresponding sockets in the common interface area of OA subrack. Please refer to corresponding contents in the section “OA Subrack” for signal definitions of J1/J7, J2 and J4 sockets.

J1/J7 (OTU subrack) -> J1/J17 (OA subrack, Table 13)

J2 (OTU subrack) -> J11 (OA subrack, Table 16)

J4 (OTU subrack) -> J12 (OA subrack, Table 18)

DIP Switch (J3)

The 8-pin DIP switch (J3) is used to set the serial number of racks and subracks when multiple racks/subracks are configured in a NE.

The definitions of pins order of the DIP switch and corresponding rack/subrack number are same as those of the DIP switch (J10) in the common interface area of OA subrack.

Slots for PBX Boards

Two slots for PBX boards are located in the middle of the common interface area. Two PBX boards can be plugged in to provide power supply to each board in the OTU subrack. By default, the PBX board of master power supply is plugged in the lower slot with the identifier -48V_In1, while the PBX board of slave power supply is plugged in the upper slot with identifier -48V_In2.

TMUX Subrack The structure, dimensions and components of TMUX subrack is same as those of the OTU subrack.

Board Slots The board slots in TMUX subrack are illustrated in Figure 19, where the numeral indicates the slot No.



F I G U R E 19 B O A R D S L O T S I N TMUX SU B R AC K

5 6

CA

7

CA

8 9 10



1 4 11 142 3 12 13

Optical Cable Area

Table 21 shows the relationship between the slots and corresponding pluggable boards in the TMUX subrack.

T AB L E 21 R E L AT I O N S H I P B E T W E E N B O AR D S AN D S L O T S I N TMUX S U B R AC K


7, 8 CA By default, the slot 7 is for the master CA board, while the slot 8 is for the standby CA board.

DSAE, SMU

Cooperate with CSU board.

1-6, 9-14

Boards of convergence type are recommended. SRM41,

SRM42 Cooperate with CSU board.

Other boards can also be plugged in. The board can be plugged in any one of these slots.



Common Interface Area 14 interfaces, one DIP switch and two slots are provided in the common interface area of the TMUX subrack, as illustrated in Figure 20. The silkscreen (Jx, x=1-10, 12-14) on the panel indicates the corresponding interface. The J11 is the DIP switch.

F I G U R E 20 C O M M O N I N T E R F AC E AR E A O N TMUX B AC K P L AN E



Type and Functions of Interfaces

Table 22 lists the types and functions of interfaces in the common interface area.

T AB L E 22 TY P E S AN D FU N C T I O N S O F IN T E R F AC E O N TMUX B AC K P L A N E


J1/J15 -48 V power interface

3-pin power socket

The master and slave power supply for the TMUX subrack is input through the interface.

J2 System test interface

DB9 socket (male) It is reserved for testing.

J3/J4 2 MHz clock input interface

CC4 coaxial socket

The external clock 2 MHz is input through the interface.

J5/J6 2 Mbit/s clock input interface

CC4 coaxial socket

The external clock 2 Mbit/s is input through the interface.

J7/J8 2 MHz clock output interface

CC4 coaxial socket

The clock 2 MHz is output through this interface




J9/J10 2 Mbit/s clock output interface

CC4 coaxial socket

The clock 2 Mbit/s is output through this interface.

J12 Power alarm interface

DB9 socket (female)

The over-voltage/under-voltage alarms of subrack master/slave power supply and in-position signal of PBX board are output to the DCM plug-in box on the power alarm subrack through any interface from SP_ALM1 to SP_ALM4.

J13/J14 Local data interface


When multiple subracks are configured in the ZXWM M900 equipment, the subrack can be connected to another subrack in the rack with data cable.

Note: The signal definitions of pins in the J1/J15, J2 and J12 sockets are the same as that of corresponding sockets in the common interface area of OA subrack. Please refer to corresponding contents in the section “OA Subrack” for signal definitions of J1/J15, J2 and J12 sockets.

J1/J15 (TMUX subrack) -> J1/J17 (OA subrack, Table 13)

J2 (TMUX subrack) -> J11 (OA subrack, Table 16)

J12 (TMUX subrack) -> J12 (OA subrack, Table 18)

DIP Switch (J11)

The 8-pin DIP switch (J11) is used to set the serial number of racks and subracks when multiple racks/subracks are configured in a NE.

The definitions of pins order of the DIP switch and corresponding rack/subrack number are same as those of the DIP switch (J10) in the common interface area of OA subrack.

Slots for PBX Boards

Two slots for PBX boards are located in the middle of the common interface area. Two PBX boards can be plugged in to provide power supply to each board in the TMUX subrack.

By default, the PBX board of master power supply is plugged in the lower slot with the identifier -48V_In1, while the PBX board of slave power supply is plugged in the upper slot with identifier -48V_In2.



Orderwire Phone Bracket The orderwire phone bracket is used to support the orderwire phone set. It dimensions are 132.5 mm (height) × 482.6 mm (width) × 269.5 mm (depth).

Figure 21 illustrates the structure of the bracket.

F I G U R E 21 S T R U C T U R E O F OR D E R W I R E PH O N E B R AC K E T

1. Captive Fastener 2. Line Hole 3. Bracket

The function of the orderwire phone bracket’s components are described in Table 23.

T AB L E 23 C O M P O N E N T S FU N C T I O N S O F OR D E R W I R E P H O N E B R AC K E T

Component Function

Captive Fastener Fixes the bracket on the subrack.

Line Hole Lays the line of orderwire phone through it.

Bracket Supports the orderwire phone set.

Independent Fan Unit Three independent fan units are provided to the OA/OTU/TMUX subrack in the ZXWM M900. They are plugged in the fan area of the subrack.

The dimensions of each fan unit are 43.6 mm (height) × 145 mm (width) × 247.5 mm (depth).

Figure 22 illustrates the structure of the independent fan unit.



F I G U R E 22 S T R U C T U R E O F IN D E P E N D E N T F AN U N I T

1. Fan Control Board (FCB) 2. Fan

3. Locking Switch 4. Indicator 5. Handle

The functions of the fan unit’s components are described in Table 24.

T AB L E 24 FU N C T I O N S O F C O M P O N E N T S I N I N D E P E N D E N T F AN U N I T

Component Function

FCB Provides power interface and signal interface for the connection to the backplane.

Indicator Indicates the working status of FCB.

Fan One independent fan is configured in each fan unit. Exhaust mode is adopted.

Handle Helps to pull in or out the fan unit, and thus facilitate the mounting and maintenance of the fan unit.

Locking Switch Used to lock the fan unit after pulling it in, or unlock the fan unit before pulling it out.

These three independent fan unit are controlled respectively. Thus when one of them is in fault, the other two can still work normally. In this case, the faulty fan unit can be pulled out along the direction illustrated in Figure 23 for maintenance after being unlocked.



F I G U R E 23 M AI N T E N AN C E O F I N D E P E N D E N T F AN U N I T

1. Subrack 2. Independent Fan Unit

Power Alarm Subrack The power alarm subrack consists of the power distribution subrack and the monitoring plug-in box. It is mounted at the uppermost shelf of the cabinet, as illustrated in Figure 4. The structure of the power alarm subrack is as shown in Figure 24.

F I G U R E 24 S T R U C T U R E O F P O W E R AL A R M S U B R AC K

1. Power Distribution Subrack 2. Monitoring Plug-in Box



Power Distribution Subrack The power distribution subrack is used to distribute power supply to other subracks in the cabinet.

The external master/slave power supply is input to the power distribution subrack. After the processes of wave filtering and lightning protection, the subrack distributes the master/slave power supply to the other subracks in the ZXWM M900 equipment.

The dimensions of the power distribution subrack are 177 mm (height) × 482.6 (width) × 269.5 mm (depth).

Figure 25 illustrates the structure of the power distribution subrack.

F I G U R E 25 S T R U C T U R E O F P O W E R D I S T R I B U T I O N S U B R AC K

1. Lug 2. Grounding Terminal

3. Grounding Sign 4. Master Power Supply Area

5. Connection Terminal for External Power Supply Input

6. Slave Power Supply Area 7. Alarm Indicator Board (LED)

8. Front Panel 9. Captive Fastener

10. Cable Hole

The functions of components in the power distribution subrack are described in Table 25



T AB L E 25 FU N C T I O N S O F C O M P O N E N T S I N P O W E R D I S T R I B U T I O N S U B R AC K

Component Function

Connection Terminal for External Power Supply Input

Providing two group of connection terminals for the input of external -48 V power supply. Each group includes three terminals, -48 V, -48 V GND and PGND. By default, the left group is for the input of master power supply, while the right one is for the slave power supply.

Master Power Supply Area

Slave Power Supply Area

For standard configuration, four pairs of master/slave power supply are provided. For full configuration, six pairs of master/slave power supply are provided. Each group includes three terminals, -48 V, -48 V GND and PGND, which is controlled through the air switch. It provides power supply 1+1 protection for the subrack.

Grounding Terminal

Grounding Sign

Located at both the left and right panel of the power distribution subrack. The power distribution subrack would be grounded through connecting the grounding terminals to the grounding copper busbar of the cabinet.

Alarm Indicator Board (LED)

Indicators on this board indicate the status of the cabinet simultaneously with indicators of the alarm board on the front door of the cabinet. The green, yellow, and red indicator indicates the status of normal, warning, and critical alarm respectively.

Front Panel

The front panel is a plaque with identifiers for air switches and warning signs. Positions on both the left and right of the front panel are reserved for air switches of master/slave power supply. The silkscreen identifiers of power supply, serial number and on/off status are printed at corresponding position. With standard configuration, the air switches with the identifier -48V_In1 1~4 is for master power supply, while those with -48V_In2 1~4 is for slave power supply. The position reserved for indicators on the alarm indicator board is in the middle of the front panel. The warning sign on the left bottom corner of the front panel to alert that it can only be operated by professional persons. The electric shock sign on the right bottom corner warns there is a risk of electric shock.

Lug Fasten the screws on the left and right lugs to fix the power distribution plug-in subrack in the cabinet.

Captive Fastener Used to fix the front panel of power distribution subrack and the subrack itself.

Cable Hole Located at the left and right panel of the power distribution subrack. Power cables connected to the subrack are laid through them.

Monitoring Plug-in Box The monitoring plug-in box is used to support and shield the power supervision board (PWSB), which monitors the power supply. The PWSB board also provides interfaces such as subrack power alarm interface, alarm



output interface, ring strip interface, external alarm input interface, 36-pin data bus socket.

The dimensions of the monitoring plug-in box are 43.6 mm (height) × 482.6 mm (width) × 257 mm (depth). Figure 26 illustrates the structure of the monitoring plug-in box.

F I G U R E 26 S T R U C T U R E O F M O N I T O R I N G P L U G - I N B O X

1. Captive Fastener 2. Lug 3.PWSB

4. Cabling Beam 5. Plaque

The functions of components in the monitoring plug-in box are described in Table 26.

T AB L E 26 FU N C T I O N S O F C O M P O N E N T S I N M O N I T O R I N G P L U G - I N B O X

Component Function

PWSB As the core of the monitoring plug-in box, it monitors the power supply and provides various interfaces for external signals.

Cabling Beam Cables connected to the monitoring plug-in box can be tied on the beams at both sides of the plug-in box.

Plaque Turn the plaque horizontal before laying and tying cables. And after that close the plaque to shield the interfaces in the plug-in box.

Lug

Captive Fastener

Fix the captive fasteners on the lugs to secure the monitoring plug-in box in the cabinet.

ODF Plug-in Box The ODF plug-in box is optional for reserved optical fiber cables and their connections and assignments. 52 fiber cables can be reeled in it at most. Generally, the ODF plug-in box is placed on the under layer of the subrack, as shown in Figure 4.

Dimensions: 88 mm (height) × 482.6 mm (width) × 269.5 mm (depth)

Figure 27 and Figure 28 illustrates the outline and inner structure of the ODF plug-in box respectively.



F I G U R E 27 OU T L I N E O F ODF P L U G - I N B O X

1. Captive Fastener 2. Lug 3. Cable Outlet 4. Front Panel

F I G U R E 28 I N N E R S T R U C T U R E O F ODF PL U G - I N B O X

1. Cable Outlet 2. Guide Rail 3. Front Panel

4. Adapter Board 5. ODF Board

F I G U R E 29 P O S I T I O N AN D N U M B E R O F OP T I C AL C O N N E C T O R S O N ODF B O AR D

The functions of components in ODF plug-in box are described in Table 27.



T AB L E 27 S T R U C T U R E S O F C O M P O N E N T S I N ODF P L U G - I N B O X

Component Function

Cable outlet Entrance or outlet of the optical fiber cables.

Front panel

Loose the captive fastener on the front panel and open it to facilitate the layout of cables. After that, close the front panel and screw the captive fastener to seal the ODF plug-in box, as illustrated in Figure 27.

Lug The left lug and right lug at the rear of plug-in box, combining with captive fasteners on them, are used to fix the box in cabinet.

Captive fastener Used to fix the front panel of the ODF plug-in box; Used to fix the ODF plug-in box in the cabinet.

Guide rail The ODF board can be pulled out along the guide rail before laying optical fiber cables.

Adapter board The ODF board is fixed on it.

ODF board 52 optical connectors can be installed on each ODF board at most for 52 optical fiber cables. The positions and numbers of optical connectors are as illustrated in Figure 29.

DCM Plug-in Box The dispersion compensation should be considered for the line when the signal rate is above 10 Gbit/s. The dispersion compensation module (DCM) with four input/output interfaces can be installed in the DCM plug-in box. The DCM plug-in box is optional, and users can use it according to actual requirements. It is generally placed at the under layer of the subrack, and the location is as shown in Figure 4.

Dimensions: 43.6 mm (height) × 482.6 mm (width) × 269.5 mm (depth)

Figure 30 illustrates the structure of the DCM plug-in box.

F I G U R E 30 S T R U C T U R E O F DCM P L U G - I N B O X

1. Dispersion Compensation Module 2. Lug 3. Captive Fastener

Components


4. Cable Outlet 5. Optical Connector 6. Front Panel

The functions of components in DCM plug-in box are described in Table 28.

T AB L E 28 FU N C T I O N S O F C O M P O N E N T S O F DCM P L U G - I N B O X

Component Function

Dispersion compensation module (DCM)

It is the core of DCM plug-in box. The compensation value of the module should be configured according to actual case.

Optical connector Optical fiber cables are connected to the module with optical connectors in the plug-in box.

Cable outlet Located at the side panel of the plug-in box, it is a passage for optical cables in or out of the box.

Front panel It is detachable, and should be detached before connecting optical cables.

Lug The left lug and right lug, combining with captive fasteners on them, are used to fix the plug-in box in the cabinet.

Captive fastener Used to fix the front panel of the DCM plug-in box; Used to fix the DCM plug-in box in the cabinet.



This page is intentionally blank


C h a p t e r 3

Boards

This chapter describes the functions, principles, structures and basic operations of all available boards provided for the ZXWM M900 equipment.

Overview Table 29 lists all available boards provided for the ZXWM M900 equipment in terms of type and corresponding components or positions they can be plugged in.

T AB L E 29 AV A I L A B L E B O A R D S F O R ZXWM M900

Board ID Full Name Applicable Position

Control and supervision boards

NCP NE Control Processor

OSC Optical Supervision Channel

OHP Overhead Processing Board

NCPF NE Control Processor for Fast Ethernet

OSCF Optical Supervision Channel for Fast Ethernet

OHPF Overhead Processing Board for Fast Ethernet

APSF Automatic Protection Switching for Fast Ethernet

OA subrack

PBX Power Box Board Interface area of subrack

PWSB Power Supervision Board Monitoring plug-in box

FCB Fan-Control Board Independent fan unit

Optical transponder boards

OTU Optical Transponder Unit

OTUF Optical Transponder Unit with FEC

OTU10G Optical Transponder Unit for 10 Gb/s

OA/OTU subrack

EOTU10G Enhanced Optical Transponder Unit for 10 Gb/s

Convergence boards




SRM42 Four 622 M/155 M SubRate Mux Board

SRM41 Four 2.5 G SubRate Mux Board

GEM2 Two Gigabit Ethernet Mux Board

GEMF Gigabit Ethernet Mux Board with FEC

GEM8 Eight Gigabit Ethernet Mux Board

DSA Data Service Aggregation Board

DSAE Data Service Aggregation Electrical Interface Board

DSAF Data Service Aggregation with FEC

SMU SDH Multiplex Unit

OA/OTU/TMUX subrack

Multiplex/demultiplex boards

OCI Optical Channel Interleaver

OBM Optical Broadband Multiplexer

OMU Optical Multiplexing Unit

VMUX Variable insertion loss Multiplexer

ODU Optical De-Multiplexing Unit

OAD Optical Add/Drop Board

WBU Wavelength Blocking Unit

WSU Wavelength Selective Unit

WBM Wavelength Blocking Multiplexing

SDM Supervisory Division Multiplexing Board

OA/OTU subrack

Optical amplification boards

DRA Distributed Raman Amplifier

EOA Enhanced Optical Amplifier OA/OTU subrack

Power management boards

LAC Line Attenuation Compensator

OWM Optical Wavelength Monitor

OPM Optical Performance Monitor

MCPD Multi Channel Power Detector

OA/OTU subrack

Protection boards

OP Optical Protect Board

OMCP Optical Multi-Channel Protection

OPMS Optical Protect for Mux Section

OPCS Optical Protect for Channel Section

OA/OTU subrack

Clock board

CA Clock Assignment

CSU Cross_switch and Synchronous_clock Unit TMUX subrack

Chapter 3 Boards


Structure of Boards The structure of boards for ZXWM M900 can be divided into four types according to the positions they can be placed in.

Structure of Boards in OA/OTU/TMUX Subrack Figure 31 illustrates the structure of an OTU board.

F I G U R E 31 S T R U C T U R E O F OTU B O AR D

1. Front Panel 2. Spanner 3. PCB

Boards with this type of structure consist of front panel, spanners and PCB.

Front panel: The front panel is made up of aluminium alloy. Indicators and necessary interfaces are located on it with corresponding silkscreen identifiers. The board name is also printed on the front panel.

Spanner: The spanner is made of zinc alloy. The spanner can be self-locked with the spring plate on it. The main functions of the spanner are as follows.

Facilitate pulling in/out the board due to the leverage of spanners;

Lock the board in the subrack, and guarantee the reliability of connection between the board and backplane, and the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of the equipment.

Contributing to the contact between the spanner and the subrack, electrostatic can be discharged while pulling out the board.



PCB

The PCB is the principle part of board with the dimensions of 320 mm × 210 mm. Its front is connected to the front panel. Connectors on its rear correspond to sockets on the backplane, through which the connection between the board and backplane is achieved.

The metal shielding plate on the solder side of PCB guarantees the good EMC performance of the equipment. On the components side of the PCB, there is the version silkscreen with the format of the letter “B” followed by six Arabic numerals. The first two numerals indicate the release year, the second two indicate the release month, and the last two indicate the modification flag.

Board label

Board label includes board indication label and board bar code label, which is not shown in Figure 31.

Board indication label: It is pasted 2 mm below the silkscreen of board name on the board panel. Board indication label content includes line side (aggregate side) working frequencies for OTU boards/convergence boards.

Board bar code label: Each board needs a board bar code label to indicate its bar code and type. Board bar code label is pasted close to the lower lever on the board panel. Board bar code label content includes the bar, bar code and GBOM material list number.

Structure of PBX Board The PBX board is plugged in the slot in the common interface area of OA/OTU/TMUX subrack. It consists of the front panel, enclosure and PCB. Figure 32 illustrates the structure of the PBX board.

F I G U R E 32 S T R U C T U R E O F PBX B O AR D

Front Rear

1. Front Panel 2. Enclosure 3. PCB 4. Installation Hole

Front panel: On the front panel, the indicators with silkscreen identifiers indicate the running status of the board. The board name is also printed on the front panel.

Chapter 3 Boards


Enclosure: It is used to enclose the PCB of the board. The PBX board can be fixed in the slot with the installation holes at both sides of the enclosure

PCB: The PCB is the principle part of the PBX board with the dimensions of 90 mm × 69 mm. Its front is connected to the front panel, while the rear is installed with the power interface and signal interface.

Structure of PWSB Board The PWSB board is installed in the monitoring plug-in box. Figure 33 illustrates the structure of it.

F I G U R E 33 S T R U C T U R E O F PWSB B O AR D

1. Monitoring Plug-in Box (without top cover) 2. PCB 3. Front Panel

Monitoring plug-in box

It is used to enclose the PCB of PWSB board. Refer to the section “Monitoring Plug-in Box” for detailed description.

PCB

The PCB is the principle part of PWSB board with the dimensions of 134 mm × 160 mm. It connected to the front panel.

Front panel

Various interfaces and indicators are located on the front panel of PWSB board with corresponding silkscreen identifiers.

Structure of FCB Board The FCB board is installed in the independent fan unit as shown in Figure 22. It is a PCB with the dimensions of 115 mm × 45 mm.

Figure 34 illustrates the structure of the FCB board.



F I G U R E 34 S T R U C T U R E O F FCB B O AR D

Optical Transponder Boards


OTU Optical Transponder Unit

OTUF Optical Transponder Unit with FEC

OTU10G Optical Transponder Unit for 10 Gb/s

ENOTU10G Enhanced Optical Transponder Unit for 10 Gb/s

OA/OTU subrack

OTU Board Functions The optical/electrical/optical conversion mode is adopted to implement the wavelength conversion and data regeneration in the optical transponder unit (OTU) board. It can be divided into two types, terminal OTU and regenerator OTU (OTUG).

OTU (Terminal)

It converts wavelengths of double-channel multi-service signals at the rate of STM-16 (2.5Gbit/s) or below. The terminal OTU can be divided into transmitter OTU (OTUT), receiver OTU (OTUR) and single-channel bidirectional OTU.

Optical interfaces of the OTU board locate at the line side and client side.

The line side, carrying G.692 signals with wavelength information, supports fixed wavelength lasers and tunable wavelength lasers.

The wavelength tunable function covers the low-cost 4/8-channel continuous wavelengths in C-band as well as the whole C-band. The channel spacing is 100 GHz for 4-channel, while it is 50 GHz for 8-channel.

The carries client signals, including STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/GE optical signals or continuous-rate services signals.

Chapter 3 Boards


OTU (Regenerator, OTUG)

It implements the reshaping, timing extraction and data regeneration for double-channel line optical signals. All optical interfaces of OTUG locate at the line side.

Both the receiving and transmitting optical signals at the line side meet the requirements of ITU-T G.692. And the optical signals can be STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/GE optical signals or continuous-rate service signals.

OTUG board also supports fixed lasers and tunable lasers. Moreover, it can be used as regeneration board for terminal OTU board.

The terminal OTU and regenerator OTU feature the following characteristics when continuous-rate services are accessed.

Any optical signals in compliance with ITU-T G.957 can be accessed at the client side within the rate range 12.3 Mbit/s-2.7 Gbit/s, such as STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/GE optical signals, enterprise system connection (ESCON) optical signals, fiber distributed data interface (FDDI) optical signals, fiber channel (FC) signals, digital video broadcasting (DVB) optical signals and high definition TV (HDTV) optical signals.The type of access service is configured through the network management system ZXONM E300, which provides the following three service configuration methods.

Automatic Lock of Service Type: OTU board itself detects the rate of accessed service signal automatically and try to lock the service signal.

Manual Lock of Service Type: Lock the rate of service signal accessed to the port by specifying the service type in the EMS. Each kind of service corresponds to a service rate.

Manual Lock of Service Rate: Lock the service signal by specifying the rate of accessed service in the EMS. The precision of rate specified in the EMS is 100 ppm. That means at least four effective digits of the rate input in the EMS should match the actual rate; or else the service signal can not be locked.

Terminal OTU and OTUG board will report LOL (Loss of Lock) alarm message if the accessed service signal is out of lock.

The OTU has the function of checking B1 and J0 byte in STM-4/STM-16 signals, and error packets in GE signals.

The OTU supports integrated wavelength supervision sub-systems with the channel spacing 50 GHz. For detailed description of integrated wavelength supervision sub-system, please refer to Appendix C.

The OTU supports client side loopback and line side loopback to facilitate the fault localization.

Operating Principle Figure 35 illustrates the operating principle of terminal OTU board (single-channel bidirectional OTU board for example).



F I G U R E 35 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F TE R M I N AL OTU B O AR D

Optical Receiving(O/E)

Non-Specific WavelengthOptical Transmitting

(E/O)

Specific WavelengthOptical Transmitting

(E/O)


Control and Communication Unit

Performance and OverheadSupervision Unit

G.692

G.692

G.957GbE

G.957GbE

Figure 36 illustrates the operating principle of regenerator OTU board.

F I G U R E 36 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F R E G E N E R AT O R OTU B O AR D



(E/O)


(E/O)



Performance and OverheadSupervision Unit

G.692

G.692

G.692

G.692

The OTU board consists of optical receiving modules, optical transmitting modules, performance and overhead supervision unit, and control and communication unit.

Optical receiving module

Chapter 3 Boards


It transfers the received optical signals into electrical signals through optical/electrical (O/E) conversion.

Optical transmitting module

There are two kinds of optical transmitting modules:

Specific wavelength optical transmitting module: it converts electrical signals into optical signals in compliance with ITU-T G.692.

Non-specific wavelength optical transmitting module: it converts electrical signals into optical signals without special requirements for wavelength.

Note: Only the regenerator OTU (OTUR) and single-channel bidirectional OTU board has the non-specific wavelength optical transmitting module.

Performance and overhead supervision unit

It processes performance and overhead supervision information from optical receiving modules and transmitting modules, and then transmits them to the control and communication unit.

Control and communication unit

It receives monitoring information from each modules and supervision information from the performance and overhead supervision unit, and then forwards them to the EMS. At the same time, it receives the commands from the EMS to control output wavelengths, power and overheads.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of OTU board is illustrated in Figure 37.



F I G U R E 37 FR O N T P AN E L O F OTU B O AR D

Table 30 describes the front panel and related information for basic operations.

T AB L E 30 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F OTU B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D OP E R AT I O N I N F O R M AT I O N

Board Type Item

OTU Transmitter

OTU Receiver

Single-Path Bidirectional OTU

OTU Regenerator

Board ID OTU

Board Type Label T R - G

Working Frequency Label

Frequency label is pasted below the board ID, which indicates board working frequency.

Bar Code Label Board bar code label is pasted close to the lower spanner on the board panel. It consists of bar code information and GBOM information, which indicate board bar code and board type respectively.

NOM Running indicator, green

Indicator

ALM Alarm indicator, red

Laser Warning Sign

Do not look at optical interfaces directly while plugging/unplugging fiber pigtails to avoid burning eyes.

1. Running and alarm indicators

2. Optical interface

3. Laser warning sign

4. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


Board Type Item

OTU Transmitter

OTU Receiver

Single-Path Bidirectional OTU

OTU Regenerator

IN1 Client input interface 1

Line input interface 1

Client input interface

Line 1 input interface

OUT1

Line output interface 1

Client output interface 1

Line output interface

Line 1 output interface

IN2 Client input interface

Line input interface 2

Line input interface

Line 2 input interface

Optical Interface (LC/PC)

OUT2

Line output interface 2

Client output interface 2

Client output interface

Line 2 output interface

Number of Occupied Slots 1 1 1 1

Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of OTU board is CLASS 1

Slots for OTU Board

All slots in OTU subrack Slots in OA subrack except slot 5-9 Slots in TMUX subrack except slot 7 and 8

Operation Precautions

Avoid damaging the fiber pigtail interface while plugging/unplugging the board.

Always keep the optical connectors clean. Put on the dust caps for the unused optical connectors in time.

Note: The label is pasted at the side of the board identification.

Table 31 lists the OTU board status and corresponding status of indicators.

T AB L E 31 R E L AT I O N S B E T W E E N OTU B O AR D AN D I N D I C AT O R S T AT U S

Indicator Status Working Status

NOM (Green) ALM (Red)

The board is waiting for configuration.

The red indicator and the green indicator flash slowly and alternately.

The board is running normally, and no alarm occurs. Flashing slowly and regularly Off

The board is running normally, and some alarm occurs. Flashing slowly and regularly On

The board is in the status of initialization. ON Flashing slowly and

regularly

The board is waiting for download. The red indicator and the green indicator flash quickly at the same time.

The board is in download status. The red indicator and the green indicator flash slowly at the same time.



Performance and Alarm Messages The performance, alarm and event messages of the OTU board are listed in Table 32.

T AB L E 32 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F OTU B O AR D

Type Item Remark

Output optical power -

Input optical power -

Laser bias current -

Laser TEC current -

Laser temperature offset -

15-min B1 bit error count Only for SDH service

15-min ES Only for SDH service

15-min SES Only for SDH service

15-min UAS Only for SDH service

15-min BER Only for SDH service

15-min received packets count Only for GE service

Total received byte count Only for GE service

15-min received error packet count Only for GE service

15-min received error packet ratio Only for GE service

15-min 8B/10B coding violation (CV) count Only for GE service

15-min 8B/10B CV ES Only for GE service

15-min 8B/10B CV SES Only for GE service

15-min 8B/10B CV UAS Only for GE service

Performances

Board environment temperature -

Environment temperature alarm -

High input power alarm Low input power alarm No input power alarm

-

Lost of frame alarm (LOF) Only for SDH service

Signal degradation alarm (SD) Only for SDH service

Received error packet ratio over-threshold alarm Only for GE service

J0 trace mismatch alarm Only for SDH service

High output power alarm Low output power alarm No output power alarm

-

Laser over-current alarm -

Alarms

Laser temperature offset over-threshold alarm -

Chapter 3 Boards


Type Item Remark

Unavailable signal alarm Only for SDH service

Lost of signal alarm (LOS) -

Lost of lock alarm (LOL) Only fro continuous-rate service

Receiving signal MS_AIS Only for SDH service

15-min/24-hour B1 bit error over-threshold alarm Only for SDH service

15-min/24-hour ES over-threshold alarm Only for SDH service

15-min/24-hour SES over-threshold alarm Only for SDH service

15-min/24-hour UAS over-threshold alarm Only for SDH service

15-min/24-hour 8B/10B CV count over-threshold alarm Only for GE service

15-min/24-hour 8B/10B CV second over-threshold alarm Only for GE service

15-min/24-hour 8B/10B severely CV second over-threshold alarm Only for GE service

15-min/24-hour 8B/10B CV UAS over-threshold alarm Only for GE service

Laser end-of-life alarm -

Laser fault alarm -

Cooler over-current alarm -

Laser shut-down automatically -

Laser start up automatically -

Laser APS shut-down forcibly - Events

Laser APS start up forcibly -

OTUF Board Functions OTUF (Optical Transponder Unit with FEC) is a kind of OTU board provided with the FEC (Forward Error Correction) specified in ITU-T G.709 as well as the overhead processing function. It uses the O/E/O conversion mode to realize the wavelength conversion and data regeneration. In terms of actual application, OTUF board is classified into terminal OTUF board and regenerator OTUF board (OTUFG).

Terminal OTUF

Terminal OTUF board implements the wavelength conversion for single-channel bidirectional service signals at the rate of STM-16 (2.5Gbit/s) or below.



Terminal OTUF board supports the access of STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 or GE signals at client side. Its line-side optical signals meet the wavelength requirement of ITU-T G.692. In addition, terminal OTUF board provides the overhead processing and FEC functions on the line side.

Similar to terminal OTU board, either fixed lasers or tunable lasers can be used at the line side of terminal OTUF board. Tunable lasers applied in OTUF board supports the tuning of 4/8 channels of continuous wavelengths in C band. The channel spacing is 100 GHz when 4 channels of wavelengths are tuned; while the spacing is 50 GHz when 8 channels are tuned. The terminal OTUF board also supports the tuning of 80-channel of wavelength in the whole C-band.

Regenerator OTUF (OTUFG)

OTUFG implements the reshaping, timing extraction, data regeneration, and FEC encoding/decoding for single-channel bidirectional or unidirectional line optical signals.

Single-channel unidirectional OTUFG board

Both received and transmitted optical signals of the single-channel unidirectional OTUFG board meet the requirement of ITU-T G.692 and G.709.

Single-channel bidirectional OTUFG board

In one optical direction, the single-channel bidirectional OTUFG board performs the FEC encoding for the input ITU-T G.692 optical signal, and outputs the encoded optical signal meeting the requirement of ITU-T G.692 and G.709.

In the other optical direction, the board performs the FEC decoding for the input optical signal complying with ITU-T G.692 and G.709, and outputs the decoded optical signal meeting the requirement of ITU-T G.692.

OTUFG board also supports fixed lasers and tunable lasers. The tune range of tunable laser is the same as that of terminal OTUF board.

In addition, OTUFG board can be used as the regenerator board of terminal OTUF board and GEMF board.

Both the terminal OTUF board and the OTUFG board provide the following additional functions:

Check B1, B2 and J0 bytes for SDH signals, and checks error packets for GE signals.

Supports section monitoring (SM) and path monitoring (PM) for OTN signals.

Supports the function of error correction and report.

Supports Auto Power SwitchDown (APSD) and tunable wavelength.

Supports the application in a centralized wavelength supervision subsystem. For detailed information about the centralized wavelength supervision subsystem, please refer to Appendix C in this manual.

Chapter 3 Boards


Supports both client-side loopback and line-side loopback for the fault localization.

Operating Principle Taking the single-channel bidirectional terminal OTUF board as example, Figure 38 illustrates its operating principle.

F I G U R E 38 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F TE R M I N AL OTUF B O AR D



(E/O)


(E/O)


G.692G.709G.957

GbE

G.957GbE


FEC Framer

G.692G.709

Figure 39 illustrates the operating principle of OTUFG board, including single-channel bidirectional OTUF board and single-channel unidirectional OTUF board.

F I G U R E 39 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F R E G E N E R AT O R OTUF B O AR D



(E/O)


G.692G.709

G.692G.709

FEC Framer

Single-Channel Bidirectional OTUF Board





(E/O)


(E/O)


G.692G.709G.692

G.692Optical Receiving

(O/E)

FEC Framer

G.692G.709

Single-Channel Unidirectional OTUFG Board

The OTUF board consists of optical receiving modules, optical transmitting modules, FEC framer, and the control and communication unit.

Optical receiving module

It transfers the received optical signals into electrical signals through O/E conversion.

Optical transmitting module

There are two kinds of optical transmitting modules:

Specific wavelength optical transmitting module: It converts the ITU-T G.709 electrical signal received from the FEC framer into the optical signal complying with both ITU-T G.692 and G.709.

Non-specific wavelength optical transmitting module: It converts the electrical signal received from the FEC framer into optical signal without special requirement for wavelength, and then outputs the optical signal to user equipment.

FEC framer

It implements the FEC coding and decoding of signals. The FEC function can be configured online in the EMS. In addition, the FEC framer can process performance and overhead supervision information, and transmit supervision data and overheads to the control and communication unit.


It receives monitoring information from each module and supervision information from the performance and overhead supervision unit, and then reports them to the EMS. On the other hand, it receives the commands from the EMS for controlling output wavelengths, power and overheads.

Chapter 3 Boards


Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of single-channel bidirectional terminal OTUF board is same as that of the single-channel bidirectional OTUFG board, as illustrated in Figure 40.

F I G U R E 40 FR O N T P AN E L O F OTUF B O AR D

There is only one pair of optical interface (IN/OUT) on the front panel of the OTUFG board.

Table 33 describes the front panel and related information for basic operations of the OTUF board.

T AB L E 33 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N O F OTUF B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D OP E R AT I O N I N F O R M AT I O N

Board Type

Item OTUF

Single-Channel Bidirectional OTUFG

Single-Channel Unidirectional OTUFG

Board ID OTU

Label [Note 1] F FG FG

Indicator NOM Running indicator, green




4. Laser class sign



Board Type

Item OTUF

Single-Channel Bidirectional OTUFG

Single-Channel Unidirectional OTUFG


IN1 Client input 1 Line 1 input (without FEC)

-

OUT1 Line output 1 Line 1 output (with FEC)

-

IN2 Line input 2 Line 2 input (with FEC)

-

OUT2 Client output 2 Line 2 output (without FEC)

-

IN - - Line input (with FEC)

Optical interface

(LC/PC connector)

OUT - - Line output (with FEC)

Laser warning sign


Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of OTUF board is CLASS 1

Number of occupied slots

1

Slots for OTUF board

All slots in OTU subrack

Slots in OA subrack except slot 5-9

Slots in TMUX subrack except slot 7 and 8

Operation precautions

Avoid damaging fiber pigtail connectors while plugging/unplugging the board.


Note:

1. If optical signals at both sides of the line have the FEC function, the single-channel unidirectional OTUFG board should be used as the regenerator board. If only optical signals at one side of the line have the FEC function, the double-channel OTUFG board should be used as the regenerator board.

2. The rates of butting optical interfaces should be matching, or else the service transmission will be interrupted.

The relations between the OTUF board status and corresponding indicators status are same as that of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for detailed description.

Chapter 3 Boards


Performance and Alarm Messages The performance, alarm and event information of the OTUF board are listed in Table 34.

T AB L E 34 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F OTUF B O AR D

Type Item Remark



Laser bias current Detection requirement depends on the board configuration

Laser TEC current Detection requirement depends on the board configuration


MZ modulation bias power Detection requirement depends on the board configuration

B1 bit error Only for SDH traffic

B2 bit error Only for SDH traffic

Errored second Only for SDH traffic

Severely errored second Only for SDH traffic

Down time Only for SDH traffic

Bit error rate Only for SDH traffic

Received packet Only for GE traffic

Received error packet Only for GE traffic

Received error packet ratio Only for GE traffic

8B/10B coding violation Only for GE traffic

8B/10B error second Only for GE traffic

8B/10B severely error second Only for GE traffic

8B/10B down time Only for GE traffic

FEC uncorrective frame -

FEC corrective bit error -

FEC corrective 0 bit error -

FEC corrective 1 bit error -

Bit error ratio before FEC -

Bit error ratio after FEC -

OTUk-SM-BIP8 bit error k=1

ODUk-SM-BIP8 bit error k=1

Performance




Type Item Remark

Environment temperature alarm -

High input power alarm Low input power alarm No input power alarm

-

Lost of frame alarm (LOF) Only for SDH traffic

Signal degradation alarm (SD) Only for SDH traffic

Signal unavailability alarm Only for SDH traffic

J0 TIM alarm Only for SDH traffic

LOS alarm Only for SDH traffic

15-min/24-hour B1 bit error over-threshold alarm Only for SDH traffic

15-min/24-hour B2 bit error over-threshold alarm Only for SDH traffic

15-min/24-hour ES over-threshold alarm Only for SDH traffic

15-min/24-hour SES over-threshold alarm Only for SDH traffic

15-min/24-hour UAS over-threshold alarm Only for SDH traffic

Receiving signal MS_AIS alarm Only for SDH traffic

Alignment loss alarm Only for GE traffic

15-min/24-hour received error packet Only for GE traffic

15-min/24-hour 8B/10B coding violation Only for GE traffic

15-min/24-hour 8B/10B error second Only for GE traffic

15-min/24-hour 8B/10B severely error second Only for GE traffic

OTUk J0 TIM alarm k=1

15-min/24-hour OTUk BIP8 error over-threshold alarm

k=1

OTUk LOF alarm k=1

OTUk loss of multi-frame alarm k=1

OTUk layer SM section backward defect indication (BDI)

k=1

OTUk layer SM section backward error indication (BEI)

k=1

OTUk layer SM section backward incoming alignment error (BIAE)

k=1

OTUk layer SM section incoming alignment error (IAE)

k=1

ODUk layer PM section TIM alarm k=1

ODUk layer PM section backward defect indication (BDI)

k=1

ODUk layer PM section backward error indication (BEI)

k=1

ODUk AIS alarm k=1

Alarm

ODUk LCK alarm k=1

Chapter 3 Boards


Type Item Remark

ODUk OCI alarm k=1

OTUk PT TIM alarm k=1

No output power alarm Low output power alarm High output power alarm

-


Laser over-current alarm -

Cooler over-current alarm -

MZ modulated laser power over-threshold alarm Detection requirement depends on the board configuration


Laser failure alarm -

MCU reset -


Laser startup automatically -

Laser APS shut-down forcibly -

Laser APS startup forcibly -

Event

Board configuration is faulty -

OTU10G Board Functions OTU10G (Optical Transponder Unit for 10 Gbit/s) uses the O/E/O conversion mode to realize the wavelength conversion and data regeneration. In addition, the OTU10G board supports the FEC or advanced FEC (AFEC) coding/decoding, and the G.709 overhead processing.

OTU10G board is classified into two types in terms of actual application: single-channel bidirectional OTU10G (i.e. terminal OTU10G board), single-channel unidirectional regenerator OTU10G (OTU10G G).

Single-channel bidirectional terminal OTU10G

It implements wavelength conversion for single-channel bidirectional optical signals at the rate of STM-64 (10 Gbit/s) or 10 GE (10.3125 Gbit/s).

The client side supports the access of optical signals at the rate of STM-64 or 10 GE.

Optical signals at the line side meet the requirements of ITU-T G.692. In addition, the line side supports the FEC or AFEC function, which is configured on the EMS.



FEC: The use of FEC in compliance with ITU-T G.975/G.709 improves the OSNR (Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio) by about 5 dB to 6 dB equivalently.

AFEC: AFEC is an improved FEC algorithm which can improve the OSNR by about 7 dB to 9 dB equivalently.

For STM-64 services, the rate after coding is 10.709 Gbit/s. For 10 GE services, the rate after coding is 11.1 Gbit/s.

Single-channel Unidirectional Regenerator OTU10G (OTU10G G)

OTU10G G board implements the reshaping, timing extraction and data regeneration for single-channel line optical signals. Both the line-side optical received and transmitted signals comply with ITU-T G.692. The FEC or AFEC function (G.975/G.709) is also provided. The rate of line optical signals is 10.709 Gbit/s (STM-64) or 11.1 Gbit/s (10GE).

OTU10G G board with FEC function can be used as the regenerator board for SRM41 board, GEM8 board or terminal OTU10G board.

OTU10G G board with AFEC function can be used as the regenerator board for GEM8 board or terminal OTU10G board with the same AFEC technology.

The OTU10G board has the function of checking B1, B2 and J0 byte for SDH signals, and error packets for 10GE signals.

The overhead checking and processing function in compliance with ITU-T G.709 is provided.

For single-channel unidirectional OTU10G G, the electrical return-to-zero (ERZ) technology is adopted to improve the tolerance of system to the OSNR, and thus extend longer transmission distance.

The line side supports fixed wavelength lasers and tunable wavelength lasers. Tunable lasers supports the tuning of 40/80 channels of wavelengths in C band. The channel spacing is 100 GHz when 40 channels of wavelengths are tuned; while the spacing is 50 GHz when 80 channels are tuned.

The OTU10G board supports integrated wavelength supervision sub-systems with channel spacing at 50 GHz.

The OTU10G board supports client side loopback and line side loopback to facilitate the fault locating.

Operating Principle The operating principles of terminal OTU10G and regenerator OTU10G boards are illustrated in Figure 41 and Figure 42 respectively. For the description of each module, please refer to the section “OTUF board”. The signal definitions are illustrated as shown in 错误！未找到引用源。

Chapter 3 Boards


F I G U R E 41 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F S I N G L E -P AT H B I D I R E C T I O N AL OTU10G



(E/O)


(E/O)


G.692

G.709 or AFEC

G.95710GbE

G.95710GbE


FEC Framer

G.692

G.709 or AFEC

F I G U R E 42 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F S I N G L E -C H AN N E L U N I D I R E C T I O N AL OTU10G G



Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators Take single-channel bidirectional terminal OTU10G board as example. Figure 43 illustrates the front panel of it.

F I G U R E 43 FR O N T P AN E L O F S I N G L E -P AT H B I D I R E C T I O N AL OTU10G B O AR D

For single-channel unidirectional OTU10G G board, there is only one pair of optical interface (IN/OUT) on the front panel (not illustrated).




4. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


Table 35 describes the front panel and related information for basic operations of the OTU10G board.

T AB L E 35 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F OTU10G B O AR D AN D R E L AT E D OP E R A T I O N I N F O R M AT I O N

Board Type Item

Single-Channel Bidirectional Terminal OTU10G

Single-Channel Unidirectional Regenerator OTU10G

Board ID OTU10G OTU10G

Label [Note 1] - G

NOM Running indicator, green Indicator [Note 2] ALM Alarm indicator, red

IN1 Client input interface -

OUT1 Line output interface -

IN2 Line input interface -

OUT2 Client output interface -

IN - Line input interface

Optical Interface (LC/PC)

OUT - Line output interface

Number of Occupied Slots 1 1 1

Slots for OTU10G Board


Laser Warning Sign


Laser Class Sign Indicates the classification of OTU10G is CLASS 1




Note:

1. The label is pasted at the side of the board identification.

2. The relations between the OTU10G board status and corresponding indicators status are same as that of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for detailed description.



Performance and Alarm Messages The performance, alarm and event information of the OTU10G board are listed in Table 36.

T AB L E 36 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F OTU10G B O AR D

Type Item Remark






15-min B1 bit error Only for SDH traffic

15-min B2 bit error Only for SDH traffic

15-min ES Only for SDH traffic

15-min SES Only for SDH traffic

15-min UAS Only for SDH traffic

15-min BER Only for SDH traffic

15-min received packet count Only for 10 GE traffic

15-min received error packet count Only for 10 GE traffic

15-min received error packet ratio Only for 10 GE traffic

15-min OTUk BIP8 error count k=2

FEC corrected BE count -

FEC corrected 0 error count -


After-FEC BER -

Performance

FEC uncorrectable frame count -

Board environment temperature alarm -

No input optical power alarm Low input optical power alarm High input optical power alarm

-

LOF alarm Only for SDH traffic

SD alarm Only for SDH traffic

UAS alarm Only for SDH traffic

J0 TIM alarm Only for SDH traffic

LOS alarm -

15-min/24-hour B1 error over-threshold alarm Only for SDH traffic

Alarm

15-min/24-hour B2 error over-threshold alarm Only for SDH traffic

Chapter 3 Boards


Type Item Remark




Receiving signal MS_AIS Only for SDH traffic

15-min received error packet over-threshold alarm

Only for 10 GE traffic


15-min/24-hour OTUk BIP8 error over-threshold alarm

k=2

OTUk LOF alarm k=2


15-min/24-hour after-FEC ER over-threshold alarm

k=2

15-min/24-hour before-FEC ER over-threshold alarm

k=2

15-min/24-hour OTUk-SM BIP8 UAS over-threshold alarm

k=2

No output optical power alarm Low output optical power alarm High output optical power alarm

-

Laser current over-threshold alarm -



Alarm

Laser fault alarm -



Laser APS shut-down forcibly - Event


EOTU10G Board Functions EOTU10G (Enhanced Optical Transponder Unit for 10 Gbit/s) board uses the O/E/O conversion mode to realize the wavelength conversion and data regeneration. In addition, OTU10G board, complying with ITU-T G.709, supports FEC or AFEC (Advanced FEC) encoding/decoding and the processing of overhead.



EOTU10G board is classified into two types in terms of actual application: single-channel bidirectional EOTU10G (i.e. terminal EOTU10G board) and regenerator EOTU10G (EOTU10G G) including single-channel bidirectional EOTU10G G and single-channel unidirectional EOTU10G G.

Single-channel bidirectional terminal EOTU10G

It implements the wavelength conversion for single-channel bidirectional STM-64 optical signal (9.953 Gbit/s), OTU2 (10.709 Gbit/s) or 10GE optical signal (10.3125 Gbit/s).

Single-channel bidirectional OTU10G board supports the access of STM-64 and 10GE optical signal at its client side. The optical signals at its line side meet the requirement of ITU-T G.692. In addition, the line side supports the FEC or AFEC function, which is configured on the EMS.

FEC: The use of FEC in compliance with ITU-T G.975/G.709 improves the OSNR (Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio) by about 5 dB to 6 dB equivalently.

AFEC: AFEC is an improved FEC algorithm which can improve the OSNR by about 7 dB to 9 dB equivalently.

For STM-64 signal accessed at client side, the signal rate after AFEC encoding is 10.709 Gbit/s. For 10GE signal accessed at client side, the signal rate after AFEC encoding is 11.1 Gbit/s.

Regenerator EOTU10G (EOTU10G G)

EOTU10G G board implements the reshaping, timing extraction and data regeneration for single-channel line optical signal. Both the line-side optical received and optical launched signals comply with ITU-T G.692. The rate of line optical signals is 10.709 Gbit/s (STM-64) or 11.1 Gbit/s (10G).

Single-channel bidirectional EOTU10G G: The line-side input interface 1 only supports FEC function, while line-side input interface 2 supports both FEC and AFEC function. EOTU10G G board with FEC or AFEC function can be used as the regenerator board for SRM41/OTN board or terminal EOTU10G board with the same FEC or AFEC technology.

Single-channel unidirectional EOTU10G G: EOTU10G G board with FEC or AFEC function can be used as the regenerator board for SRM41/OTN board or terminal EOTU10G board with the same FEC or AFEC technology.

Both the terminal OTU10G board and the OTU10G G board provide the following additional functions:

Checks B1, B2 and J0 bytes for SDH signals, and checks error packets for 10GE signals.

Supports the overhead checking and processing function in compliance with ITU-T G.709.

Adopts the Electrical Returen-to-Zero (ERZ) technology to improve the system tolerance to OSNR, and thus entend the transmission distance.

Chapter 3 Boards


Supports the application of either fixed lasers or tunable lasers. Tunable lasers applied at the line side of EOTU10G board supports the tuning of 40/80 channels of wavelengths in C band. The channel spacing is 100 GHz when 40 channels of wavelengths are tuned. while the spacing is 50 GHz when 80 channels are tuned.

Supports the application in a centralized wavelength supervision subsystem with channel spacing at 50 GHz. For detailed information about the centralized wavelength supervision subsystem, please refer to Appendix C in this manual.

Supports client-side loopback and line-side loopback for the fault localization.

Operating Principle The operating principles of terminal EOTU10G and regenerator EOTU10G boards are illustrated in Figure 44 and Figure 45. The signal definitions are illustrated as shown in Table 37.

FIGURE 44 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF SINGLE-CHANNEL BIDIRECTIONAL EOTU10G

Optical Receiving (O/E)

Non-Specific Wavelength Optical Transmitting

(E/O)

Specific Wavelength Optical Transmitting

(E/O)


OTU2OTU2 (AFEC)

10GE OTU210GE OTU2 (AFEC)

STM-6410GE

OTU2

STM-6410GEOTU2 Optical Receiving

(O/E)

FEC Framer

OTU2OTU2 (AFEC)




FIGURE 45 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF REGENERATOR EOTU10G

Optical Receiving

� O/E�


� E/O�


� E/O�


Optical Receiving

� O/E�

FEC Framer

OTU2

OTU2� AFEC�

OTU2

OTU2� AFEC�

OTU2

10GE OTU2

OTU2OTU2 (AFEC)


10GE OTU2

10GE OTU2� AFEC)

10GE OTU2

10GE OTU2� AFEC)

Single-channel bidirectional EOTU10G G

Single-channel bidirectional EOTU10G G

T AB L E 37 S I G N AL D E F I N I T I O N O F EOUT10G B O AR D

EOTU10G board consists of optical receiving modules, optical transmitting modules, FEC framer and the control and communication unit.

Signal Rate（Gbit/s） Signal Frame FEC Algorithm

Optical Interface Standard

STM-64 9.95328 G.707 - G.957/G.691

10GE 10.3125 10GE LAN with 64/66B coding - IEEE

802.3ae

OTU2 10.709 G.709 FEC G.691/G.692

OTU2（AFEC） 10.709 G.709 AFEC G.692

10GE OTU2 11.1 G.709 FEC G.692

10GE OTU2（AFEC） 11.1 G.709 AFEC G.692

Chapter 3 Boards


Optical Receiving Module

It converts received optical signals into electrical signals through O/E conversion.

Optical Transmitting Module

It can be classified into specific wavelength transmitting optical module and non-specific wavelength transmitting optical module.

Specific Wavelength Optical Transmitting Module: It converts electrical signal in compliance with ITU-T G.709 from FEC framer into optical signal that meets the requirement of ITU-T G.692 and ITU-T G.709.

Non-Specific Wavelength Optical Transmitting Module: It converts electrical signal from FEC framer into optical signal that has no special requirements for wavelength and then outputs the optical signal to user equipment.

FEC Framer

It supports FEC or AFEC coding/decoding/coding and decoding. FEC function can be configured on EMS. In addition, it also supports performance monitoring and overhead processing function, and then input performance monitoring data and overhead bytes to the control and communication unit.

For single-channel bidirectional terminal EOTU10G and single-channel unidirectional EOTU10G G, line-side interface supports FEC or AFEC function. The line-side interface 1 of single-channel bidirectional OTU10G G only supports FEC, while interface 2 supports FEC or AFEC.


It receives the monitoring information from each module and the performance and overhead monitoring unit, and then reports them to the EMS. On the other hand, it receives the commands from the EMS for controlling the output wavelengths, optical power and overheads in the board.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators Figure 43 shows the front panel of the single-channel bidirectional EOTU10G board.



FIGURE 46 FRONT PANEL OF SINGLE-CHANNEL BIDIRECTIONAL EOTU10G BOARD

The front panel of EOTU10G G board is similar to that shown in Figure 43 except that EOTU10G G board has only one pair of optical interfaces (IN/OUT) on its front panel.

Table 38 describes the front panel and related information for basic operations of EOTU10G board.

TABLE 38 DESCRIPTION OF EOTU10G BOARD’S FRONT PANEL AND RELATED OPERATION INFORMATION

Single-Channel Regenerator EOTU10G

Board Type Item

Single-Channel Bidirectional EOTU10G Single-channel

bidirectional EOTU10G G

Single-channel unidirectional EOTU10G G

Board ID EOTU10G

Label [Note 1] T/R G

NOM Running indicator, green Indicator [Note 2] ALM Alarm indicator, red

Optical Interface IN1 Client input interface Line input

interface -




4. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


OUT1 Line output interface Line output interface -

IN2 Line input interface Line input interface -

OUT2 Client output interface Line output interface -

IN - - Line input interface

(LC/PC)

OUT - - Line output interface

Number of Occupied Slots 1 1 1

Slots for OTU10G Board


Laser Warning Sign


Laser Class Sign Indicates the classification of EOTU10G is CLASS 1




Note: The label is sticked at the side of the board identification.

The relations between the working status and corresponding indicator status of EOTU10G board are same as those of OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for detailed description.

Performance and Alarm Messages The performance, alarm and event messages of the OTU10G board are listed in Table 39.

TABLE 39 PERFORMANCE, ALARM AND EVENT MESSAGES OF OTU10G BOARD

Type Item Remark




Performance




Type Item Remark

Laser temperature offset

Detection requirement depends on the board configuration

MZ modulation bias power


High input optical power over-threshold

15-min B1 error count


15-min ES

15-min SES

15-min UAS

15-min BER

Only detected for SDH signals

15-min received packet count

15-min received error packet count

15-min received error packet ratio

15-min received PAUSE frame

15-min received byte

Only detected for 10GE signals

15-min OTUk SM BIP8 error count k=2

15-min ODUk PM BIP8 error count k=2

15-min OTUk SM BIP8 ES k=2

15-min OTUk SM BIP8 SES k=2

FEC corrected BE count -



After-FEC BER -

Before-FEC BER -

FEC uncorrectable frame count -

Board environment temperature alarm -

No input optical power alarm

Low input optical power alarm

High input optical power alarm

-

LOF alarm

SD alarm

UAS alarm

J0 TIM alarm


Alarm

LOS alarm -

Chapter 3 Boards


Type Item Remark

15-min B1 error out of limit alarm

24-hour B1 error out of limit alarm Only detected for SDH signals

15-min B2 error out of limit alarm

24-hour B2 error out of limit alarm

15-min ES out of limit alarm

24-hour ES out of limit alarm

15-min SES out of limit alarm

24-hour SES out of limit alarm

15-min UAS out of limit alarm

24-hour UAS out of limit alarm

Receiving signal MS_AIS


15-min received error packet out of limit alarm

Alignment loss alarm

Only detected for 10GE signals


15-min OTUk BIP8 error out of limit alarm

24-hour OTUk BIP8 error out of limit alarm k=2

OTUk LOF alarm k=2


OTUk layer SM section BDI k=2

OTUk layer SM section BEI k=2

OTUk layer SM section BIAE k=2

OTUk layer SM section IAE k=2

15-min/24-hour OTUk-SM BIP8 CV over-threshold alarm k=2

15-min/24-hour OTUk-SM BIP8 SES over-threshold alarm k=2

15-min/24-hour OTUk-SM BIP8 UAS over-threshold alarm k=2

ODUk layer PM section J0 TIM alarm k=2

ODUk layer PM section BDI k=2

ODUk layer PM section BEI k=2

ODUk AIS alarm k=2

ODUk LCK alarm k=2

ODUk OCI alarm k=2

ODUk PT TIM alarm k=2

No output optical power alarm

Low output optical power alarm

High output optical power alarm

-

Laser current out of limit alarm -



Type Item Remark

Laser temperature offset out of limit alarm -


Laser fault alarm -

MZ modulation laser bias power over-threshold alarm


Laser shutdown automatically -

MCU reset -


Laser APS shutdown forcibly -


Event

Board configuration is faulty -

Chapter 3 Boards


Convergence Boards


SRM42 Four 622 M/155 M SubRate Mux Board

SRM41 Four 2.5 G SubRate Mux Board

GEM2 Two Gigabit Ethernet Mux Board

GEMF Gigabit Ethernet Mux Board with FEC

GEM8 Eight Gigabit Ethernet Mux Board

DSA Data Service Aggregation Board

DSAF Data Service Aggregation with FEC

DSAE Data Service Aggregation Electrical interface Board

SMU SDH Multiplex Unit

OA/OTU/TMUX subrack

SRM41/SRM42 Board The functions of SRM41 and SRM42 are described in Table 40.

T AB L E 40 FU N C T I O N S O F SRM41/SRM42 B O AR D

Board Function

SRM42 SRM41

Main Function

The data multiplexing technology is adopted to implement the Mux/DeMux between four-channel STM-1/STM-4 and STM-16 signal.

The data multiplexing technology is adopted to implement the Mux/DeMux between four-channel STM-16 and OTU2 signal.

Tributary interface function

STM-1/STM-4 optical signals meeting the requirements of G.957 can be accessed.

STM-16 optical signals meeting the requirements of G.957 can be accessed.



Board Function

SRM42 SRM41

Aggregate interface function

The rate of aggregate signals is STM-16, and the wavelength meets the requirements of ITU-T G.692.

Supporting fixed wavelength lasers and tunable wavelength lasers.

The wavelength of aggregate signal meets the requirements of ITU-T G.692. And the interfaces comply with optical interface standards S-64.2b in G.691.

Supporting SDH synchronous convergence and OTN asynchronous convergence.

Supporting FEC/AFEC coding/decoding and complying with ITU-T G.709. The signal rate after coding is 10.709 Gbit/s. The format of FEC/AFEC should be configured in the EMS.

Supporting fixed wavelength lasers and tunable wavelength lasers.

Wavelength tunable function

The aggregate output supports tunable wavelength lasers. The function is same as that of OTU board. Refer to the section “OTU Board” for detailed description.

The aggregate output supports the tuning of 48/96-channel wavelengths in the whole C-band. For 48-channel wavelengths, the channel spacing is 100 GHz. For 96-channel wavelengths, the spacing is 50 GHz.

ERZ modulation Not available

The ERZ modulation can improve the system tolerance to OSNR, and thus the transmission distance can be extended.

Integrated wavelength supervision

Supporting the integrated wavelength supervision with the channel spacing 50 GHz. For detailed information about the supervision sub-system, please refer to “Appendix C”.

Clock management

Cooperating with the clock assignment (CA) board, the SRM41/SRM42 boards can perform powerful clock management function. The board can select the best clock automatically according to the synchronization status message (SSM) from the external clock source (2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz), internal clock of board, and the tributary/aggregate clock of other SRM41/SRM42 board in the TMUX subrack. In addition, the clock can be transmitted through aggregate services of the SRM41/SRM42 board.

Performance supervision

Supervising the B1, B2 and J0 performance in tributary and aggregate signals.

Transparent transmission of overheads

Transmitting SDH section overheads (SOH) transparently. The transmitted overhead bytes can be configured in the EMS.

Loopback function

Supporting client side loopback and line side loopback to facilitate faults locating.

Operating Principle The operating principle of SRM41/SRM42 board is illustrated in Figure 47.

Chapter 3 Boards


F I G U R E 47 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F SRM41/SRM42 B O AR D

Tributary Optical Module

Convergence Unit

Aggregate Optical Module

Clock Processing Unit


G.692 (SRM42)

G.957

G.692/G.709(SRM41)

The SRM41/SRM42 board consists of the tributary optical module, aggregate optical module, convergence unit, clock processing unit and the control and communication unit.

Tributary optical module

Small form factor pluggable (SFP) modules are adopted in the tributary optical module to input or output client SDH optical signals.

SRM42: four-channel STM-1/STM-4 optical signals in compliance with ITU-T G.957 can be accessed.

SRM41: four-channel STM-16 optical signals in compliance with ITU-T G.957 can be accessed.

Aggregate optical module

Line optical signals are input to or output from the aggregate optical module. It supports the tunable wavelength function.

SRM42: signals at the rate STM-16 meet the requirements of ITU-T G.692.

SRM41: supporting FEC/AFEC coding/decoding. The signal rate after coding is 10.709 Gbit/s. Line optical signals meet the requirements of ITU-T G.692 and G.709, and supports G.709 overhead processing.

Convergence unit

As the principle part of SRM41/SRM42 board, the convergence unit performs the multiplexing and demultiplexing function.

In the converging direction, tributary signals are converged as the aggregate signal. And then the aggregate signal is sent to the aggregate optical module.

In the de-converging direction, the aggregate signal is de-converged to tributary signals which will be output from the tributary optical module.

SRM42 board supports the SDH synchronous convergence format, while SRM41 supports SDH synchronous convergence format and OTN asynchronous convergence format.



In addition, it implements the transparent transmission of SOH and the multiplexing/demultiplexing of data.

Clock processing unit

This unit can either process clocks alone, or perform more powerful clock processing function cooperating with the CA board, thus guarantying the clock precision of SDH signals. The configuration and management of clock sources comply with ITU-T G.781.

The unit can select the best clock as the aggregate transmitting clock according to the SSM from the tributary clock, aggregate clock and the clock provided by the CA board. This clock can be transmitted to the far end together with services, and then be used as the clock source of far-end equipment.

The unit can select the best clock from the tributary and aggregate clock, and provide it to the CA board.

When all clock sources are in failure, the internal clock of the board will be used as the aggregate transmitting clock (the frequency deviation is less than 4.6 ppm).


This unit monitors the power supply of the board. And it performs the board and EMS supervision function.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators Taking the SRM41 board as example, Figure 48 illustrates the front panel of the board.

Chapter 3 Boards


F I G U R E 48 FR O N T P AN E L O F SRM41 B O AR D

Table 41 describes the front panel and related information for basic operations of the SRM42/SRM41 board.

T AB L E 41 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F SRM42/SRM41 B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D OP E R A T I O N I N F O R M AT I O N

Board TypeItem

SRM42 SRM41

Board ID SRM42 SRM41

Working Frequency Label

Indicates board working frequency which is pasted under the board ID



Indicator Tributary optical interface indicator

Located at the right side of each tributary optical interface, as illustrated in Figure 48. The indicator is green. It indicates the working status of corresponding tributary interface.


2. Aggregate interface optical interface

3. Tributary interface

4. Tributary interface indicators


6. Laser class sign



Board TypeItem

SRM42 SRM41

IN Line input interface, connected with flange, LC/PC connector

OUT Line output interface, connected with flange, LC/PC connector

DROP1-DROP4

Output optical interface of tributary 1-4, LC/PC connector Tributary signals are accessed through SFP modules.

Optical Interface

ADD1-ADD4Input optical interface of tributary 1-4, LC/PC connector Tributary signals are accessed through SFP modules.

Number of Occupied Slots 1 1

Laser warning sign Do not look at optical interfaces directly while plugging/unplugging fiber pigtails to avoid burning eyes.

Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of OTU10G board is CLASS 1

Slots for SRM Board All slots in OTU subrack Slots in OA subrack except slot 5-9 Slots in TMUX subrack except slot 7 and 8




The OTUG board should be used as the regenerating board for SRM42 boards.

When the FEC technology is adopted, the regenerating OTU10G board with the same FEC technology should be used as the regenerating board for SRM41 boards.

Table 42 lists the SRM42/SRM41 board status and corresponding status of indicators.

T AB L E 42 C O R R E S P O N D E N C E R E L AT I O N S B E T W E E N T H E W O R K I N G S T A T U S A N D I N D I C AT O R S T AT U S O F T H E SRM41/SRM42 B O AR D

Indicator Status

Working Status NOM (Green) ALM (Red)

Tributary Optical Interface Indicator (Green)

Chapter 3 Boards


Indicator Status


Tributary Optical Interface Indicator (Green)

The Bootrom program is downloaded.

Off Off -


The green indicator and the red indicators flash alternately. -

The board is running normally, and no alarm occurs.

Flashing slowly and regularly Off -

The board is running normally, and some alarm occurs.

Flash slowly and regularly Normally on -

The board is performing self-test upon power on.

The red indicator and the green indicator flashes quickly for three times. -

The board is in the downloading status

The red indicator and the green indicator flashes slowly at the same times. -

The tributary optical interface is working normally.

- - On

The tributary optical interface is working abnormally.

- - Off

Performance and Alarm Messages

TH E P E R F O R M AN C E , AL AR M AN D E V E N T I N F O R M AT I O N O F T H E SRM42/SRM41 B O AR D AR E L I S T E D I N T AB L E 43 ,



Table 44 and Table 45 respectively.

T AB L E 43 P E R F O R M AN C E M E S S AG E S O F SRM42/SRM41 B O AR D

Detection Point Performance Items Remark

Board Environment temperature Only for SRM41 board



Inner-module temperature Only for SRM42 board


MZ modulation bias power


Aggregate transmitter

Laser TEC current -



15-min ES

15-min SES

15-min UAS


15-min BER

Only for SRM42 board

FEC corrected BE count

Before-FEC BER

FEC uncorrectable frame

FEC corrected 0 error count

FEC corrected 1 error count

After-FEC BER

15-min OTU2 SM BIP8 error count

These performances are detected only when the SRM41 board is configured with bit decoding or decoding/coding function.

15-min ODU2 PM BIP8 error count

15-min TCMi BIP8 error count

15-min TCMi BEI error count

15-min TCMi UAS error count

15-min TCMi SES error count

15-min TCMi BIP8 BE over-threshold

Aggregate receiver

24-hour TCMi BIP8 BE over-threshold

i=1-6. these performances are detected only when SRM41 is configured as FEC decoding/coding, and TCM is configured in the mode of running or monitoring.

15-min B1 error count -


15-min ES -

15-min SES -

15-min UAS -

Tributary receiver

15-min BER -

Chapter 3 Boards



Input optical power It depends on the board configuration whether to detect this item.

Inner-module temperature

Laser bias current Tributary transmitter

Output optical power




T AB L E 44 AL AR M M E S S A G E S O F SRM42/SRM41 B O AR D

Detection Point Alarms Remark

Board Board environment temperature alarm Only for SRM41 board

No output optical power Low output optical power High output optical power

-



TEC current over-threshold alarm

It depends on the board configuration whether to detect this item.

Inner-module temperature over-threshold alarm Only for SRM42 board

MZ modulation bias power over-threshold alarm



Laser end-of-life alarm Only for SRM42 board


-

LOF alarm

UAS alarm

SD alarm

LOS alarm

J0 TIM alarm

15-min/24-hour B1 error count over-threshold alarm


15-min/24-hour ES over-threshold alarm

15-min/24-hour SES over-threshold alarm

15-min/24-hour UAS over-threshold alarm


15-min/24-hour before-FEC BE over-threshold alarm

15-min/24-hour after-FEC BE over-threshold alarm

OTU2 LOF alarm

OTU2 loss of multi-frame alarm

Aggregate receiver

OTU2 J0 TIM alarm


Chapter 3 Boards



15-min/24-hour OTU2 BIP8 error over-threshold alarm

OTU2 layer SM section BDI

OTU2 layer SM section BEI

OTU2 layer SM section BIAE

OTU2 layer SM section IAE

ODU2 layer PM section BDI

ODU2 layer PM section BEI

ODU2 layer PM section IAE

ODU2 AIS alarm

ODU2 OCI alarm

ODU2 PT TIM alarm

TCMi J0 TIM alarm

TCMi layer BDI

TCMi layer BIAE

TCMi layer IAE

TCMi AIS alarm

TCMi LCK alarm

TCMi LTC alarm

TCMi OCI alarm

i=1-6, Only for SRM41 board

LOF alarm -

LOS alarm -

UAS alarm -

SD alarm

J0 TIM alarm -


Only for SDH traffic


Only for SDH traffic




Receiving signal MS_AIS Only for SDH traffic

Tributary receiver






No output optical power alarm Low output optical power alarm High output optical power alarm


Laser current over-threshold alarm

Tributary transmitter

Inner-module temperature over-threshold alarm


T AB L E 45 E V E N T M E S S AG E S O F SRM42/SRM41 B O AR D

Detection Point Item

Tributary light shut-down (laser shut-down) Tributary transmitter

Tributary light start up (laser startup)

Tributary light shut-down (laser shut-down) Aggregate transmitter

Tributary light startup (laser startup)

Board Clock switching succeeds/fails

GEM2 Board Functions GEM2 (Two Gigabit Ethernet Mux Board) board receives optical GE signals complying with IEEE802.3 from SDH equipment, carries out O/E/O conversion for them and finally combines them into an optical signal with special wavelength complying with ITU-T G.692. It also implements the opposite procedure of combination, that is, converts ITU-T G.692 optical signal into two GE optical signals.

Tributary side

Two optical GE signals, complying with IEEE802.3, are accessed at the tributary side of the GEM2 board.

Aggregate side

Optical signal on the aggregate side of GEM2 board meets the specification of ITU-T G.692 with the rate up to 2.5 Gbit/s.

Check B1, B2 and J0 bytes for SDH signals.

Support both fixed lasers and tunable lasers at the aggregate side. In case of tunable lasers, 4 or 8 continuous wavelengths in C band can be tuned. The channel spacing is 100 GHz for 4 channels, while it is 50 GHz for 8 channels.

Chapter 3 Boards


Operating Principle Figure 49 illustrates the operating principle of GEM2 board.

FIGURE 49 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF GEM2 BOARD

GEOpticalModule

Con

vergence

Unit


G.692SD

H O

verh

ead

Processin

g U

nit

GEOpticalModule

GE opticalsignals

MAC

Contro

ller Unit

Aggregateopticalmodule

GE Convergence Unit

STM-16

In the multiplexing direction (GE STM→ -16), the GE optical signals are accessed by two GE optical modules respectively. They are processed in the GE convergence unit and multiplexed into an electrical STM-16 signal. Then the electrical STM-16 signal is input to the aggregate optical module and converted into an optical signal complying with ITU-T G.692.

In the demultiplexing direction (STM-16 GE), an aggregate optical signal →(complying with ITU-T G.692) is accessed through the aggregate optical module. The aggregate signal is processed in the GE convergence unit and separated into two electrical GE signals. Then these two electrical signals are converted into two optical signals and output by two GE optical modules respectively.

GEM2 board consists of two GE optical modules, a GE convergence unit, an aggregate optical module, and the control and communication unit.

GE Optical Module

GEM2 board has two GE optical modules.

Each module accesses an optical GE signal (IEEE802.3) and converts it into an electrical signal in the multiplexing direction, while receives an electrical GE signal from the GE convergence unit and converts it into an optical signal (IEEE802.3) in the demultiplexing direction.

GE Convergence Unit

The GE convergence unit implements the multiplexing/demultiplexing between two electrical GE signals and an electrical STM-16 signal. It consists of an MAC controller unit, a convergence unit and an SDH overhead processing unit.



In the multiplexing direction

The MAC controller unit receives two electrical GE signals and identifies MAC addresses in the Ethernet frames.

The convergence unit combines two GE signals into one signal and sends it to the SDH overhead processing unit.

The SDH overhead processing unit mapps the Ethernet frames into an SDH frame and processes SDH overheads and generates B1/B2/J0 bytes etc. Finally, it outputs an electrical STM-16 signal to the aggregate optical module.

In the demultiplexing direction

The SDH overhead processing unit receives an electrical STM-16 signal from the aggregate optical module. It processes the signal’s overheads, checks the B1/B2/J0 bytes and demaps the SDH frame to GE frame.

The convergence unit demultiplexes the electrical GE signal received from the SDH overhead processing unit into two GE signals and sends them to the MAC controller unit.

The MAC controller unit determines the Ehternet transmit ports for the two electrical GE signals and outputs them to corresponding GE optical modules.


GEM2 board has only one aggregate optical module.

In the multiplexing direction, the aggregate optical module receives an electrical STM-16 signal from the GE convergence unit, converts it into an optical signal (ITU-T G.692) and then output the optical signal.

In the demultiplexing direction, it converts the optical signal (ITU-T G.692) received from user equipment into an electrical STM-16 signal and then sends it to the GE convergence unit.


It monitors the power supply of the board and the running of the board and performs the supervision function of the EMS.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of the GEM2 board is shown in Figure 50.

Chapter 3 Boards


FIGURE 50 FRONT PANEL OF GEM2 BOARD

Table 46 describes the front panel and related information for basic operations of GEM2 board.

TABLE 46 DESCRIPTION OF GEM2 BOARD’S FRONT PANEL AND RELATED OPERATION INFORMATION

Board

Item GEM2

Board ID GEM2

NOM Running indicator, green Indicator



2. Aggregate optical interface

3. Tributary optical Ethernet interface

4. Indicator of tributary optical Ethernet interface


6. Laser class sign



Board

Item GEM2

Indicator of optical Ethernet interface

Located at the right side of each optical Ethernet interface, as shown in Figure 50. It is a green indicator used to indicate the running status of corresponding optical Ethernet interface.

IN Line input interface, connected through a fiber optic adaptor, LC/PC connector

OUT Line output interface, connected through a fiber optic adaptor, LC/PC connector

DROP1 Optical output Ethernet interface of tributary 1, LC/PC connector

ADD1 Optical input Ethernet interface of tributary 1, LC/PC connector


Optical interface



Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of GEM2 board is CLASS 1

Number of occupied slot

1

Slots for GEM2 board



Avoid damaging optical connectors while plugging/unplugging the board.

Always keep optical connectors clean. Put on the dust caps for unused optical connectors in time.

OTUG board should be used as the regeneration board for GEM2 board.

Table 47 lists the relations between the working status and corresponding indicator status of GEM2 board.

Chapter 3 Boards


TABLE 47 RELATIONS BETWEEN THE WORKING STATUS AND INDICATOR STATUS OF GEM2 BOARD

Indicator Status


Ethernet Optical Interface Indicator (Green)

Waiting for configuration

The green indicator and the red indicator flash alternately and slowly.

-

Running normally Flashing slowly and regularly

OFF -

Alarming Flashing slowly and regularly

ON -

Initializing ON Flashing slowly and regularly

-

Waiting for download The green indicator and the red indicator flash quickly at the same time -

Downloading status The green indicator and the red indicator flash slowly at the same time

-

Tributary interface works normally

Flashing slowly and regularly

- ON

Tributary interface works abnormally - - OFF

Note: The “-” symbol means that the indicator status is indefinite.

Performance and Alarm Messages The performance messages of the GEM2 board are listed in Table 48.

TABLE 48 PERFORMANCE MESSAGES OF GEM2 BOARD

Detection Point Item Remark



Laser temperature -

Inner-module temperature -


TEC current -




Aggregate receiver

15-min ES -




15-min SES -

15-min UAS -

15-min BER -

Total received packet count -

Total received byte count -


-


- Tributary GE receiver

Input optical power


Total sent packet count -

Total sent packet count -


Laser bias current

Tributary GE transmitter


It depends on the board configuration whether to detect these items.

The alarm messages of the GEM2 board are listed in Table 49.

TABLE 49 ALARM MESSAGES OF GEM2 BOARD


High output power alarm -

Low output power alarm -

No output power alarm -

High laser bias current alarm -

High TEC current alarm -

Laser temperature offset out of limit alarm

-

Inner-modulation temperature out of limit alarm

-


Laser end of lifetime alarm -

High input power alarm -

Low input power alarm -

No input power alarm -

Aggregate receiver

LOF alarm -

Chapter 3 Boards



UAS alarm -

SD alarm -

LOS alarm -

J0 Track Identifier Mismatch (TIM) alarm

-

15-min B1 BE out of limit alarm -


15-min ES out of limit alarm -

15-min SES out of limit alarm -

15-min UAS out of limit alarm -

24-hour B1 BE out of limit alarm -

24-hour ES out of limit alarm -

24-hour SES out of limit alarm -

24-hour UAS out of limit alarm -

Receiving signal MS_AIS alarm -

LOS alarm -

15-min received error packet count out of limit alarm

-

24-hour received error packet count out of limit alarm

-

Link fail alarm -

High input power alarm

Low input power alarm

Tributary GE receiver

No input power alarm


High output power alarm

Low output power alarm

No output power alarm

High laser bias current alarm


Inner-module temperature out of limit alarm




GEMF Board Functions GEMF (Gigabit Ethernet Mux Board with FEC) implements the multiplexing/demultiplexing between two-channel GE signals and STM-16 signals through the O/E/O conversion.

Tributary side

Two optical GE signals, complying with IEEE802.3 are accessed at the tributary side of GEMF board.

Aggregate side

The optical signal at the aggregate side complies with ITU-T G.692 and G.709. The highest rate of the signal is 2.667 Gbit/s.

Checks the byte B1, B2 and J0 in the STM-16 signal.

Supports both fixed wavelength lasers and tunable wavelength lasers. In case of tunable lasers, 4 or 8 continuous wavelengths in C band can be tuned. The channel spacing is 100 GHz for 4 channels, while it is 50 GHz for 8 channels.

Operating Principle The operating principle of the GEMF board is illustrated in Figure 51.

F I G U R E 51 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F GEMF B O AR D

GEOpticalModule

ConvergenceUnit


G.692/G.709SDH

OverheadProcessing

UnitGEOpticalModule

GbE opticalsignals

MACController

Unit

OTNProcessing

Unit

GbE Convergence Unit

STM-16 OTNOpticalModule

Multiplexing direction (GE → STM-16)

Two-channel GE signals in compliance with IEEE802.3 are accessed through the GE optical modules. They are processed in the GE

Chapter 3 Boards


convergence unit and then in the OTN processing unit. Finally they are output an aggregate signal (STM-16) in compliance with ITU-T G.692 and G.709.

Demultiplexing direction (STM-16 → GE)

The aggregate signal (STM-16) complying with ITU-T G.692 and G.709 is accessed through the OTN optical module. It is processed in the OTN processing unit and then in the GE convergence unit. Finally it is demultiplexed into two-channel GE signals which are output after being transferred to corresponding optical signals in two GE optical modules respectively.

The GEMF board consists of two GE optical modules, the GE convergence unit, OTN processing unit, an OTN optical module, and the control and communication unit.

GE optical module

In the multiplexing direction, the GE optical signal in compliance with IEEE802.3 (2002) is accessed to the module and converted to corresponding electrical signal through O/E conversion.

In the demultiplexing direction, the GE signal in compliance with IEEE802.3 (2002) is output after E/O conversion.

GE convergence unit

The GE convergence unit is composed of the MAC controller unit, the convergence unit and the SDH overhead processing unit. In this unit, two GE signals are multiplexed, while an STM-16 signal is demultiplexed.

In the multiplexing direction, the MAC controller unit identifies the MAC address in the Ethernet frames of two GE electrical signals output from the GE optical modules. In the convergence unit, two GE signals are multiplexed into one signal which will be forwarded to the SDH overhead processing unit. After the mapping from Ethernet frames to STM-16 frame, overhead processing and the generation of the bytes B1/B2/J0, the signal is transferred to the OTN processing unit as an STM-16 electrical signal.

In the demultiplexing direction, the STM-16 electrical signal output from the OTN processing unit is transmitted to the SDH overhead processing unit, which will process overheads and check the bytes B1/B2/J0 in the STM-16 signal. Then the signal is demultiplexed into two GE signals. These two signals are transferred to the MAC controller unit through the convergence unit. The MAC controller unit selects the transmitting ports for the electrical signals and forwards them to corresponding GE optical modules.

OTN processing unit

It implements the FEC coding/decoding for STM-16 signals, the insertion and check of ODU1 Trail Track Identifier (TTI) in the SM byte, and the checkout of ODU1 BIP-8.

In the multiplexing direction: It receives the STM-16 signal from the GE convergence unit. After completing the FEC coding of the signal



and inserting the TTI and multi-frame byte, it outputs the STM-16 signal (complying with G.709) to the OTN optical module.

In the demultiplexing direction: The OTN processing unit receives the aggregate signal from the OTN optical module. Through completing the FEC decoding, counting the corrected bit error, extracting the TTI and counting the BIP-8, it converts the aggregate signal to the STM-16 electrical signal and then forwards it to the GE convergence unit.

OTN optical module

GEMF board provides an OTN optical module:

In the multiplexing direction: It receives the G.709 STM-16 electrical signal, converts it to the STM-16 optical signal complying with both G.692 and G.709 through E/O conversion.

In the demultiplexing direction: It converts the STM-16 optical signal complying with G.692 and G.709 to the electrical signal and forwards it to the OTN processing unit.


This unit monitors the power supply of the board. And it performs the supervision function for board and EMS.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of the GEMF board is shown in Figure 52.

Chapter 3 Boards


F I G U R E 52 FR O N T P AN E L O F GEMF B O AR D

Table 50 describes the front panel and related information for basic operations of the GEMF board.

T AB L E 50 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F GEMF B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D OP E R A T I O N I N F O R M AT I O N

BoardItem

GEMF

Board ID GEMF

Operating frequency label

Indicates board operating frequency which is pasted under board ID



Indicator Optical Ethernet interface indicator

Two green indicators for two tributary optical Ethernet interface respectively, as shown in Figure 52.

Optical interface IN Aggregate input interface, connected with a flange, LC/PC

connector


2. Aggregate interface optical interface

3. Tributary interface

4. Tributary interface indicators


6. Laser class sign



BoardItem

GEMF

OUT Aggregate output interface, connected with a flange, LC/PC connector





Number of occupied slot 1



Slots for GEMF board All slots in OTU subrack Slots in OA subrack except slot 5-9 Slots in TMUX subrack except slot 7 and 8



Always keep the optical connectors clean. Put on the dust caps for unused optical connectors in time.

The OTUFG board should be used as the regenerating board for the GEMF board.

The rate of abutting interfaces should be same. Otherwise, the traffic will be obstructed.

Table 51 lists the relationship between the board status and corresponding status of indicators.

T AB L E 51 C O R R E S P O N D E N C E R E L AT I O N S B E T W E E N T H E W O R K I N G S T A T U S A N D I N D I C AT O R S T AT U S O F GEMF B O AR D

Indicators



The Bootrom program is downloaded. Off Off -

The FPGA program is downloaded.

The red indicator and the green indicator flash slowly for 30 seconds. -


The red indicator and the green indicator flash alternately. -

Chapter 3 Boards


Indicators






Flashing slowly and regularly On -

Board initialing On Flashing slowly and regularly -

The board is waiting for download

The red indicator and the green indicator flash quickly at the same time. -

Downloading status The red indicator and the green indicator flash slowly at the same time. -

The tributary interface has no LOS alarm.

- - On

Bootrom program Off Off -

The tributary interface has LOS alarm.

- - Off

Performance and Alarm Messages The performance messages of the GEMF board to be detected and monitored are listed in Table 52.

T AB L E 52 P E R F O R M AN C E M E S S AG E S O F GEMF B O AR D




Laser temperature -


TEC current -


15-min B1 error -

15-min B2 error -

15-min ES -

15-min SES -

15-min UAS -

Aggregate receiver

15-min BER -




Bit error corrected by FEC -

BER before FEC -

Frame unable to be corrected by FEC -

0 bit error corrected by FEC -

1 bit error corrected by FEC -

BER after FEC -

15-min OTUk BIP8 error -

Total received packets -

Total received bytes -

15-min received packet error ratio -

15-min received packet error - Tributary GE receiver


Total sent packets -

Total sent bytes -

Output optical power It depends on the board configuration whether to detect this parameter.

Laser bias current It depends on the board configuration whether to detect this parameter.


Inner-module temperature It depends on the board configuration whether to detect this parameter.

Table 53 lists the main alarms of GEMF board.

T AB L E 53 AL AR M M E S S A G E S O F GEMF BO AR D






Module temperature out of limit alarm of inner module -



High cooler current alarm -

High input power - Aggregate receiver

Low input power -

Chapter 3 Boards



No input power -

LOF alarm -

Unavailable Signal (UAS) alarm -

SD alarm -

LOS alarm -

J0 Track Identifier Mismatch (TIM) alarm -







OTUk J0 TIM alarm -

15-min BIP8 error out of limit alarm -

OTUk LOF alarm -

OTUk Loss of Multi-frame (LOM) alarm -

15-min before-FEC BE out of limit threshold alarm -

15-min uncorrectable frame over-threshold alarm -

24-hour before-FEC BE out of limit alarm -

24-hour uncorrectable frame over-threshold alarm -

24-hour B1 error out of limit alarm -




LOS alarm -

Received error packet ratio over-threshold alarm -

Link fail alarm -















Module temperature out of limit alarm of inner module

GEM8 Board Functions GEM8 (Eight Gigabit Ethernet Mux Board) board implements the multiplexing/demultiplexing between eight optical GE signals and an OTU2 signal through O/E/O conversion.

Tributary side

Eight optical GE signals, complying with IEEE802.3, are accessed at the tributary side of the GEM8 board.

Supports related performance detection of GFP.

Aggregate side

Outputs optical signal, complying with ITU-T G.694.1, with the OTU2 signal structure specified in ITU-T G.709.

Support the OTU2 interface and related performance detection specifed in ITU-T G.709. FEC can be configured as standard FEC or AFEC.

Support the encapsulation of GFP-T data packets, complying with ITU-T G.704.1.

Support both fixed lasers and tunable lasers. The tuning function of tunable lasers covers the wavelengths in the whole C band.

Operating Principle Figure 53 illustrates the operating principle of GEM8 board.

Chapter 3 Boards


FIGURE 53 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF GEM8 BOARD

GEOpticalModule

ConvergenceUnit


G.694.1/G.709

OTNProcessing

UnitGE

OpticalModule

8 GEopticalsignals

10Gopticalmodule

... ...

In the multiplexing direction (GE OTU2), eight optical GE signals are →accessed through eight GE optical modules respectively. Then they are processed by the convergence unit and the OTN processing unit. Finally, they are converted into an aggregate signal (OTU2 signal) meeting the specifications in ITU-T G.694.1 and G.709.

In the demultiplexing direction (OTU2 GE), an aggregate signal complying →with ITU-T G.694.1 and G.709 is accessed to the 10 G optical module. After being processed by the OTN processing unit and the convergence unit, the signal is demultiplexed into eight electrical GE signals. Finally, eight GE optical modules convert these electrical signals into optical signals and output them.

GEM8 board consists of eight GE optical modules, a convergence unit, an OTN processing unit, a 10 G optical module and the control and communication unit.

GE Optical Module

GEM8 board has eight GE optical modules. Each of them uses SFP optical module to input or output optical GE signal in compliance with IEEE802.3.

Convergence Unit

It checks the perfomance of client service signals, performs the GFP-T mapping/demapping, and implements the convergence and divergence of GFP-T frames.

OTN Processing Unit

The OTN processing unit realizes the framing/deframing of OTU2 signal, which complies with ITU-T G.709. In addition, it supports the detection of FEC-related performances.

10 G Optical Module



This module receives electrical 10G OTN signal from the OTN processing unit, converts it into OTU2 optical signal and outputs it. On the opposite direction, it receives OTU2 optical signal from the line, converts it into an electrical 10G OTN signal and then sends it to the OTN processing unitl.


This unit monitors the power supply of the board and the running status of the board, and performs the supervision function of the EMS.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of GEM8 board is shown in Figure 54.

FIGURE 54 FRONT PANEL OF GEM8 BOARD



3. Tributary optical Ethernet interface

4. Indicator of tributary optical Ethernet interface


6. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


Table 54 describes the front panel and related information for basic operations of GEM8 board.

TABLE 54 DESCRIPTION OF GEM8’S FRONT PANEL AND RELATED OPERATION INFORMATION

Board

Item GEM8

Board ID GEM8



Indicator Optical Ethernet interface indicator

Eight green indicators are available on the lower part of the front panel, as shown in Figure 54. Each of them corresponds to a tributary optical Ethernet interface.

IN Line input optical interface, LC/PC connector

OUT Line output optical interface, LC/PC connector

ADDn Tributary input optical Ethernet interface n, n=1-8, LC/PC connector

Optical interface

DROPn Tributary output optical Ethernet interface n, n=1-8, LC/PC connector


Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of GEM8 board is CLASS 1


Slots for GEM8 board



Avoid damaging optical connectors while plugging/unplugging the board. Always keep optical connectors clean. Put on the dust caps for unused optical connectors in time.

Table 55 lists the relations between the working status and corresponding indicator status of GEM8 board.



TABLE 55 RELATIONS BETWEEN THE WORKING STATUS AND INDICATOR STATUS OF GEM8 BOARD

Indicator Status



Downloading BootROM program

OFF OFF -

Downloading FPGA program

Flashing quickly ON -



-


OFF -


ON -

Initializing The green indicator and red indicator flash quickly three times.

-

Waiting for download The green indicator and red indicator flash quickly at the same time.

-

Downloading status The green indicator and red indicator flash slowly at the same time.

-

Tributary interface has no LOS alarm

- - ON

Tributary interface has LOS alarm

- - OFF


Performance and Alarm Messages The performance messages of GEM8 board are listed in Table 56.

TABLE 56 PERFORMANCE MESSAGES OF GEM8 BOARD




Module temperature offset - Aggregate transmitter

MZ modulator bias voltage Only detected when M-Z modulated laser is used.


FEC uncorrectable frame -

Aggregate receiver

FEC corrected bit error -

Chapter 3 Boards



FEC corrected 0 bit error -

FEC corrected 1 bit error -

After-FEC BER -

Before-FEC BER -

15-min OTU2 SM_BIP8 error -

15-min ODU2 PM_BIP8 error -

15-min OTU2 SM ES -

15-min OTU2 SM SES -

15-min OTU2 SM UAS -

15-min ODU2 PM ES -

15-min ODU2 PM SES -

15-min ODU2 PM UAS -

15-min OTU2 SM BEI error -

15-min ODU2 PM BEI error -

15-min TCMi BIP8 error

15-min TCMi BEI

15-min TCMi UAS

15-min TCMi ES

15-min TCMi SES

i=1-6. Configured as FEC decoding. And TCM is configured as running mode or monitoring mode.

Total received package -

Total received bytes -


Sent GFP client data frame -


Sent GFP client management frame

-

Total sent packets -

Total sent bytes -


Laser bias current



Transmitted GFP client data frame

-


Transmitted GFP client management frame

-



The alarm messages of GEM8 board are listed in Table 57.

TABLE 57 ALARM MESSAGES OF GEM8 BOARD







-

MZ modulator bias voltage out of limit alarm

Only detected when M-Z modulated laser is used.







TCMi layer TIM

TCMi layer BDI

TCMi layer BIAE

TCMi layer IAE

TCMi AIS alarm

TCMi LCK alarm

TCMi LTC alarm

TCMi OCI alarm

i=1-6

15-min OTU2 BIP8 error out of limit alarm

-

15-min before-FEC bit error out of limit alarm

-

15-min after-FEC bit error out of limit alarm

-

15-min ODU2 PM_BIP8 error out of limit alarm

-

15-min SM ES out of limit alarm -



24-hour SM ES out of limit alarm

-


Aggregate receiver


Chapter 3 Boards



24-hour OTU2 SM_BIP8 error out of limit alarm

-

24-hour ODU2 PM_BIP8 error out of limit alarm

-

24-hour before-FEC bit error out of limit alarm

-

24-hour after-FEC bit error out of limit alarm

-

15-min TCMi BIP8 error out of limit alarm

i=1-6

24-hour TCMi BIP8 error out of limit alarm

i=1-6

LOS alarm -

OTU2 AIS alarm -

OTU2 LOF alarm -

OTU2 loss of multiframe alarm -

OTU2 TIM alarm -

ODU2 PM field TIM alarm -

OTU2 SM field BDI (Backward Defect Indication)

-

OTU2 SM field BEI (Backward Error Indication)

-

OTU2 SM field BIAE (Backward Incoming Alignment Error)

-

OTU2 SM field IAE (Incoming Alignment Error)

-

ODU2 PM field BDI (Backward Defect Indication)

-

ODU2 AIS alarm -

ODU2 LCK alarm -

ODU2 OCI alarm -

OPU signal PT mismatch -

LOS alarm -

Loss of synchronization alarm -

Received CRC error packet out of limit alarm

-

15-min 8B/10B CV out of limit alarm

-

15-min 8B/10B CV ES out of limit alarm

-


15-min 8B/10B CV SES out of limit alarm

-




15-min 8B/10B CV UAS out of limit alarm

-

24-hour 8B/10B CV out of limit alarm

-

24-hour 8B/10B CV ES out of limit alarm

-

24-hour 8B/10B CV SES out of limit alarm

-

24-hour 8B/10B CV UAS out of limit alarm

-

24-hour received package out of limit alarm

-







High laser current alarm




Laser end of life alarm -

GFP client signal failure alarm -

GFP loss of synchronization alarm

-


-


-


-


-


-


-


-



-

Chapter 3 Boards


The event messages of GEM8 board are listed in Table 58.

TABLE 58 EVENT MESSAGES OF GEM8 BOARD




SFP module unplugged Tributary transmitter

SFP module plugged







Clock switching successfully -

Clock switching failed -

MCU reset - Board

EEPROM data error -

DSA Board Functions DSA (Data Service Aggregation) board implements the multiplexing/ demultiplexing between eight data service signals, such as GE, FC, ESCON, FICON and DVB signals, and STM-16 signals through O/E/O conversion.

Tributary side

DSA board supports the access of eight data service signals at its tributary side. Each tributary interface allows the access of any kind of data service signal, GE, FC, ESCON, FICON or DVB.

Aggregate side

Two bidirectional optical interfaces with the rate of 2.5 Gbit/s are available at the aggregate side of DSA board. They comply with the specification of ITU-T G.692.

DSA board also provides the function of checking of checking B1, B2 and J0 bytes for SDH signals.



Operating Principle Figure 55 illustrates the operating principle of DSA board.

FIGURE 55 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF DSA BOARD

TributaryOpticalModule

Mappin

g U

nit


G.692SD

H O

verh

eadProce

ssing U

nit

TributaryOpticalModule

Dataservicesignals

Con

verg

ence

Unit

AggregateOpticalModule

Multiservice Convergence Unit

Dual opticalinterfaces

(2.5 Gbits/s)

STM-16... ...

In the multiplexing direction (data service signals → STM-16), eight data service signals who can be of the same kind of data service or different kinds (GE, FC, ESCON, FICON or DVB), are accessed via eigth tributary optical modules. Then the DSA board mapps these data service signals into SDH frames, performs the flow control function, detects the performance of signals and finally outputs the aggregate signals throught the aggregate optical module.

In the demultiplexing direction (STM-16 data service signals), the DSA →board receives two aggregate optical signals. It detects the performance of the signals, demultiplexes them into client data (i.e. data service signals), and then output these data service signals to user equipment through corresponding tributary optical modules after E/O conversion.

DSA board consists of eight tributary optical modules, a multiservice convergence unit, an aggregate optical module, and the control and communication unit, as introduced below.


DSA board has eight tributary optical modules. SFP module is used in each tributary optical module.

In the multiplexing direcetion

Each tributary optical module receives an optical data service signal (GE, FC, ESCON, FICON or DVB), converts it into an electrical signal and forwards the electrical signal to the multiservice convergence unit.


Chapter 3 Boards


Each tributary optical module converts the electrical data signal received from the multiservice convergence unit into an optical signal and outputs it.

Multiservice Convergence Unit

It implements the multiplexing/demultiplexing between eight electrical data signals and two STM-16 signals.

The multiservice convergence unit consists of a convergence unit, a mapping unit and an SDH overhead processing unit.


The convergence unit combines the eight electrical data signals received from eight tributary optical modules. Then the combined signals are framed into GFP (Generic Framing Procedure) and then mapped into VC by the mapping unit.

The SDH overhead processing unit maps the data frames received from the mapping unit into STM-16 frames, processes related overheads and checks B1, B2 and J0 bytes. After that, it sends the electrical STM-16 signals to the aggregate optical molude.

Note:

GFP (Generic Framing Procedure) frames are classified into two types: GFP-T (Transparent GFP) and GFP-F (Framed GFP).

GFP-T: GFP-T frames have fixed length. It is unnecessary to start processing a frame until the full frame is received. Therefore, GFP-T frames can be processed timely.

GFP-F: GFP-F frames have variable length. Only when the full frame is received, will the frame be processed.

GE data service signals can be mapped into either GFP-T frames or GFP-T frames. However, the other data service signals, such as FC, ESCON, FICON and DVB, can only be mapped into GFP-T frames, since they have higher requirements for real-time processing.


After receiving electrical STM-16 signals from the aggregate optical module, the SDH overhead processing unit processes the overheads, checks B1, B2 and J0 bytes in the signals and then forwards the signals to the mapping unit.

The mapping unit demaps the STM-16 frames into data frames and then forwards these data frames to the convergence unit. The convergence unit demultiplexes the data frames into eight electrical data signals and outputs them to corresponding tributary optical modules.


DSA board has only one aggregate optical moudule, which allows the access of optical STM-16 signals (ITU-T G.692).




The aggregate optical module receives the electrical STM-16 signals from the multiservice convergence unit, converts them into optical signals and finally output corresponding optical STM-16 signals in compliance with ITU-T G.692.


The aggregate optical module receives optical STM-16 signals (ITU-T G.692) from the optical line, converts them into electrical signals and then forwards them to the multiservice convergence unit.



Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of DSA board is shown in Figure 56.

FIGURE 56 FRONT PANEL OF DSA BOARD

Table 59 describes the front panel and related information for basic operations of DSA board.



3. Data service tributary optical interface

4. Indicator of tributary optical interface


6. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


TABLE 59 DESCRIPTIONS OF DSA BOARD’S FRONT PANEL AND RELATED OPERATION INFORMATION

Board

Item DSA

Board ID DSA



Indicator Indicator of data service tributary optical interface

The green indicators correspond to the data service tributary optical interfaces, as shown in Figure 56.

INn Line input optical interface, n=1, 2, LC/PC connector

OUTn Line output optical interface, n=1, 2, LC/PC connector

DROPn Data service tributary optical output interface, n=1 to 8, LC/PC connector

Optical interface

ADDn Data service tributary optical input interface, n=1 to 8, LC/PC connector


Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of DSA board is CLASS 1


Slots for DSA board







OTUG board should be used as the regeneration board for DSA board.



Table 60 lists the relations between the working status and corresponding indicator status of DSA board.

TABLE 60 RELATIONS BETWEEN THE WORKING STATUS AND INDICATOR STATUS OF DSA BOARD

Indicator Status


Indicator of Tributary Optical Interface (Green)



-


OFF -


ON -


-

Waiting for download

The green indicator and the red indicator flash quickly at the same time

-


-



- ON


- - OFF


Configuration of DSA Board DSA board can work in either TM (Terminal Multiplexer) mode or OAD (Optical Add/Drop) mode.

TM working mode

In this working mode, DSA board works as a terminal multiplexer.

As shown in Figure 57, bidirectional service signals are transmitted between Node A and Node B. The line optical interface 1 (STM-16_1) of node A is connected to the line optical interface 2 (STM-16_2) of node B with an optical cable.

Chapter 3 Boards


FIGURE 57 TM WORKING MODE OF DSA BOARD

1 8

……

1 8

……

Node A Node B

STM-16_1STM-16_2 STM-16_2 STM-16_1

The transmission procedure of data service from Node A to Node B is as follows:

The data service signal is input through the tributary optical interface 1 of Node A and then mapped into an STM-16 signal.

The STM-16 signal is output from the line optical interface 1 (STM-16_1) of Node A and then transmitted over the optical cable.

After reaching the line optical interface 2 (STM-16_2) of Node B, the data service signal is demapped from the STM-16 signal and output through the tributary optical interface 1 of Node B.

The transmission of data service from Node B to Node A is similar to the procedure described above.

OAD working mode

In this working mode, DSA board works as an optical add/drop multiplexer.

As shown in Figure 58, bidirectional services are transmitted between Node A and Node C. Both Node A and Node C work in the TM mode while Node B works in the OAD mode.

FIGURE 58 OAD WORKING MODE OF DSA BOARD

1 8

……

1 8

……

STM-16_1STM-16_2

1 8

……

STM-16_1 STM-16_1STM-16_2 STM-16_2

Node A(TM)

Node C(TM)

Node B(OAD)

The transmission procedure of data service from Node A to Node C is as follows:

The data service signal is input through the tributary optical interface 1 of Node A and then mapped into an STM-16 signal.



The STM-16 signal is output from the line optical interface 1 of Node A and then transmitted to the line optical interface 2 of Node B over an optical cable.

At Node B, the STM-16 signal is demapped to the tributary optical interface 1. Instead of being dropped at Node B, the demapped data service signal is mapped to the line optical interface 1 again through VC configuration and transmitted to the line optical interface 2 of Node C.

Finally, the data service signal is demapped from STM-16 signal and output from the tributary optical interface 1 of Node C.

The transmission of data service from Node C to Node A is similar to the procedure described above.

The data service signal is input through the tributary optical interface 1 of Node C and then mapped into an STM-16 signal.

The STM-16 signal is output from the line optical interface 1 of Node A and then transmitted to the line optical interface 2 of Node B over an optical cable.

At Node B, the STM-16 signal is demapped to the tributary optical interface 1. Instead of being dropped at Node B, the demapped data service signal is mapped to the line optical interface 1 again through VC configuration and transmitted to the line optical interface 2 of Node A.

Finally, the data service signal is demapped from STM-16 signal and output from the tributary optical interface 1 of Node A.

Configuration Notes:

During the configuration of DSA board, the following items should be paid attention to:

The total bandwidth of tributaries that are mapped to the same aggregate should be less than 2.5 Gbit/s.

DSA board can use up to 32 VC4s or 96 VC3s.

DSA board can multiplexes eight tributary signals into two STM-16 signals. The first STM-16 siganl contains VC4_1 to VC4_16 or VC3_1_1 to VC3_16_3, while the second one contains VC4_17 to VC4_32 or VC3_17_1 to VC3_32_3. Be cautious not to allocate the same data service to different STM-16 signals.

For the same kind of data services, either VC4 virtual concatenation or VC3 virtual concatenation mode can be used, that is, the same kind of data services can only use the same virtual concatenation mode.

However, different kinds of data services can use different virtual concatenation modes at the same time.

If a DSA board acts as a TM node, one or two line optical interfaces of it can be used. But if it acts as an OAD node, both line optical interfaces must be used and in this case, a pass-through service signal needs to use two tributary optical interfaces.

Chapter 3 Boards


The configuration of DSA board should not be limited to wavelengths. It is recommended to analyze the configuration based on data services to be accessed as a whole.

The characteristic of data services is that they do not provide unidirectional services. Therefore, the transmit/receive interfaces at the client side of DSA board must be configured with the receive/transmit interfaces of user equipment in pairs.

Performance and Alarm Messages The performance messages of DSA board are listed in Table 61.

TABLE 61 PERFORMANCE MESSAGES OF DSA BOARD




Laser temperature -


TEC current -


MZ modulator bias voltage Only detected when M-Z laser is used




15-min ES -

15-min SES -

15-min UAS -

Aggregate receiver

15-min BER -

Total received packet count

Total received byte count



Only detected for GE and GFP-F

15-min 8B/10B CV -

Total sent GFP control frame -

Total sent GFP client data frame -

Total sent GFP client management frame

-

Total sent GFP idle frame -

15-min 8B/10B UAS -

Tributary receiver

15-min received PAUSE frame Only detected for GE




Input optical power


B1 bit error ratio -

B2 bit error ratio -


Laser bias current



Total sent packets

Total sent bytes

Only detected for GE and GFP-F

15-min sent PAUSE frame count Only detected for GE signals

15-min 8B/10B CV Detected for all the signals

15-min 8B/10B UAS -

Total received GFP frame -

Total received GFP control frame -

Total received GFP client data frame -

Total received GFP client management frame

-

Total received GFP idle frame -

Abandoned GFP frame -

Core frame header detects GFP frame with multiple byte error

-

Core frame header detects single byte error

-

tHEC detects GFP frame with multiple byte error

-

tHEC detects single byte error -

eHEC detects GFP frame with multiple byte error

-

eHEC detects single byte error -

pHEC detects GFP frame with multiple byte error

-

GFP frame of mismatch user payload identifier

-


GFP frame of mismatch user extensive frame header

-

Chapter 3 Boards


The alarm messages of DSA board are listed in Table 62.

TABLE 62 ALARM MESSAGES OF DSA BOARD






High TEC current alarm -


-


-




Only detected when M-Z modulated laser is used




LOF alarm -

UAS alarm -

SD alarm -

LOS alarm -


-











Aggregate receiver


LOS alarm -

Loss of clock alarm -





15-min received error packet out of limit alarm

-


-

24-hour received error packet out of limit alarm

-


-





Tributary receiver





High laser current alarm






-


-

Loss of GFP synchronization alarm -


Failure of GFP client signal alarm -

Received aggregate clock 1

Clock unavailable alarm -

Received aggregate clock 2


Received clock from clock board in slot 8 of TMUX subrack


Received clock from clock board in slot 7 of TMUX subrack


Sent clock Clock unavailable alarm -

Chapter 3 Boards


The event messages of DSA board are listed in Table 63.

TABLE 63 EVENT MESSAGES OF DSA BOARD


Tributary laser shutdown automatically

-

Tributary laser startup automatically

-

Tributary laser APS shutdown forcibly

-

Tributary laser APS startup forcibly -

SFP module unplugged


SFP module plugged


Aggregate laser shutdown automatically

-

Aggregate laser startup automatically

-

Aggregate laser APS shutdown forcibly

-


Aggregate laser APS startup forcibly

-

Clock switching succeeded - Clock circuit port


DSAF Board Functions DSAF (Data Service Aggregation with FEC) board applies the Optical/Electrical/Optical (O/E/O) conversion mode to implement the multiplexing/demultiplexing between two or four channels of data service signals, such as GE, FC, ESCON, FICON and DVB-AIS, and one channel of OTU1 signal with FEC function. DSAF board acts as a board for accessing multi-services. Its aggregate optical interface is connected to an optical multiplexing/demultplexing board directly.

Tributary side

Provides two or four SFP optical interfaces; each of them supports the access of various client signals, such as GE, FE, ESCON, FICON and DVB-AIS etc.



Provides the capability of transmitting long GE frames with length up to 9600 bytes (not including four-byte CRC)

Provides Generic Framing Procedures (GFP) function, supports both GFP-T and GFP-F mapping modes, and supports the detection of corresponding alarm/performance

Supports the enabling control of tributary ports

SFP module used in each tributary optical interface supports Digital Diagnosis (DD) function.

Aggregate side

Implements the convergence of two/four tributary service signals, outputs OTU1 signal with the format meeting the specification in ITU-T G.709 and supports the detection of corresponding alarm/performance

Supports FEC function; the frame format after FEC encoding meet the specification in ITU-T G.709

GE ports support the auto-negotiation function

Supports Automatic Power ShutDown (APSD) function

Supports VC-4 virtual concatenation

Supports the application of fixed lasers and tunable lasers

Tunable lasers applied in DSAF board supports the tuning of 40/80 channels of wavelengths in the whole C band. The channel spacing is 100 GHz when 40 channels of wavelengths are tuned; while the spacing is 50 GHz when 80 channels are tuned.

DSAF board can be applied in a centralized wavelength supervision subsystem with the channel spacing at 50 GHz.

For detailed information about the centralized wavelength supervision subsystem, please refer to Appendix C in this manual.

Clock function

The aggregate side of DSAF board can provide reference clock

Provides external clock

Provides tributary reference clock

Supports the transparent transmission at physical layer for client equipment

Supports tributary near/far-end loopback, backplane near/far-end loopback, aggregate near/far-end loopback for convenient fault location

According to the quantity of tributary ports and the type of allowable access services, DSAF board is divided into four types, as introduced in Table 64.

Chapter 3 Boards


T AB L E 64 TY P E S O F DSAF B O AR D

Board Type Tributary Quantity

Access Service Type

Encapsulation Mode

Tributary Clock

DSAF2 (GE) 2 GE GFP-T/F One tributary reference clock

DSAF2 (multi-service)

2 GE, ESCON, DVB-AIS

GFP-T/F

The number of tributary reference clock is the same as the number of accessed service type.

DSAF4 (GE) 4 GE GFP-T/F One tributary reference clock

DSAF4 (multi-service) 4

GE, ESCON, DVB-AIS GFP-T

The number of tributary reference clock is the same as the number of accessed service type.

Operating Principle Figure 59 illustrates the operating principle of DSAF board.

F I G U R E 59 OP E R A T I N G P R I N C I P L E O F DSAF B O AR D

TributaryOptical

Module 1

TributaryOptical

Module 4

GFP

Proce

ssing U

nit

Converg

ence

/D

ivergence

Unit

Framin

g/LC

AS

Proce

ssing U

nit

OTNOpticalModule

Convergence & Framing Unit

Dataservicesignals

Tributary Side Aggregate Side

Control andCommunication Unit

Clock ProcessingUnit

Local clockClock from CSU in slot 7Clock from CSU in slot 8

OTN

/FEC

Proce

ssing U

nit

G.692/G.709/G.705

In the multiplexing direction (data service signals →OTU1 signal): Two or four client data service signals (such as GE, FC, ESCON, FICON and DVB etc.) are accessed by two or four tributary optical modules. The convergence &



framing unit multiplexes these signals into an OTU1 signal with FEC, which is output by the OTN optical module after E/O conversion.

In the demultiplexing direction (OTU1 signal → data service signals): The OTN optical module receives an OTU1 signal, converts it into an electrical signal and then sends it to the convergence & framing unit. The convergence & framing unit demultplexes the signal into two or four data service signals and sends them to corresponding tributary optical modules. Each tributary optical module converts the received electrical data service signal into an optical signal and outputs it.

DSAF board consists of 2/4 tributary optical modules, a convergence & framing unit, an OTN optical module, a clock processing unit and control and communication unit, as described below.


DSAF board provides two or four tributary optical modules. Each of them uses SFP module.


Each tributary optical module receives a data service signal (GE, FC, ESCON, FICON or DVB-ASI etc.), converts it into an electrical signal and then forwards it to the convergence & framing unit.


Each tributary optical module converts the electrical signal received from the convergence & framing unit into an optical client signal (GE, FC, ESCON, FICON or DVB-ASI etc.) and then outputs it.


The convergence & framing unit consists of a GFP processing unit, a convergence/divergence unit, a framing/LCAS processing unit and an OTN/FEC processing unit. It completes the multiplexing/demultiplexing between 2/4 channels of data service signals and 1/2 channels of 2.5 Gbit/s signals.


The convergence & framing unit implements the procedures of GFP mapping, SDH virtual concatenation mapping, OTN mapping and FEC processing for 2/4 channels of electrical data service signals (such as GE, FC, ESCON, FICON and DVB-ASI etc.) and then outputs the multiplexed signal to the OTN optical module.

Note: DSAF board supports the virtual concatenation (VC) modes VC4-xV and STS-3c-xV.

Note:



Chapter 3 Boards





The convergence & framing unit receives the 2.5 Gbit/s electrical signal from the OTN optical module and then implements the procedures of FEC processing, OTN demapping, SDH virtual concatenation demapping and GFP demapping. After the series of procedures, the 2.5 Gbit/s signal is demultiplexed into multiple client data signals. Finally, these client signals are sent to corresponding tributary optical modules after 8B/10B encoding.

OTN Optical Module


The OTN optical module converts the 2.5 Gbit/s signal received from the convergence & framing unit into OTU1 optical signal and outputs it.


The OTN optical module receives OTU1 optical signal, converts it into 2.5 Gbit/s electrical signal, and then sends it to the convergence & framing unit.


The clock processing unit can perform the following functions.

Selects an optimal clock as the board clock from the local clock, line received clock, the clock coming from CSU board in slot 7 and the clock coming from CSU board in slot 8 of the TMUX subrack

Provides the line received clock as external clock

Provides tributary reference clock





Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators Figure 60 shows the front panel of DSAF board.

F I G U R E 60 FR O N T P AN E L O F DSAF B O AR D

Table 65 describes the front panel and related information for basic operations of DSAF board.






6. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


T AB L E 65 DE S C R I P T I O N O F DSAF B O AR D ’ S FR O N T P AN E L AN D R E L A T E D OP E R A T I O N I N F O R M AT I O N

Board

Item DSAF

Board ID DSAF2 DSAF4



Indicator Indicator of tributary optical interface

Located beside tributary optical interface, each green indicator is used to indicate the working status of corresponding data service tributary optical interface, as shown in Figure 60

IN Aggregate input optical interface Aggregate optical interface OUT Aggregate output optical interface

Data service tributary input optical interface

LC/PC connector ADDn

n=1, 2 n=1-4

Data service tributary output optical interface

LC/PC connector

Tributary optical interface

DROPn

n=1, 2 n=1-4


Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of DSAF board is CLASS 1


1

Slots for DSAF board







Table 66 lists the relations between the working status and corresponding indicator status of DSAF board.



T AB L E 66 RE L AT I O N S B E T W E E N W O R K I N G S T AT U S AN D I N D I C AT O R S T AT U S O F DS AF B O AR D

Indicator Status


Indicator of Tributary Optical Interface (Green)


The green indicator and the red indicator flash alternately.

-


OFF -


ON -


-

Waiting for download The green indicator and the red indicator flash quickly at the same time

-


-



- ON


- - OFF


Performance and Alarm Messages The performance messages of DSAF board are listed in Table 67.

T AB L E 67 PE R F O R M AN C E M E S S AG E S O F DSAF B O AR D

Detection Point

Item Remark

Output optical power Related to performance benchmark


Laser TEC current



Only detected when laser TEC is used


15-min B1 bit error count -

Aggregate receiver

15-min B2 bit error count -

Chapter 3 Boards


Detection Point

Item Remark

15-min B1 BER -

15-min B2 BER -

15-min ES -

15-min SES -

15-min UAS -

FEC uncorrected frame count -

FEC corrected bit error count -

FEC corrected 0 bit error count -

FEC corrected 1 bit error count -

After-FEC BER -

Before-FEC BER -

15-min OTU1 SM_BIP8 bit error count -

15-min ODU1 PM_BIP8 bit error count -

15-min SM_BIP8 ES -

15-min SM_BIP8 SES -

15-min SM_BIP8 UAS -

Input optical power Only detected when SFP module is used

Total received packet count Only detected for GE (GFP-F) signals


15-min received packet error count

15-min received packet error ratio count

Tributary receiver

15-min 8B/10B CV count

Not detected for GE (GFP-T) signals

Total transmitted packet count

Total transmitted byte count

Only detected for GE (GFP-F) signals

Not detected fro GE (GFP-T) signals yet


Laser bias current



15-min 8B/10B CV count Only detected for GFP-T signals

15-min transmitted PAUSE frame count -

Tributary

transmitter

Received GFP client management frame count

Frames with PTI=4

The alarm messages of DSAF board are listed in Table 68.



T AB L E 68 AL AR M M E S S AG E S O F DSAF B O AR D

Detection Point

Item Remark





Laser temperature offset over-threshold alarm

-

MZ modulator bias voltage over-threshold alarm

Only detected when M-Z modulated laser is used

Output power over upper threshold alarm

-

Output power below lower threshold alarm







Input power over upper threshold alarm -

Input power below lower threshold alarm

-

LOF alarm -

Received signal MS-AIS -

UAS alarm -

SD alarm

15-min OTU1 SM BIP8 bit error over-threshold alarm

-

15-min before-correction bit error count over-threshold alarm

-

15-min after-correction bit error count over-threshold alarm

-

15-min ODU1 PM_BIP8 bit error over-threshold alarm

-

15-min OTU1 SM ES over-threshold alarm

-

15-min OTU1 SM SES over-threshold alarm

-

15-min OTU1 SM UAS over-threshold alarm

-

Aggregate receiver

24-hour OTU1 SM ES over-threshold alarm

-

Chapter 3 Boards


Detection Point

Item Remark

24-hour OTU1 SM SES over-threshold alarm

-

24-hour OTU1 SM UAS over-threshold alarm

-

24-hour OTU1 SM BIP8 bit error over-threshold alarm

-

24-hour ODU1 PM BIP8 bit error over-threshold alarm

-

24-hour before-correction bit error over-threshold alarm

-

24-hour after-correction bit error over-threshold alarm

-

15-min TCMi BIP8 bit error over-threshold alarm

i=1-6

24-hour TCMi BIP8 bit error over-threshold alarm

i=1-6

LOS alarm -

Loss of OTU1 frame alarm -

Loss of OTU1 multiframe alarm -

OTU1 TIM alarm -

ODU1 layer PM section TIM alarm -

OTU1 layer SM section BDI -

OTU1 layer SM section BEI -

OTU1 layer SM section BIAE -

OTU1 layer SM section IAE -

ODU1 layer PM section BDI -

ODU1 layer PM section BEI -

ODU1 AIS -

ODU1 LCK -

ODU1 OCI -

OPU1 PT mismatch alarm -

LOS alarm -


Connection failure alarm -

15-min received CRC error packet count over-threshold alarm -

Tributary receiver

15-min 8B/10B CV count over-threshold alarm -



Detection Point

Item Remark

15-min 8B/10B CV second count over-threshold alarm -

24-hour 8B/10B CV count over-threshold alarm -

24-hour received error packet count over-threshold alarm -








Laser current over-threshold alarm

Inner-module temperature over-threshold alarm




GFP client signal failure alarm -

GFP loss of synchronization alarm -

15-min 8B/10B CV count over-threshold alarm -

24-hour 8B/10B CV count over-threshold alarm -


Pluggable module dismount alarm -

Board environment temperature alarm - Board

Board self-test failure alarm

The event messages of DSAF board are listed in Table 69.

T AB L E 69 EV E N T M E S S AG E S O F DSAF B O AR D


Tributary laser shutdown Tributary transmitter

Tributary laser startup

Aggregate laser shutdown Aggregate transmitter

Aggregate laser startup

Chapter 3 Boards



Laser APS shutdown forcibly

Laser APS startup forcibly

Clock switching succeeded

Clock switching failed

MCU reset

EEPROM data error

Data service configuration failure

Port

Loopback configuration failure

Configuration of DSAF Board During the configuration of DSAF board, pay attention to the following items:

During the configuration of tributary services for DSAF board, it is necessary to specify the GFP data encapsulation format, the quantity and position of Virtual Container (VC) to be used.

When the tributary interfaces of DSAF board are used to add/drop service signals, their properties should be set as “Up/down Link” (add/drop) in the EMS. When the tributary interfaces are set as “Direct link” (straight-through), the function performed by these interfaces is equivalent to that of far-end loopback.

DSAF board can use up to 16 VC4s or 48 VC3s.

For the same kind of data services, either VC4 virtual concatenation or VC3 virtual concatenation mode can be used, that is, the same kind of data services can only use the same virtual concatenation mode. However, different kinds of data services can use different virtual concatenation modes at the same time.

The characteristic of data services is that they always exist in pairs. Therefore, the transmit/receive interfaces at the client side of DSA board must be configured with the receive/transmit interfaces of user equipment in pairs.

There are three kinds of reference clocks available on the client side of DSAF board. The board will select different reference clock automatically according to the type of service accessed to a port.

Selects 125 MHz reference clock for GE service

Selects 100 MHz reference clock for ESCON service

Selects 135 MHz reference clock for DVB_ASI service



DSAE Board Functions DSAE (Data Service Aggregation Electrical interface) board, used as a tributary board in a TMUX system, combines eight data service signals at its tributary side into four 2.5 Gbit/s signals on the backplane and implements the reverse procedure as well.

The aggregate convergence board cooperating with the DSAE board is SMU board.

The DSAE board provides the following functions:

Tributary side

Provide eight SFP optical interfaces. Each of them supports the access of various client signals, such as GE, FC, ESCON, FICON and DVB-ASI etc.

The SFP module used in each tributary optical interface supports Digital Diagnosis (DD) function.

Backplane side

Provide two channels on the backplane: channel A (corresponding to CSU board in slot 7 of TMUX subrack) and channel B (corresponding to CSU board in slot 8 of TMUX subrack). Each channel is able to carry four bidirectional 2.5 Gbit/s signals.

Support the signal switching between channel A and channel B

Select the optimal signal from two channels for input and divides one signal into two for output on the backplane.

Support the clock selection function.

Support near/far-end tributary loopback and near/far-end backplane loopback for convenient fault localization.

Support APS check of electric layer protection:

Service signal APS check for electric layer client service 1+1 protection.

Line APS check for service board redundancy 1+1 protection.

APS check for line OCH 1+1 protection.

Service signal APS check for two-fiber bidirectional OCH shared protection in ring network.

Chapter 3 Boards


Operating Principle The operating principle of DSAE board is illustrated in Figure 61.

FIGURE 61 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF DSAE BOARD

TributaryOptical

Module 1

TributaryOptical

Module 8

GFP

Processin

g U

nit

Con

verg

ence

/D

iverg

ence U

nit

Framin

g U

nit

1-2 Divider/2-1 Selector

Unit


Dataservicesignals

Tributary Side Backplane Side

Channel A

Channel B

Control andCommunication

Unit


Local clockClock from CSU in slot 7Clock from CSU in slot 8

Channel A

Channel B

In the multiplexing direction (data service signals 4×2.5 Gbit/s signals): →Eight client data service signals (such as GE, FC, ESCON, FICON and DVB-ASI etc.) are accessed by eight tributary optical modules. The convergence & framing unit multiplexes these signals into four 2.5 Gbit/s signals, which are then divided into two groups with the same four 2.5 Gbit/s signals in each group by the 1-2 divider. These two groups of signals are output through channel A and channel B respectively on the backplane.

In the demultiplexing direction (4×2.5 Gbit/s data service signals): The →2-1 selector chooses the better one from the two groups of 2.5 Gbit/s signals input from channel A and channel B on the backplane. Then the convergence & framing unit divides the group into eight data service signals, which are output by corresponding tributary optical modules finally.

DSAE board consists of eight tributary optical modules, a convergence & framing unit, a 1-2 divider/2-1 selector unit and the control and communication unit, as described below.


DSAE board has eight tributary optical modules. Each of them uses SFP optical module.


Each tributary optical module receives a data service signal (GE, FC, ESCON, FICON or DVB-ASI etc.), converts it into an electrical signal and then forwards it to the convergence & framing unit.




Each tributary optical module converts the electrical signal received from the convergence & framing unit into the optical client signal (GE, FC, ESCON, FICON or DVB-ASI etc.) and then output it to corresponding user equipment.


The convergence & framing unit consists of a GFP processing unit, a convergence/divergence unit and a framing unit. It completes the multiplexing/demultiplexing between eight data service signals and four 2.5 Gbit/s signals.


After 8B/10B decoding, GFP mapping, VC virtual concatenation and framing, eight data service signals (GE, FC, ESCON, FICON or DVB-ASI etc.) are mapped into four 2.5 Gbit/s signals, which are then output to the 1-2 divider/2-1 selector unit.

Note: DSAE board supports the virtual concatenation (VC) modes VC-4-Xv.

Note:






The unit receives four 2.5 Gbit/s signals from the 1-2 divider/2-1 selector unit and then divides them into eight data service signals. After 8B/10B encoding, these data signals are sent into corresponding tributary optical modules.

1-2 Divider/2-1 Selector Unit

The 1-2 divider/2-1 selector unit supports lossless switching between channel A and channel B on the backplane.

In the multiplexing direction (1-to-2 division)

The 1-2 divider separates four 2.5 Gbit/s signals received from the convergence & framing unit into two same groups with each containing four 2.5 Gbit/s signals. These two groups are output through channel A and channel B on the backplane respectively. Each channel carries four 2.5 Gbit/s signals.

In the demultiplexing direction (2-to-1 selection)

Chapter 3 Boards


The 2-1 selector receives two groups of four 2.5 Gbit/s signals from channel A and channel B on the backplane, selects the better one from them and outputs it to the convergence & framing unit.


This unit selects a clock as the board clock from the local clock, the clock coming from CSU board in slot 7 and the clock coming from CSU board in slot 8 of the TMUX subrack.



Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of DSAE board is shown in Figure 62.

FIGURE 62 FRONT PANEL OF DSAE BOARD

Table 70 describes the front panel and related information for basic operations of DSAE board.





5. Laser class sign



TABLE 70 DESCRIPTION OF DSAE BOARD’S FRONT PANEL AND RELATED OPERATION INFORMATION

Board Type

Item DSAE

Board ID DSAE


ALM Alarm indicator, red Indicator

Optical interface indicator

Each optical interface has a green indicator on its right side used to indicate the working status of the interface.

ADDn Data service tributary optical input interface, n=1 to 8, LC/PC connector

Optical interface

DROPn Data service tributary optical output interface, n=1 to 8, LC/PC connector


Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of DSAE board is CLASS 1


Slots for DSAE board Slots in TMUX subrack except slot 7 and 8


Avoid damaging optical connectors while plugging/unplugging the board. Always keep optical connectors clean. Put on the dust caps for unused optical connectors in time.

Table 71 describes the relations between the working status and corresponding indicator status of DSAE board.

TABLE 71 RELATIONS BETWEEN THE WORKING STATUS AND INDICATOR STATUS OF DSAE BOARD

Indicator Status


Optical Interface Indicator (Green)



-


OFF -


ON -

Chapter 3 Boards


Indicator Status


Optical Interface Indicator (Green)


-

Waiting for download The green indicator and the red indicator flash quickly at the same time.

-

Download status The green indicator and the red indicator flash slowly at the same time.

-



- ON


- - OFF


Configuration of DSAE Board DSAE board can work in either TM (Terminal Multiplexer) mode or OAD (Optical Add/Drop) mode.

TM working mode

As shown in Figure 63, bidirectional services are transmitted between Node A and Node B. The aggregate optical interface of SMU board in Node A is connected to the aggregate optical interface of SMU board in Node B with an optical cable.

FIGURE 63 TM WORKING MODE OF DSAE BOARD

Tributary 1

Node A Node B

CSU

DSAE DSAE

…… ……

SMU

SMU

CSU

Tributary 8 Tributary 1 Tributary 8……

The transmission procedure of data service from Node A to Node B is as follows:

i. The data service signal is input to the DSAE board in Node A through the tributary optical interface 1 of Node A. After GFP mapping in DSAE board, cross-connection in CSU board and convergence in SMU board,



the data service signal of tributary 1 is converged into an OTU2 signal for transmission over the optical cable.

ii. The SMU board in Node B receives the OTU2 signal from the optical cable. After the divergence in SMU board, the cross-connection in CSU board and demultiplexing in DSAE board, the tributary data service signal is recovered and then output through the tributary optical interface 1 of Node B.

The processing and transmitting procedure of the other tributaries’ data service signals between Node A and B is same as the procedure described above.

OAD working mode

In this working mode, DSAE board works as an optical add/drop multiplexer.

Figure 64 illustrates the traffic configuration of DSAE board of a node working in the OAD mode.

FIGURE 64 OAD WORKING MODE OF DSAE BOARD

……

Backplanechannel signal

Backplanechannel signal

Tributary 1 Tributary 8

DSAE

CSU CSU

As shown in Figure 64, the backplane channel signal from CSU board is divided into tributary signals by the DSAE board. These tributary signals are not dropped but passed through the DSAE board. Then these signals are combined into a backplane channel signal again by the DSAE board and output to CSU board.

Note: The working modes of a DSAE board’s eight tributary interfaces should be configured according to actual needs. The working mode of a tributary interface can be set as either add/drop mode or pass-through mode. Once a tributary interface has been set as pass-through, this interface can not be used to add/drop traffic any longer. It is unnecessary to configure tributary optical module for a pass-through interface.

Chapter 3 Boards


Performance and Alarm Messages The performance messages of DSAE board are listed in Table 72.

TABLE 72 PERFORMANCE MESSAGES OF DSAE BOARD


15-min B1 error -

15-min B2 error -

15-min ES -

15-min SES -

15-min UAS -

Backplane interface tributary 1 to 4

15-min BER -

Total received packet count





15-min 8B/10B CV -

15-min 8B/10B ES -

15-min 8B/10B SES -

15-min 8B/10B UAS -

Tributary receiver

Input optical power


Laser bias current



Total sent packet count

Total sent byte count


15-min sent PAUSE frame count


The alarm messages of DSAE board are listed in Table 73.

TABLE 73 ALARM MESSAGES OF DSAE BOARD


Board Board environment temperature alarm

-

LOF alarm -

UAS alarm -

SD alarm -


LOS alarm -





-


15-min B1 error count out of limit alarm

-


-




LOS alarm -

LOC alarm -

Loss of synchronization alarm Only detected for GE signals

Loss of GFP synchronization alarm -

Loss of VC multiframe alarm -

15-min received error packet count out of limit alarm

Only detected for GE signals

15-min 8B/10B CV out of limit alarm -


-


-


-

24-hour received error packet count out of limit alarm

-

24-hour 8B/10B CV out of limit alarm -


-


-


-



Tributary receiver








Chapter 3 Boards






The event messages of DSAE board are listed in Table 74.

TABLE 74 EVENT MESSAGES OF DSAE BOARD

Detection Point

Item Remark

Tributary laser shutdown -

Tributary laser startup -

Tributary laser APS shutdown forcibly -

Tributary laser APS startup forcibly -

SFP module unplugged


SFP module plugged


MCU reset -

EEPROM data error -

Service switching -

Clock switching succeeded -

Port


SMU Board Functions SMU (SDH Multiplex Unit) board is a kind of aggregate convergence board that implements the multiplexing/ demultiplexing between STM-16 signals at backplane side and OTU2 signal at aggregate side. The tributary board cooperating with the SMU board is DSAE board.

Backplane side

Provides two channels on its backplane side: channel A (corresponding to CSU board in slot 7) and channel B (corresponding to CSU board in slot 8). Either of them is able to carry four bidirectional 2.5 Gbit/s signals.

Supports the signal switching between channel A and channel B



Selects the optimal one from two channels of input signals and divides one channel of output signals into two same groups on the backplane.

Aggregate side

Supports single-channel bidirectional colored OTU2 DWDM optical interface.

Provides a pair of 10.7 Gbit/s optical interfaces (IN/OUT).

The output optical signal at aggregate side meets the requirements of ITU-T G.692. The input optical interface at aggregate side can receive optical signal complying with ITU-T G.692 or G.975.

The service traffic carried by this pair of optical interfaces is OTU2 signal.

Supports the FEC encoding/decoding function specified in ITU-T G.709. This function can be set on the EMS. Three FEC modes are optional: FEC Codec, AFEC Codec and OTN Format-No FEC.

Supports the lossless switching between master and slave clock input/output interfaces, and the lossless switching between clocks on the backplane.

Supports the export of clock.

Either fixed laser or tuneable laser can be used at aggregate side. In case of tuneable laser, 40/80 wavelengths in the whole C band can be tuned. The wavelength spacing is 100 GHz for 40 channels while the wavelength spacing is 50 GHz for 80 channels.

Supports the application in a centralized wavelength supervision subsystem with the channel spacing at 50 GHz.

For detailed information about the centralized wavelength supervision subsystem, please refer to Appendix C in this manual.

Supports near-end/far-end loopback at backplane side and near-end/far-end loopback at aggregate side as well, which makes troubleshooting easier.

Supports the online download of board software.

Implements APS monitoring for two-fiber bidirectional channel shared ring protection line at electronic layer.

Chapter 3 Boards


Operating Principle The operating principle of SMU board is illustrated in Figure 65.

FIGURE 65 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF SMU BOARD

Convergence/Divergence

Unit

10GOpticalModule

1-2 Divider/2-1 Selector

Unit

Aggregate SideBackplane Side

Channel A

Channel B


G.692


CSU in slot 7

CSU in slot 8

Channel A

Channel B

In the multiplexing direction (4×2.5 Gbit/s OTU2), the 2→ -1 selector receives 2.5 Gbit/s signals from channel A and channel B (each of them carrying four 2.5 Gbit/s signals) on the backplane, selects the better signals from these two channels and forwards them to the convergence unit. The convergence unit combines the four 2.5 Gbit/s signals into an electrical OTU2 signal and sends it to the 10G optical module, which converts the electrical signal into an optical one and outputs it for transmission over the optical line.

In the demultiplexing direction (OTU2 4×2.5 Gbit/s), the 10G optical →module receives an optical OTU2 signal from the aggregate side, converts it into an optical signal and outputs it to the divergence unit. The divergence unit demultiplexes this signal into four 2.5 Gbit/s signals and then the 1-2 divider separates these four 2.5 Gbit/s signals into two same groups with each of them containing the same four 2.5 Gbit/s signals and finally outputs the two groups of signals from channel A and channel B respectively at the backplane side.

SMU board consists of a 1-2 divider/2-1 selector unit, a convergence/ divergence unit, a 10G optical module, a clock processing unit and a control and communication unit, as described below.

1-2 Divider/2-1 Selector Unit

In the multiplexing direction (2-1 selector): The 2-1 selector receives two groups of 2.5 Gbit/s signals from channel A and channel B (each channel carries four 2.5 Gbit/s signals) on the backplane, selects the better one from these two channels and then sends them to the



convergence/divergence unit. The 1-2 divider/2-1 selector unit supports lossless switching between channel A and channel B.

In the demultiplexing direction (1-2 divider): The 1-2 divider separates four 2.5 Gbit/s signals received from the convergence/divergence unit into two same groups with each containing the same four 2.5 Gbit/s signals, and then outputs the two groups of signals from channel A and channel B respectively at the backplane side.

Convergence/Divergence Unit

This unit implements the multiplexing/demultiplexing between four 2.5 Gbit/s signals and an OTU2 signal.

In the multiplexing direction (convergence): This unit converges four 2.5 Gbit/s signals received from the 2-1 selector into an OTU2 signal (ITU-T G.709), and then sends the OTU2 signal to the 10G optical module.

In the demultiplexing direction (divergence): This unit receives an OTU2 signal (ITU-T G.709) from the 10G optical module, demulplexes it into four 2.5 Gbit/s signals and then sends these signals to the 1-2 divider.

10G Optical Module

In the multiplexing direction, this module converts the electrical OTU2 signal into an optical signal (10.709 Gbit/s) and then sends it out.

In the demultiplexing direction, this module converts the optical signal (10.709 Gbit/s) into an electrical OTU2 signal and then sends it to the convergence/divergence unit.


The clock processing unit supports the selection of reference clock sent at aggregate side and the export of clocks. It selects the optimal clock from the following reference clock sources as the reference clock sent at aggregate side according to the optimal clock selection algorithm.

Clock provided by CSU board in slot 7

Clock provided by CSU board in slot 8

Clock extracted from the input traffic at aggregate side

Clocks extracted from tributaries in the current working channel on the backplane

Local clock

In addition, this unit exports the clock extracted from the input traffic at aggregate side to CSU board when the input traffic is normal.



Chapter 3 Boards


Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of SMU board is shown in Figure 66.

FIGURE 66 FRONT PANEL OF SMU BOARD

Table 75 describes the front panel and related information for basic operations of the SMU board.

TABLE 75 DESCRIPTION OF SMU BOARD’S FRONT PANEL AND RELATED OPERATION INFORMATION

Board Type

Item SMU

Board ID SMU



Optical interface

IN/OUT Line input/output optical interface, LC/PC connector


2. Line input/output optical interface


4. Laser class sign



Board Type

Item SMU


Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of SMU board is CLASS 1


1

Slots for SMU board Slots in TMUX subrack except slot 7 and 8




Use OTUG board as the regeneration board for SMU board as needed.

Table 76 describes the relationship between the working status of SMU board and the status of indicators.

TABLE 76 RELATIONS BETWEEN THE WORKING STATUS AND INDICATOR STATUS OF SMU BOARD




The green indicator and the red indicator flash slowly and alternately.

Running normally Flashing slowly and regularly OFF

Alarming Flashing slowly and regularly ON


Waiting for download The green indicator and the red indicator flash quickly at the same time.

Download status The green indicator and the red indicator flash slowly at the same time.

Performance and Alarm Messages The performance messages of SMU board are listed in Table 77.

TABLE 77 PERFORMANCE MESSAGES OF SMU BOARD





15-min ES -

Chapter 3 Boards



15-min SES -

15-min UAS -

15-min BER -

High input power alarm threshold -

15-min FEC uncorrectable frames -

15-min FEC corrected error count -

15-min FEC corrected 0 error count -

15-min FEC corrected 1 error count -

15-min after-FEC BER -

15-min before-FEC BER -

15-min OTU2 BIP8 error count -

Aggregate receiver

15-min ODU2 PM_BIP8 error count -



Laser temperature offset - Aggregate transmitter

MZ modulator bias voltage It depends on the board configuration whether to detect this item.

Board Board environment temperature -

The alarm messages of SMU board are listed in Table 78.

TABLE 78 ALARM MESSAGES OF SMU BOARD


Board Board environment temperature alarm

-

LOF alarm -

UAS alarm -

SD alarm -

LOS alarm -

J0 TIM alarm -



-


-











UAS alarm -

SD alarm -

LOS alarm -

LOC alarm -


OTUk signal TIM alarm k=2

15-min OTUk BIP8 error out of limit alarm

k=2

Loss of OTUk frame alarm k=2

Loss of OTUk multiframe alarm k=2

15-min before-correction bit error count out of limit alarm

-

15-min after-correction bit error count out of limit alarm

-

OTUk AIS alarm k=2

OTUk SM field BDI k=2

OTUk SM field BEI k=2

OTUk SM field BIAE k=2

OTUk SM field IAE k=2

ODUk PM field TIM k=2

ODUk PM field BDI k=2

ODUk PM field BEI k=2

ODUk AIS alarm k=2

ODUk LCK alarm k=2

ODUk OCI alarm k=2

OPUk PT mismatch k=2

Aggregate receiver

J0 TIM alarm Detected only for STM-64 signal






-

Laser end of life time alarm -



Chapter 3 Boards





The event messages of SMU board are listed in Table 79.

TABLE 79 EVENT MESSAGES OF SMU BOARD







MCU reset -

EEPROM data error -

Clock switching succeeded - Port




Multiplex/Demultiplex Boards


SMU

OCI Optical Channel Interleaver

OBM Optical Broadband Multiplexer

OMU Optical Multiplexing Unit

VMUX Variable insertion loss Multiplexer

ODU Optical De-Multiplexing Unit

OAD Optical Add/Drop Board

WBU Wavelength Blocking Unit

WSU Wavelength Selective Unit

WBM Wavelength Blocking Multiplexing Board


OA/OTU subrack

OCI Board Functions OCI (Optical Channel Interleaver) board uses the optical interleaver to implement the interleaving multiplexing and demultiplexing of wavelength channels in C or L band. It provides the following functions:

Supports the interleaving multiplexing and demultiplexing of wavelength channels in C band or C+ band with the spacing at 100 GHz as well as wavelength channels with the spacing at 50 GHz in C/C+ band.

C band: 192.3 THz-196.0 THz

C+ band: 191.35 THz-196.05 THz

Supports the interleaving multiplexing and demultiplexing of wavelength channels in L band or L+ band with the spacing at 100 GHz as well as wavelength channels with the spacing at 50 GHz in L/L+ band.

L band: 187.0 THz-190.9 THz

L+ band: 186.95 THz-190.85 THz

The OCI board also provides the online monitoring interface for the multiplexed output/input light of 80/96 channels.

Operating Principle The operating principle of the OCI board is illustrated in Figure 67.

Chapter 3 Boards


F I G U R E 67 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F OCI B O AR D

InterleaverDeMUX Module

InterleaverMUX Module

Coupler

Optical Power Monitoring Module

Coupler


80/96-channel multiplexed optical input

80/96-channel multiplexed optical output

Input light online monitoring

Input light online monitoring

40/48-channel multplexed optical output 1

40/48-channel multiplexed optical output 2

40/48-channel multiplexed optical input 1

40/48-channel multiplexed optical input 2


Interleaver

The interleaver contains two modules: DeMUX module and MUX module.

At the multiplexing end: It uses the interleaver MUX module to expand the capacity of a 40/48-channel WDM system by multiplexing two groups of channels. The frequency spacing between channels in each group is 100 GHz, and the frequency shifting between two groups is half of the spacing. After the multiplexing, the channel number is increased to 80/96 and the frequency spacing becomes 50 GHz.

At the demultiplexing end: It uses the interleaver DeMUX module to separate the multiplexed signal of 80/96 channels with the spacing at 50 GHz to two groups. Each group has 40 channels with the spacing at 100 GHz, and the frequency shifting between two groups is half of the spacing.

Note: Each OCI board can only implements the multiplexing/demultiplexing of channels either in C band or in L band.

Coupler

Located at the demultiplexing end and multiplexing end, the couplers split the multiplexed signal of 80/96 channels, and then send parts of the signal to the optical power monitoring module.

Optical power monitoring module



Both the multiplexing end and the demultiplexing end are configured with an optical power monitoring module to monitor the output light and input light respectively.


It monitors the input/output optical power of the multiplexed signal of 80/96-channel and reports it to the EMS. Moreover, it receives the control command from the EMS.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of the OCI board is illustrated in Figure 68.

F I G U R E 68 FR O N T P AN E L O F OCI B O AR D

Table 80 describes the front panel and related information for basic operation of the OCI board.




4. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


T AB L E 80 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F OCI B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N

BoardItem

OCI

Board ID OCI

NOM Running indicator, green Indicator [Note] ALM Alarm indicator, red



R Input interface for signals with the spacing at 50 GHz in C50_1/L50_1 sub-band, LC/PC connector

R1 Output interface for signals with the spacing of 100 GHz in C100_1/L100_1 sub-band, LC/PC connector

R2 Output interface for signals with the spacing of 100 GHz in C100_2/L100_2 band, LC/PC connector

T Output interface for signals with the spacing of 50 GHz in C50_1/L50_1 band, LC/PC connector

T1 Input interface for signals with the spacing at 100 GHz in C100_1/L100_1 band, LC/PC connector

T2 Input interface for signals with the spacing at 100 GHz in C100_2/L100_2 band, LC/PC connector

T-MON Monitoring interface for output signal with the spacing at 50 GHz in C50_1/L50_1 band, LC/PC connector

Optical interface

R-MON Monitoring interface for input signal with the spacing at 50 GHz in C50_1/L50_1 band, LC/PC connector


Slots for OCI board All slots in OTU subrack Slots in OA subrack except slot 5-9 Slots in TMUX subrack except slot 7 and 8




Note: The relationship between the status of OCI board and corresponding status of indicators are same as that of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 1 for the detailed description.



Optical Connections of OCI Board The OCI board is used in OTM equipment with more than 40/48 wavelengths.

Figure 69 illustrates the position of OCI boards and corresponding optical connections in an 80/96-channel system.

F I G U R E 69 OP T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N S O F OCI B O AR D S I N A N 80 /96 -C H AN N E L S Y S T E M

OMUC100_1

OTU

.

.

OMUC100_2

OTU

.

.

OCIC50_1

OSC DRA

OCIC50_1

ODUC100_1

ODUC100_1

OTU

.

.

OTU

.

.

OTM1 OTM2

EOBA

OSC

DCM VGSC

OPM

EOBAEOPA

OLA ...

OTM1

The T1 and T2 interface on the OCI board are respectively connected to the OUT interface on the OMU (C100_1 subband) board and that on the OMU (C100_2 subband) board respectively.

The T interface on the OCI board is connected to the IN interface on the EOBA board.

OTM2

The R1 and R2 interface on the OCI board are respectively connected to the IN interface on the ODU (C100_1 sub-band) board and that on the ODU (C100_2 sub-band) board respectively.

After being amplified, the multiplexed signal is accessed to the OCI board through the R interface.

Figure 70 illustrates the position of OCI boards and corresponding optical connection in a 160/176-channel system.

Chapter 3 Boards


F I G U R E 70 OP T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N S O F OCI B O AR D S I N A 160 /176-C H AN N E L S Y S T E M

OMUC100_1

.

.

OMUC100_2

.

.

OMUL100_1

OTU

.

.

OMUL100_2

OTU

.

.

OCIC50_1

OCIL50_1

OBM(C/L)

EOBA

EOBA

OSC

OBM(C/L)

OSC

EOPA EOBA

DCM VGSC

EOPA EOBA

DCM VGSC

OPM

OPM

DRA

OCIC50_1

OCIL50_1

ODUC100_1

ODUC100_2

ODUL100_1

ODUL100_2

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

OTM1

OLA

OTM2

...

OTU

OTU OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTM1

The T1 interface on the OCI (C100_1) board and OCI (L100_1) board are respectively connected to the OUT interface on the OMU board.

The T2 interface on the OCI (C100_1) board and OCI (L100_1) board are respectively connected to the OUT interface on the OMU board.

The T interface on the OCI (C) board and OCI (L) board are respectively connected to the IN interface on the EOBA (C band) board and the EOBA (L band) board.

OTM2

The R1 interface on the OCI (C100_1) board and OCI (L100_1) board are respectively connected to the IN interface on the ODU board.

The R2 interface on the OCI (C100_1) board and OCI (L100_1) board are respectively connected to the IN interface on the ODU board.

The multiplexed signal of C band and L band is accessed to the OCI (C) board and OCI (L) board through the R interface on these two boards respectively.

Performance and Alarm Messages The performance and alarm messages related to the OCI board are listed in Table 81.

T AB L E 81 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F OCI B O AR D

Type Item

Output optical power of MUX signal Performance

Input optical power of DeMUX signal

No output power alarm (MUX)

Low output power alarm (MUX)

Alarm

MUX output power out of upper limit alarm



Type Item

MUX output power out of lower limit alarm

No input power alarm (DeMUX)

Low input power alarm (DeMUX)

DeMUX input power out of upper limit alarm

DeMUX input power out of lower limit alarm

Event MCU reset

OBM Board Functions The OBM board implements the multiplexing/demultiplexing of channels in C/L band and the supervisory channels of 1510 nm and 1625 nm. The 1510 nm supervisory channel is used to monitor signals in C band, while the 1625 nm supervisory channel is used to monitor signals in L band.

The OBM board supports the online monitoring of optical power of signals in C/L band and the 1510 nm/1625 nm channel.

Operating Principle The operating principle is illustrated in Figure 71.

F I G U R E 71 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F OBM B O AR D

Output light online supervision

C-band multiplexed optical input

L-band multiplexedoptical input

Broadband Multiplexer

OSC input

C-band multiplexedoptical output

L-band multiplexedoptical output

OSC output

Optical Power Monitoring

Module

Multiplexed optical output

Coupler

Multiplexed optical input

Optical Power Monitoring

Module

Input light online supervision


Coupler

Chapter 3 Boards


Broadband multiplexer

At the multiplexing end: It uses the MUX module of broadband multiplexer to expand the capacity of an 80/96-channel WDM system by multiplexing channels in C band and L band with the spacing at 50 GHz. The supervisory signal is also multiplexed at the same time. After the multiplexing, the channel number is increased to 160/176.

At the demultiplexing end: It uses the DeMUX module of broadband multiplexer to separate the multiplexed signal of 160/176 channels to channels in C band and L band with the spacing at 50 GHz. There are 80/96 channels in each band after demultiplexing. The supervisory signal is also separated from the multiplex signal.

Coupler

Located at the multiplexing/demultiplexing end, it separates the multiplexed signal of 160/176 channels and sends part of the optical signals to the optical power monitoring module.


Both the multiplexing end and the demultiplexing end are configured with an optical power monitoring module to monitor the power of output light and input light respectively.


It monitors the input/output optical power of the combined signal and reports it to the EMS. Moreover, it receives the control command from the EMS.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of the OBM board is illustrated in Figure 72.



F I G U R E 72 FR O N T P AN E L O F OBM B O AR D

Table 82 describes the front panel and related information for basic operation of the OCI board.

T AB L E 82 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F OBM B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N

Board Item

OBM

Board ID OBM


[Note] ALM Alarm indicator, red

Laser warning sign


CT Input interface for signals in C band with the spacing at 50 GHz, LC/PC connector

Optical interface

LT Input interface for signals in L band with the spacing at 50 GHz, LC/PC connector




4. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


Board Item

OBM

CST Input interface for 1550 nm supervisory signal, LC/PC connector

LST Standby input interface for supervisory channel, LC/PC connector, not used

T Output interface for signals (C+L+1510 nm+1625 nm), LC/PC connector

MON_T

Monitoring interface for output signals (C+L+1510 nm+1625 nm), LC/PC connector

CR Output interface for signals in C band with the spacing at 50 GHz, LC/PC connector

LR Output interface for signals in L band with the spacing at 50 GHz, LC/PC connector

CSR Output interface for supervisory signal, LC/PC connector

LSR Standby output interface for supervisory channel, LC/PC connector, not used

R Input interface for signals (C+L+1510 nm+1625 nm), LC/PC connector

MON_R

Monitoring interface for input signals (C+L+1510 nm+1625 nm), LC/PC connector


Laser classification sign

Indicates that the laser classification of OBM board is CLASS 1

Slots for OBM board



Avoid damaging the fiber pigtail connector while plugging/unplugging the board.


Note: The relationship between the status of OBM board and corresponding status of indicators are same as that of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for the detailed description.



Optical Connections of OBM Board The OBM board is only used in 160-channel DWDM systems. Figure 73 illustrates the position and optical connections of OBM boards in a network.

F I G U R E 73 OP T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N S O F OBM B O AR D S

OBM(C/L)

EOBA

EOBA

OSC

OBM(C/L)

DRA

OBM(C/L)

OSC

EOPA

EOPADRA

OTM1 OLA OTM2

Multiplexed signal

in C band

Multiplexed signal

in L band

Amplified signal in C band

Amplified signal in L band

Multiplexed signal

in C band

Multiplexed

signal in L band

OSC

The figure above omits the multiplexing, demultiplexing and amplifying process of optical signals in C band and L band. Suppose the 1510 nm is taken as the supervisory channel.

OTM1 (transmitting end)

The CT interface on the OBM board is connected to the OUT interface on the EOBA board of C band, while the LT interface is connected to the OUT interface on the EOBA board of L band.

The CST interface on the OBM board is connected to the output interface on the OSC board.

The T interface on the OBM board is connected with the external optical cable.

OTM2 (receiving end)

The CR interface on the OBM board is connected to the IN interface on the EOPA board of C band, while the LR interface is connected to the IN interface on the EOPA board of L band.

The CSR interface on the OBM board is connected to the input interface on the OSC board.

The optical signal is accessed to the R interface of the OBM board through the external optical cable.

OLA

The CR/CT interfaces on the OBM board are connected to the OLA board of C band.

The LR/LT interfaces of the OBM board are connected to the OLA board of L band.

Chapter 3 Boards


The CSR interface on the OBM board is connected to the input interface on the OSC board, while the CST interface is connected to the output interface on the OSC board.

The R/T interfaces on the OBM board are connected with optical cables of the main optical channel respectively.

Performance and Alarm Messages The Performance and Alarm Messages of the OBM board are listed in Table 83.

T AB L E 83 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F OBM B O AR D

Type Item Remark

Output power Detection point: output interface T

Input power Detection point: input interface R

CS input power

CS output power

CS: C-band supervisory channel (1510nm)

LS input power

Performance

LS output power

LS: L-band supervisory channel (1625nm)

No output power

Low output power

Output power out of upper limit alarm

Output power out of lower limit alarm

Detection point: output interface T

No input power

Low input power

Input power out of upper limit alarm

Alarm

Input power out of lower limit alarm

Detection point: input interface R

Event MCU reset -



OMU Board Functions The OMU board mainly implements the multiplexing function and provides the interface for the online monitoring of multiplexed signal. Five kinds of OMU boards are available, OMU8, OMU16, OMU32, OMU40, OMU48 and OMU80, as described in Table 84.

T AB L E 84 TY P E L I S T O F OMU B O AR D

Board Type Item

OMU8 OMU16 OMU32 OMU40 OMU48 OMU80

Number of multiplexed wavelength

8 16 32 40 48 80

Multiplexer type Coupler Coupler Coupler, AWG, TFF

AWG, TFF AWG AWG

Operating wavelength C100_1 C100_1

C100_1 L100_1

C100_1 C100_2 L100_1 L100_2

C100_1 C100_2

C50_1 L50_1

Note: AWG: Array Waveguid Grating

TFF: Thin Film Filter

Operating Principle Taking OMU80 board as example, the operating principle of the OMU board is illustrated in Figure 74.

F I G U R E 74 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F OMU B O AR D

MUX

l 1

l 2

l 80

Input opticalchannel 1




Multiplexedlight ouput

Online monitoringinterface

.

.

.

Optical powermonitoring module

80:1

Chapter 3 Boards


The OMU board combines optical signals of different wavelengths into a single fiber through the MUX. Before the multiplexed light is output, part of it is sent to the optical power monitoring module, which provides the online monitoring interface. The optical power monitoring module reports the total output optical power to the EMS through the control and communication unit.

80:1 Multiplier

Combine 80 wavelengths signals into a multiplexed signal.

Coupler

Separate the multiplexed signal of 160/176 channels and sends part of the optical signals to the optical power monitoring module.


Send the output optical power monitored by the monitoring module to the control and communication unit.



Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators Taking the OMU80 board as example, Figure 75 illustrates its front panel.



F I G U R E 75 FR O N T P AN E L O F OMU40 B O AR D

Table 85 describes the front panel and related information for basic operation of four types of OMU boards.

T AB L E 85 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F OMU B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N

Board Type

Item OMU8 OMU16 OMU32 OMU40 OMU48 OMU80

Board ID OMU8 OMU16 OMU32 OMU40 OMU48 OMU80

Sub-band Name C100_1 C100_1

C100_1

L100_1

C100_1

C100_2

L100_1

L100_2

C100_1

C100_2

C50_1

L50_1



Indicator [Note]

CHn Optical channel input interface, LC/PC connector




4. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


Board Type

Item OMU8 OMU16 OMU32 OMU40 OMU48 OMU80

n = 1-8 n = 1-16

n = 1-32

n = 1-40

n = 1-48

n = 1-80

LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

Line optical output interface, LC/PC connector OUT


Local optical monitoring interface, LC/PC connector MON



2 2 2 2 2 4

Laser warning sign


Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of OMU board is CLASS 1

Slots for OMU board







The OMU board using AWG as its multiplexer is an active board. Therefore, unplugging this kind of OMU board will cause the traffic interruption.

Note: The relationship between the status of OMU board and corresponding status of indicators are same as that of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for the detailed description.

C100_1 and C100_2 respectively refer to the first and the second subband in C band with the spacing at 100 GHz.

Optical Connections of OMU Board The CHn interfaces on the OMU board are connected to line-side interfaces on OTU boards or aggregate interfaces on SRM41/SRM42/GEM/DSA boards so as to access optical signals in compliance with ITU-T G.692.

When the number of wavelengths to be multiplexed in ZXWM M900 system is no more than 48, connect the OUT interface on the OMU board to the IN interface on the EOBA board, as shown in Figure 76.



F I G U R E 76 OP T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N S O F OMU B O AR D (W AV E L E N G T H N U M B E R N ≤ 40 )

OTU1� 1

OTU2� 2

OTUn� n

·

··

OMU

EOBA

When the number of wavelengths to be multiplexed in ZXWM M900 system is more than 48, use OMU80 board or two OMU32/OMU40/OMU48 boards and an OCI board to complex the wavelengths.

When an OMU80 board is adopted, the optical connection is illustrated as shown in Figure 76.

When two OMU32/OMU40/OMU48 boards and an OCI board are adopted, connect the OUT interface on the OMU board to the IN interface on the OCI board, as shown in Figure 77.

F I G U R E 77 OP T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N S O F OMU B O AR D (M O R E T H AN 48 - C H AN N E L )

OMUC100_1

OTU

.

.

OMUC100_2

OTU

.

.

OCIC50_1

OSC

OCIC50_1

ODUC100_1

ODUC100_2

OTU

.

.

OTU

.

.

OTM1 OTM2

EOBA

OSC

DCM

OBAEOPA

OLA ...

Performance and Alarm Messages The Performance and Alarm Messages of the OMU board are listed in Table 86.

T AB L E 86 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F OMU B O AR D

Type Item Remark

Output power -

AWG operating temperature Performance

AWG heater consumption Only for OMU boards with AWG

Alarm No output power alarm Low output power alarm

-

Chapter 3 Boards


Type Item Remark

Output power out of upper limit alarm -

Output power out of lower limit alarm -

AWG temperature out of limit alarm Only for OMU boards with AWG

Event MCU reset -

VMUX Board Functions The VMUX board provides the following functions.

Multiplexing function based on channel power pre-equalization: It adopts the AWG/TFF and Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA) technology to adjust the attenuation of each channel before multiplexing. It supports the multiplexing of 40/48 wavelengths in C band and 40 wavelengths in L band.

Power monitoring function: It monitors the optical power of the output multiplexed signal.

Channel power control and adjustment function: Cooperating with the OPM board and the ZXONM E300, the VMUX board can adjust the power of a single channel or adjust the power of all channels at the same time. The adjustment precision is 0.1 dB. The adjustable range is from 0 to 10 dB. And the intrinsic insertion loss is no more than 8 dB.

The following three ways can be used to control the adjustment of channel power:

The OPM board detects the power feedback at the transmitting end of the board from the MON interface on the VMUX/EOBA board or the MON_T interface on the OBM board.

Adjust the channel power manually in the ZXONM E300.

The OPM board detects the power feedback at the receiving end of the board from the MON interface on the ODU/OPA/OBA board or the MON_R interface on the OBM board.

Adjust the channel power manually in the ZXONM E300.

The OCH layer power management subsystem controls the power adjustment automatically. It queries the optical channel power at the receiving end, and then adjusts the VMUX board at the transmitting end automatically.

The VMUX board adopts AWG/TFF as its multiplexer. In terms of the wavelength range of channel signals, the VMUX board can be divided into C100_1 sub-band, C100_2 subband, L100_1 sub-band and L100_2 subband VMUX board.



Operating Principle The operating principle of the VMUX board is illustrated in Figure 78.

F I G U R E 78 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F VMUX B O AR D

The VMUX uses the temperature control circuit to drive the VOA of each channel, which will adjust the attenuation of each channel and then combine all the channels into a single channel of signal for output. The VOAs, AWG and the temperature control and drive circuit are all located in the optical module of the VMUX board.

The control and communication unit sends the VOA adjustment command of each channel, and queries the performance and alarm information of the optical module in the board.

The function of each unit shown in Figure 78 is described as follows.

VOA

Each channel is equipped with a VOA, which is controlled by the VOA control circuit part of the temperature control and drive circuit.

AWG/TFF

It is a kind of multiplexer adopted by the VMUX board, which implements the multiplexing function for different optical signals.

Temperature control and drive circuit

It includes two parts, the temperature control circuit and the VOA drive circuit, controlling the VOA of each channel and the AWG respectively.

Coupler

It receives the multiplexed optical signal from the AWG, outputs part of the optical signal and then sends the rest to the optical power monitoring module.

Chapter 3 Boards



It provides the online monitoring interface, and reports the detected output optical power to the control and communication unit.


It monitors the power of the output combined optical signal and reports it to the EMS, and receives commands from the EMS.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of the VMUX40 board is illustrated in Figure 79.

F I G U R E 79 FR O N T P AN E L O F VMUX B O AR D

Table 87 describes the front panel and related information for basic operation of the VMUX board.




4. Laser class sign



T AB L E 87 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F VMUX B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N

Board Item

VMUX

Board ID VMUX40 VMUX48

Subband Name

C100_1 C100_2 L100_1 L100_2

C100_1 C100_2



CHn Optical channel input interface, n = 1-40, LC/PC connector

Optical channel input interface, n = 1-48, LC/PC connector

OUT Line optical output interface, LC/PC connector Optical interface

MON Local optical monitoring interface, LC/PC connector


Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of VMUX is CLASS 1

Slots for VMUX board





Note: The relationship between the status of VMUX board and corresponding status of indicators are same as that of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for the detailed description.

C100_1 and C100_2 respectively refer to the first and the second subband in C band with the spacing at 100 GHz.

Optical Connections of VMUX Board The VMUX board is usually used at the transmitting end of OTM equipment in ultra long-haul 40/48-channel or 80/96-channel systems without regenerator. Taking an 80/96-channel system as example, Figure 80 illustrates the position and optical connections of the VMUX boards in the system.

Chapter 3 Boards


F I G U R E 80 OP T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N S O F VMUX B O AR D

VMUXC100_1

OTU

.

.

VMUXC100_2

OTU

.

.

OCIC50_1

OTM

EOBA

OLA ... OTM

OSC

OPM

The CHn interface of VMUX board is connected to the line side interface of OTU series board, or the aggregate interface of convergence boards (such as SRM41/SRM42/GEM/DSA boards). The multiplexed optical signal is output from the OUT interface of VMUX board.

The VMUX should be used with the OPM board together. It can adjust the power spectrum slope of each channel through the EMS according to the monitored optical power from the OPM board.

Performance and Alarm Messages The performance and alarm messages of the VMUX board are listed in Table 88.

T AB L E 88 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F VMUX B O AR D

Type Item

MUX output power

Optical attenuator value

AWG operating temperature Performance

AWG heater consumption



Output power out of upper limit alarm

Output power out of lower limit alarm

Alarm

AWG temperature out of limit alarm

Channel attenuation adjustment failure Event

MCU reset



ODU Board Functions The ODU board implements the demultiplexing of wavelengths and provides an interface special for online monitoring of multiplexed optical signal.

Four types of ODU boards are available, ODU8, ODU16, ODU32, ODU40, ODU48 and ODU80, as described in Table 89.

T AB L E 89 TY P E L I S T O F ODU B O AR D

Board Type Item

ODU8 ODU16 ODU32 ODU40 ODU48 ODU80

Demultiplexing Number 8 16 32 40 48 80

Multiplexer type TFF TFF AWG, TFF AWG, TFF AWG AWG

Operating wavelength C100_1 C100_1 C100_1 L100_1

C100_1 C100_2 L100_1 L100_2

C100_1 C100_2

C50_1 L50_1

Note: AWG: Array Waveguid Grating

TFF: Thin Film Filter

Operating Principle Taking the ODU80 as example, Figure 81 illustrates the operating principle of ODU board.

F I G U R E 81 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F ODU B O AR D

Multiplexed optical signal input


?1

?2

?80

1:80DeMUX

Optical channel output 1

···


Online monitoring interface



The DeMUX in the ODU board separates optical signals of different channels in a single fiber and then sends them to corresponding optical receivers.

Chapter 3 Boards


Before the multiplexed optical signal enters the DeMUX, part of the signal is sent to the optical power monitoring module, which provides a monitoring interface for online supervision. The optical power monitoring module reports the total input optical power to the EMS through the control and communication unit.

80:1 Multiplier

Combine 80 wavelengths signals into a multiplexed signal.

Coupler

Separate the multiplexed signal of 160/176 channels and sends part of the optical signals to the optical power monitoring module.


Send the output optical power monitored by the monitoring module to the control and communication unit.



Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators Taking the ODU80 board as example, Figure 82 illustrates its front panel.



F I G U R E 82 FR O N T P AN E L O F ODU B O AR D

Table 90 describes the front panel and related information for basic operation of four types of ODU boards.

T AB L E 90 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F ODU B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R AT I O N

Board Type Item


Board ID ODU8 ODU16 ODU32 ODU40 ODU48 ODU80

Subband Name C100_1 C100_1 C100_1 L100_1

C100_1 C100_2 L100_1 L100_2

C100_1 C100_2

C50_1 L50_1


Laser warning sign


Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of ODU board is CLASS 1




4. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


Board Type Item


Optical channel output interface

n = 1-8 n = 1-16 n = 1-32 n = 1-40 n= 1-48 n= 1-80CHn


Optical line input interface OUT


Local optical monitoring interface

Optical interface

MON LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

Number of occupied slot 2 2 2 2 2 4

Slots for ODU board





The ODU board using AWG as its multiplexer is an active board. Therefore, unplugging this kind of ODU board will cause the traffic interruption.

Note: The relationship between the status of ODU board and corresponding status of indicators are same as that of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for the detailed description.

Optical Connections of ODU Board The ODU board is usually equipped at the receiving end of OTM equipment.

The output optical signals from CHn interfaces meet the wavelength requirements specified in ITU-T G.692. The output signals can be output to user equipment directly, or sent to line-side interfaces on OTU series boards or aggregate interfaces of convergence boards (such as SRM41/SRM42/GEM/DSA boards) firstly. And then the signals will be forwarded to user equipment via client-side interfaces or tributary interfaces on these boards.

In the system with no more than 48 wavelengths, the amplified signal on the main optical channel is directly accessed to the IN interface of the ODU board. Suppose the signal is amplified by an EOPA board. Figure 83 illustrates the optical connection of the ODU board.



F I G U R E 83 OP T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N O F ODU B O AR D (W A V E L E N G T H N U M B E R N ≤ 40 )

OTU1?1

OUT2?2

OTUn?n

···

ODU

EOPA

In a system with more than 48 wavelengths, use an ODU80 board, or two ODU32/ODU40/ODU48 boards and an OCI board to split optical wavelength.

When using an ODU80 board, the optical connection of ODU80 board is illustrated in Figure 83.

When using two ODU32/ODU40/ODU48 boards and an OCI board, the IN interface on the ODU board is connected to the R1 or R2 interface on the OCI board, as shown in Figure 77.

Performance and Alarm Messages The Performance and Alarm Messages of the ODU board are listed in Table 91.

T AB L E 91 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F ODU B O AR D

Type Item Remark

Input power -

AWG operating temperaturePerformance

AWG heater consumption Only for ODU boards with AWG

No output power alarm Low output power alarm

-

Input power out of upper limit alarm -

Input power out of lower limit alarm -

Alarm

AWG temperature out of limit alarm Only for ODU boards with AWG

Event MCU reset -

Chapter 3 Boards


OAD Board Functions The OAD board implements the add/drop multiplexing function by adding/dropping 4 or 8 fixed wavelengths and then combining the local added signals with other wavelengths. The fixed wavelengths to be added/dropped are determined according to the customer’s requirements. Moreover, the OAD board can supervise the optical power of the added/dropped signals.

Operating Principle Taking the OAD8 as example, Figure 84 illustrates the operating principle of the OAD board.

F I G U R E 84 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F OAD B O AR D (8 W AV E L E N G T H S )


OADMIN OUT

DROP ADD


The OAD board is mainly composed of the Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer (OADM), the optical power monitoring module and the control and communication unit.

OADM

It adopts optical modules to add/drop the specified wavelengths, multiplex them and forward other wavelengths through.


It monitors the optical power of added/dropped signals and reports the measured power value to the control and communication unit.


It reports the power value received from the optical power monitoring module to the EMS, and receives control commands from the EMS.



Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators Taking the OAD8 as example, Figure 85 illustrates the front panel.

F I G U R E 85 FR O N T P AN E L O F O AD8 B O AR D




4. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


Table 92 describes the front panel and related information for basic operation of two types of OAD boards.

T AB L E 92 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F O AD B O A R D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R AT I O N

Board Type Item

OAD4 OAD8

Board ID OAD4 OAD8



Optical drop interface, LC/PC Dn

n = 1-4 n = 1-8

Optical add interface, LC/PC connector An

n = 1-4 n = 1-8

M1 Mid1 interface for pass-through signal, LC/PC connector

M2 Mid2 interface for pass-through signal, LC/PC connector

IN Input interface for multiplexed signal, LC/PC interface

Optical interface

OUT Output interface for multiplexed signal, LC/PC connector

Number of occupied slot 2 2

Laser warning sign


Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of OAD board is CLASS 1

Slots for OAD board All slots in OTU subrack Slots in OA subrack except slot 5-9 Slots in TMUX subrack except slot 7 and 8




To ensure the gain flatness of each channel while the signal is output from the OUT interface on the OAD board, calculate the attenuation of each channel according to actual situations and add appropriate attenuators between the M1 interface and the M2 interface, and before An interfaces.

Note: The relationship between the status of OAD board and corresponding status of indicators are same as that of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31for the detailed description.



Optical Connections of OAD Board The OAD board is usually equipped in OADM equipment.

Taking unidirectional 8-channel OADM equipment as example, Figure 86 illustrates the optical connections of the OAD8 board.

F I G U R E 86 OP T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N S O F OAD8 B O AR D

O

A

D

?1

?2

?8

.

.

.

OTU1

OTU2

OTU8

?1

?2

?8

.

.

.

OSCLOPM

EOPA

EOBA

?OSC

?OSC

OTU1

OTU2

OTU8

Optical line input from upstream site

Optical line output to downstream site

The output optical signals from Dn interfaces meet the wavelength requirements of G.692, which can be directly output to user equipment. These signals can also be sent to line-side interfaces on OTU boards or aggregate interfaces of convergence boards (such as SRM41/SRM42/GEM/DSA boards) firstly. And then the signals will be forwarded to user equipment via client-side interfaces or tributary interfaces on these boards.

Optical signals meeting the G.692 requirements, which are output by OTU boards or convergence boards (such as SRM41/SRM42/ GEM/DSA boards), are accessed to the OAD board through the An interfaces.

When there is only one OAD board, connect the M1 interface to the M2 interface. If two OAD boards are cascaded to get more add/drop channels, connect the M1 interface on the first OAD board to the IN interface on the second one, and connect the M2 interface on the first board to the OUT interface on the second.

Each OAD board only supports the signal receiving and sending in one direction, that is, the IN interface is connected to the upstream site while the OUT interface is connected to the downstream site.

IN interface: Connected to the OUT interface on the OPA board. The external optical signal is accessed to the OAD board after being amplified.

OUT interface: Connected to the IN interface on the OBA board.

Chapter 3 Boards


Performance and Alarm Messages The Performance and Alarm Messages of the OAD board are listed in Table 93.

T AB L E 93 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F OAD B O AR D

Type Item

Performance Channel add/drop optical power

No add/drop optical power alarm Alarm

Low add/drop optical power alarm

Event -

WBU Board Functions WBU (Wavelength Blocking Unit) board is configured in an ROADM (Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer) subsystem to implement the configuration of add/drop wavelengths. With the application of WBU board, the maintenance of existing system becomes convenient when the add/drop wavelengths change.

The main funtions of WBU board includes:

Supports Wavelength Blocking (WB) modules with two frequency spacings, 50 GHz and 100 GHz.

Supports blocking any wavelength

Provides the function of channel power equalization

Provides the function of spectrum justification

Operating Principle According to different main optical elements cofigured on the board, WBU board can be classified into three different board types, as listed in Table 94.



TABLE 94 WBU BOARD TYPE

WBU Board Type

Add Port

Drop Port

Application Status

WBU/AD1 1 1

1. Supports 40/48 add and 40/48 drop (the frequency spacing is 100GHz)


WBU/AD2 2 2



WBU/DGE 0 0

It does not support adding/dropping of the wavelength, but it supports the dynamic gain equalization for the pass-through wavelength.

Operating Principle of WBU/AD1 and WBU/AD2 The operating principle of WBU/AD1 board is similar to that of WBU/AD2 board. Taking WBU/AD2 board for example, Figure 87 illustrates its operating principle.

FIGURE 87 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF WBU/AD2 BOARD

For the optical signal in direction A, after the line signal is input to the WBU board, two couplers separate two specified wavelengths (Drop1/Drop2) respectively from the appointed signal and drop them.

For the optical signal in direction B, after the line signal is input to the WBU board, the WB module blocks and equalizes the power of dropped wavelengths in the pass-through signal. Finally, the processed pass-through wavelengths are combined with two added wavelengths via two couplers and then the combined signal is output as the line signal.

The WBU board consists of a WB module, couplers and the control & communication unit.

Chapter 3 Boards


WB module

The WB module blocks the dropped wavelengths. On the other hand, it equalizes the power of pass-through wavelengths by applying spectrum adjustment.

Coupler

It extracts or composes optical signal according to a specified coupled power proportion.


It sends adjustment command to the WB module, reads the status of the WB module, communicates with the NCPF board and APSF, and accepts the commands from the EMS.

Operating Principle of WBU/DGE The operating principle of WBU/DGE board shows in Figure 88. WBU/DGE board does not support wavelength adding/dropping, but it dynamically equalizes gain in the pass-through signal. The functional modules shown in Figure 88 are same as those in WBU/AD2 board, as described above.

FIGURE 88 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF WBU/DGE BOARD

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of WBU board is shown in Figure 89.



FIGURE 89 FRONT PANEL OF WBU BOARD

Table 95 describes the front panel and related information for basic operations of the WBU board.

TABLE 95 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTIONS OF WBU BOARD AND RELATED BASIC OPERATIONS

Board

Item WBU/AD1, WBU/AD2, WBU/DGE

Board ID WBU



A1 Optical add interface 1, LC/PC connector

A2 Optical add interface 2, LC/PC connector

Optical interface

D1 Optical drop interface 1, LC/PC connector




4. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


Board

Item WBU/AD1, WBU/AD2, WBU/DGE

D2 Optical drop interface 2, LC/PC connector

EXIN Pass-through optical input interface, LC/PC connector

EXOUT Pass-through optical output interface, LC/PC connector



MON Local monitoring output interface, LC/PC connector

Laser warning sign


Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of WBU board is CLASS 1


2

Slots for board





Note: The relations between the working status and corresponding indicator status of WBU board are same as those of OTU board.

Optical Connections of WBU Board WBU board is used in an ROADM subsystem. Taking WBU/AD2 board for example, Figure 90 shows the optical connections.



FIGURE 90 OPTICAL CONNECTIONS OF WBU/AD2 BAORD

As shown in Figure 90, each WBU board only supports the transceiving of signals in one optical direction. The IN/OUT interface of WBU board is connected to site in the direction A or direction B.

The following describes the connection of WBU board’s interfaces.

IN: It is connected to the OUT interface of EOPA board for accessing the amplified aggregate optical signal.

OUT: It is connected to the IN interface of EOBA board to output aggregate optical signal.

D1/D2: It is connected to the IN interfaces of ODU board.

The optical signals output from CHn interfaces of ODU board meet the wavelength requirements specified in ITU-T G.692. These signals can be output to user equipment directly, or output to line interface of OTU series boards or aggregate interface of convergence boards (such as SRM/GEM/DSA boards) first and then forwarded to user equipment through the client interfaces of these boards.

A1/A2: It is connected to the OUT interface of OMU board.

The CHn interfaces of OMU board is connected to line interfaces of OTU series board or aggregate interface of convergence boards (such as SRM/GEM/DSA boards) for accessing optical signals meeting the requirements of ITU-T G.692.

Various optical multiplexing/demultiplexing boards can be connected to WBU board, such as OMU8, OMU16, OMU32, OMU40, OMU48, OMU80, OMU96, OCI, ODU8, ODU16, ODU32 ODU40, ODU48, ODU80, ODU96 and OCI. Each WBU board supports the adding/dropping of up to 40/80 or 48/96 wavelengths.

EXIN and EXOUT interfaces of WBU board at A side are connected to EXOUT and EXIN interface of WBU board at B side respectively.

Chapter 3 Boards


Performance and Alarm Messages The performance, alarm and event messages of the WBU board are listed in Table 96.

TABLE 96 PERFORMANCE, ALARM AND EVENT MESSAGES OF WBU BOARD

Type Item

Board environment temperature Performance

Optical channel attenuation

Board environment temperature alarm Alarm

WB module failure alarm

MCU reset

EEPROM data error Event

Channel attenuation adjustment failure

WSU Board Functions WSU (Wavelength Selective Unit) board is configured in an ROADM (Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer) subsystem to implement the reconfiguration of add/drop wavelengths. With the application of WBU board, the maintenance of existing system becomes convenient when the add/drop wavelengths change.

WSU board offers the following main functions:

Supports assigning any wavelength to any port

Supports blocking any wavelength

Supports equalizing channel power

Supports adjusting specturm

Operating Principle Six types of WSU boards are available according to different main optical components used in the board, as described in Table 97.



TABLE 97 TYPES OF WSU BOARD

Board Type

Panel Type

Add Channel Number

Drop Channel Number

Application

WSUD/MA1 1 8 WSUD/MA1 supports the adding/dropping of 40 wavelengths.

WSUD/MA2 2 8 WSUD/MA2 supports the adding/dropping of 40 wavelengths.

WSUD/E

WSUD

0 9

Using as the extension board for upgrade, it has no adding optical interface and local monitoring output interface.

WSUA/MD1 8 1

WSUA/MD1 board is used in networks that need broadcast function. It supports the adding/dropping of 40 channels of fixed wavelengths or 40 assinged wavelengths.

WSUA/MD2 8 2

WSUA/MD2 board is used in networks that need broadcast function. It supports the adding/dropping of 40 channels of fixed wavelengths or 40 assinged wavelengths.

WSUA/E

WSUD

8 0 Using as the extension board for upgrade, it has no dropping optical interface.

Operating Principle of WSUD/MA1 and WSUD/MA2

With the similar operating principle, only the channel numbers of optical adding/dropping between WSUD/MA1 and WSUD/MA2 are different. Taking a WSUD/MA2 board for example, the operating principle is described in Figure 91.

Chapter 3 Boards


FIGURE 91 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF WSUD/MA2 BOARD

After the line signal in direction A is input to the WSU board, the WSS module outputs two dropped signals with specified wavelengths. At the same time, the WSS module equalizes the power of pass-through signals and outputs the signals through pass-through interface.

For the pass-through signal in direction B, after the optical signal is input to the WSU board, the processed pass-through wavelengths are combined with two added wavelengths via two couplers and then the combined signal is output as the line signal.

WSU board is comprised of WSS module, coupler and control and communication unit.

WSS module: it supports the assignment and adjustment function from any wavelength to any port, and it equalizes the power by adjusting spectrum.

Coupler

It extracts or composes optical signal according to a specified coupled power proportion.


It sends adjustment command to the WSS module, reads the status of the WSS module, communicates with the NCPF board and APSF, and accepts the commands from the EMS.



Operating Principle of WSUD/E Board

Applied as the extension board for upgrade, WSUD/E board has no optical added interface and local output monitoring interface. The operating principle of the WSUD/E board is described in Figure 92. The unit functions of WSUD/E board are the same as those of WSUD/MA2.

FIGURE 92 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF WSUD/E BOARD

WSS Module


……

Drop 1 Drop 2 Drop 9

Optical Input

Operating Principle of WSUA/MD1 and WSUA/MD2 Board

With the similar operating principle, only the channel numbers of optical adding/dropping between WSUA/MD1 and WSUA/MD2 are different. Taking a WSUA/MD2 board for example, the operating principle is described in Figure 93. The unit functions of WSUA/MD1 and WSUA/MD2 board are the same as those of WSUD/MA2.

Chapter 3 Boards


FIGURE 93 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF WSUA/MD2 BOARD

Operating Principle of WSUA/E Board

Applied as the extension board for upgrade, WSUA/E board has no optical added interface. The operating principle of the WSUA/E board is described in Figure 94. The functions of WSUA/E board are the same as those of WSUD/MA2.

FIGURE 94 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF WSUA/E BOARD



Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of WSU board varies depending on its type, WSUA or WSUD. Two kinds of front panels are similar except optical interfaces’ identifiers, as shown in Figure 95.

FIGURE 95 FRONT PANEL OF WSU BOARD

WSUA WSUD




4. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


Table 98 describes the front panel and related information for basic operations of WSU board.

TABLE 98 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTIONS OF WSU BOARD AND RELATED BASIC OPERATIONS

Board

Item WSUA/MD1, WSUA/MD2, WSUA/E

WSUD/MA1, WSUD/MA2, WSUD/E

Board ID WSUA WSUD


An Optical add interface, n=1-8, LC/PC connector

Optical add interface, n=1-2, LC/PC connector

Dn Optical drop interface, n=1-2, LC/PC connector

Optical drop interface, n=1-8, LC/PC connector

EXIN Pass-through input optical interface, LC/PC connector

EXOUT Pass-throuhg output optical interface, LC/PC connector -



-

OUT/D9 -

Line output optical interface, LC/PC connector

It acts as the optical drop interface 9 when the board is used as an extension board.

Optical interface

MON Local monitoring output optical interface, LC/PC connector


Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of WSU board is CLASS 1


2

Slots for board





Note: The relations between the working status and corresponding indicator status of WSU board are same as those of OTU board.



Optical Connections of WSU Board WSU board is used in an ROAMD subsystem. Take WSUD/MA2 board as example. Figure 96 shows the optical connections of two WSUD boards.

FIGURE 96 OPTCIAL CONNECTIONS OF WSUD/MA2 BOARD

As shown in Figure 96, each WSU board only supports the transceiving of optical signals in one optical direction. The IN/OUT interface of WSU board is connected to site A or site B.

The following describes the connection of WSU board’s interfaces.

IN: It is connected to the OUT interface of EOPA board for accessing the amplified aggregate optical signal.

OUT: It is connected to the IN interface of EOBA board to output aggregate optical signal.

Dn: Dn interfaces are connected to line interfaces of OTU series boards or aggregate interface of convergence boards (such as SRM/GEM/DSA boards). Then the needed optical signals are output from the client interfaces or tributary interfaces of these boards to user equipment.

A1/A2: optical add interface. A1/A2 interfaces are connected to the OUT interface of OMU board. The CHn interfaces of OMU board are connected to line interfaces of OTU series boards or aggregate interfaces of convergence boards (such as SRM/GEM/DSA boards) so as to access optical signals meeting ITU-T G.692 requirements.

EXIN/EXOUT interfaces of WSUD board at side A are respectively connected to EXIN/EXOUT interfaces at side B.

Chapter 3 Boards


If extension WSUD boards are used for system expansion, connect a Dn interface of the WSUD/MA2 board to the IN interface of a WSUD/e board. The optical connections are showed in Figure 97.

FIGURE 97 OPTICAL CONNECTIONS OF WSUD/MA2 BOARD (WITH WSUA/E BOARDS)

In the case that service broadcast function is needed together with the add/drop configuration and port assignment functions, WSUA board should be configured instead.

The configuration of WSU board is flexible. The adding/dropping of 8, 16, 24, 32 and 40 wavelengths can be implemented by configuring different interfaces of WSU board.



Performance and Alarm Messages The performance, alarm and event messages of WSU board are listed in Table 99.

TABLE 99 PERFORMANCE, ALARM AND EVENT MESSAGES OF WSU BOARD

Type Item

Board environment temperature Performance

Optical channel attenuation

Board environment temperature alarm Alarm

WSS module failure alarm

MCU reset



WBM Board Functions WBM (Wavelength Blocking Multiplexing) board is configured in a Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer (ROADM) subsystem to implement the reconfiguration of add/drop wavelengths. With the application of WBU board, the maintenance of existing system becomes convenient when the add/drop wavelengths change.

WBM provides the following functions:

Supports the configuration of wavelengths with the spacing at 100 GHz, adding wavelengths from 1 to 40 channels or passing wavelengths through

Divides the multiplexed input optical signal (combining wavelengths with the spacing at 100 GHz) into two parts: drop optical signal and straight-through optical signal, so as to implement the add/drop or straight-through of wavelengths with the spacing at 100 GHz

Supports manual/automatic configuration of add or straight-through status for each wavelength in the EMS

Supports the optical power equalization for each wavelength channel of output port

Provides the optical power detection function for line input interface, drop interface, straight-through output interface, straight-through input interface, line output interface and each wavelength channel

Chapter 3 Boards


All wavelengths will be blocked at the output port when the board is power down. After the board restarts, the status before power-down can recover automatically.

Operating Principle Figure 98 illustrates the operating principle of WBM board.

FIGURE 98 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF WBM BOARD

ROAM Moduel


Drop optical output

Straight-throughoptical output

Straight-throughoptical input

Line output

Line input

Add 1 Add 2 Add 40

...

...

WBM board consists of an ROAM module and a control and communication unit. The following describes the function of each component of WBM board.

ROAM Module

Supports the configuration of wavelengths with the spacing at 100 GHz. Adds wavelengths from channel 1 to channel 40 or passes wavelengths through according to actual configuration requirements. The add or straight-through status of wavelengths can be set in the EMS manually or automatically.

Divides the line input signal combining wavelengths with the spacing at 100 GHz into two parts: drop optical signal and straight-through optical signal

Implements the optical power equalization function for channels of output interface with the following two modes:

1) Open loop control mode: In this mode, the ROAM module adjusts the attenuation amount of Variable Optical Amplifier (VOA) to achieve the power equalization.

2) Closed loop control mode: In this mode, the ROAM module controls the attenuation amount of VOA by setting the object optical power of each channel before MUX.

The adjustment range of attenuation is 0 to 20 dB. The attenuation adjustment precision within the range from 0 to 10 dB is ±0.7dB. The attenuation adjustment precision within the range from 10 dB to 20 dB is ±1.3dB.

When the power supply of the WBM board fails, the ROAM module will block all wavelengths at the output interfaces. After the power supply recovers, the status of all these wavelengths will recover too.




Detects and monitors the optical power of line input interface, drop interface, straight-through output interface, straight-through input interface, line output interface, as well as each wavelength channel, and then reports the information to the EMS

Communicates with NCPF and APSF boards, executes the commands issued by the EMS, and forwards configuration and adjustment commands to the ROAM module

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators Figure 99 shows the front panel of WBM board.

FIGURE 99 FRONT PANEL OF WBM BOARD




4. Laser class sign

Table 100 describes the front panel and related information for basic operations of WBM board.

Chapter 3 Boards


TABLE 100 DESCRIPTION OF WBM BOARD’S FRONT PANEL AND RELATED OPERATION INFORMATION

Board

Item WBM

Board ID WBM



An Optical add interface, n=1-40, LC/PC connector

DROP Optical drop interface, LC/PC connector

EXIN Optical input interface of straight-through light, LC/PC connector

EXOUT Optical output interface of straight-through light, LC/PC connector

IN Line optical input interface, LC/PC connector

Optical interface

OUT Line optical output interface, LC/PC

Laser warning sign


Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of WBM board is CLASS 1


2

Slots for WBM board



Slots in TMUX subrack except slot 7 and slot 8




Note: The relations between the working status and corresponding indicator status of WSB board are same as those of OTU board.

Optical Connections of WBM Board Figure 100 illustrates the optical connections of WBM boards in an ROADM subsystem.

As shown in Figure 100, an ROADM site needs two WBM boards, one connected to upstream site and the other connected to downstream site. Each WBM board supports the receiving and transmitting of optical signals in one optical direction.



FIGURE 100 OPTICAL CONNECTIONS OF WBM BOARD

The following explains the optical connections in the transmitting direction shown in Figure 100. The optical connections in the receiving direction are similar to those in the transmitting direction.

Each WBM board only provides a pair of transmitting/receiving in one optical direction, that is , the interface IN/OUT connects to site A or site B.

IN: accesses the amplified aggregate signals, and connects to the OUT interface on EOPA board.

OUT: outputs aggregate signals, and connects to the IN interface on EOBA board.

DROP interface of WBM board is connected to IN interface of ODU board. The optical signals output from CHn interface of ODU board, complying with ITU-T G.692, can be output directly to the user equipments. The signals are also transmitted to the line interface of OTU boards, or to the aggregate interface of convergence board (SRM/GEM/DSA), and then transmitted to the user equipments via the corresponding client interface or tributary interface.

An interface is connected to the line interface of OTU board, or aggregate interface of SRM/GEM/DSA board. And then the signals are transmitted to the user equipments via the corresponding client interface to tributary interface.

EXIN/EXOUT of WBM board at side A is respectively connected to EXOUT/EXIN of WBM at side B.

Chapter 3 Boards


Performance and Alarm Messages The performance, alarm and event messages of WBM board are listed in Table 101.

TABLE 101 PERFORMANCE, ALARM AND EVENT MESSAGES OF WBM BOARD

Type Item

Board environment temperature

Input optical power


AWG working temperature offset

Performance

VOA attenuation amount

Board environment temperature over-threshold alarm

Board self-test failure alarm

Module failure alarm



Output power over upper threshold alarm

Output power below lower threshold alarm

Low input power too low alarm


Input power over upper threshold alarm

Input power below lower threshold alarm

Alarm

Temperature over-threshold alarm

MCU rest



SDM Board Functions SDM (Supervisory Division Multiplexing) board performs the multiplexing/demultiplexing of signals of the main optical channel and optical supervisory channel, cooperating with the EMS to implement supervision function.



It is applicable to such cases which needs no EOA board due to short span. The following two types of SDM board are available to replace EOBA board and EOPA board.

Operating Principle The operating principle of SDM board is illustrated in Figure 101.

F I G U R E 101 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F SDM B O AR D

1510/1550Demultiplexer

1510/1550Multiplexer

OSC

Line input Line output

SDMR SDMT

Line output Line input

Note: SDMR board has only 1510/1550 demultplexer while SDMT board has only 1510/1550 multiplexer.

SDMR: separates the optical supervisory channel signal (1510 nm) from the main optical channel signal (1550 nm) in the line signal (1510 nm + 1550 nm).

SDMT: combines the optical supervisory channel signal (1510 nm) and the main optical channel signal (1550 nm) and then sends the combined signal (1510 nm + 1550 nm) to the line.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panels of SDMT and SDMR board are shown in Figure 102.

Chapter 3 Boards


F I G U R E 102 FR O N T P AN E L O F SDM BO AR D

SDMT SDMR

T AB L E 102 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F SDM BO AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N S

Board Item

Transmitting End SDM Receiving End SDM

Board ID SDMT SDMR



Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of SDM board is CLASS 1

IN 1550 nm main optical channel input interface, LC/PC connector

Line input interface, LC/PC connector

Optical interface

OUT Line output interface, LC/PC interface

1550 nm main optical channel output interface, LC/PC connector




4. Laser class sign



Board Item

Transmitting End SDM Receiving End SDM

SIN 1510 nm optical supervisory channel input interface, LC/PC connector

-

SOUT - 1510 nm optical supervisory channel output interface, LC/PC connector


Local monitoring output interface, LC/PC connector


Slots for SDM board All slots in OTU subrack Slots in OA subrack except slot 5-9 Slots in TMUX subrack except slot 7 and 8




Note: The relations between the status of SDM board and corresponding status of indicators are same as those of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for the detailed description.

Optical Connections of SDM Board SDM board is configured in OTM equipment. The location of SDMT/SDMR board and the optical connection relations with other boards are illustrated in Figure 103.

F I G U R E 103 OP T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N O F SDM B O AR D

OTU1λ1

OTU2λ2

OTUnλn

OTU1

OTU2

OTUn

•••

O

M

U

O

D

U

OPM

SDMR

λ

IN

λOSC

OSCT

OSC

SIN MON

OUT

OUT

SOUTMON

IN

SDMT

λ1

λ2

λn

Chapter 3 Boards


Performance and Alarm Messages The performance and alarm messages of SDM board are listed in Table 103.

T AB L E 103 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F SDM B O AR D

Type Item Remark

Input optical power Only for SDMR board Performance

Output optical power Only for SDMT board

No input optical power alarm Low input optical power alarm

Only for SDMR board

Alarm No output optical power alarm Low output optical power alarm

Only for SDMT board

Event - -

Optical Amplification Boards


EOA Enhanced Optical Amplifier

DRA Distributed Raman Amplifier OA/OTU subrack

EOA Board Function and Operating Principle EOA (Enhanced Optical Amplifier) board adopts Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier (EDFA) to amplify optical signals, which uses the full light amplification mode to replace the original electrical regeneration mode. In this way, both the cost and the complexity of the system are reduced.

EOA board provides the feature of high transient response, which can meet the transmitting requirement of single-channel system at 10Gbit/s rate and the long distance DWDM system. The saturated output power of EOA board is up to 24 dBm.

EOA board also provides the following functions.

Gain major adjustment, gain lock and power clamp function

Gain lock: EOA board adopts the fixed gain amplification mode. The gain lock value can be adjusted to meet the needs of different regeneration distance. Within the full input and full operating



temperature range, the error of signal gain lock precision is no more than 0.1 dB.

Power clamp: When the input optical power is too high or too low, EOA board can control its output power with the power clamp function to avoid the optical surge of EDFA. The power clamp includes two modes:

Upper clamp: Under this mode, the output power always keeps the nominal output value when the input power reaches the saturated output power.

Lower clamp: It ensures that a certain small optical power will be output from the EOA board when the EOA board has no input light.

Automatic Power Reduction (APR) function

When the system detects that there is no input light on the link, it will shut down or reduce the output optical power of the EOA board automatically. When the input light recovers, EOA board will work again. In this way, the optical power level is always in the safe range while operators maintain or repair fibers of the optical line.

APR: It acts on an OTS. When any OTS fails, all the other OTSs and downstream alarms will not be influenced. During the APR processing, the EOA board at each receiving end outputs clamped optical power, while the EOA board at each transmitting end is shut down.

Note:

OTS: It is an optical path between OTM/OADM and OLA, or between OLAs

Supervision function

EOA board has a 1510/1550 multiplexer and a 1510/1550 demultiplexer to add and drop the supervisory wavelength (1510 nm). However, EOA board does not process the supervisory signal (1510 nm).

EOA board also provides feature monitoring and alarm processing functions, which will be implemented according to the requirement of EMS.

EOA board can amplify optical signals in C/L band. In terms of its position and function in the network, OA board falls into three types: Enhanced Optical Booster Amplifier (EOBA), Enhanced Optical Line Amplifier (EOLA) and Enhanced Optical Pre-Amplifier (EOPA), as described in Table 104. According to different band and output power, the board can be classified into several subtypes, as listed in Table 105.

T AB L E 104 TY P E L I S T O F EO A B O AR D

Type Position Function

EOBA Located after light emitter of OTM equipment regenerator equipment

It boosts the emitting power so as to extend the transmission distance.

Chapter 3 Boards


Type Position Function

EOLA Located in the middle of an OMS without dispersion compersation

It inserts EDFA in the optical transmission link to amplify optical signals directly. Multiple EOLAs can be used in an OMS as needed.

EOPA Located at the end of an OMS and before light receiver

It preamplifiers optical signals having been attenuated through the optical line so as to enhance the optical power to meet the sensitivity of optical receivers.

EONA Located in the middle of an OMS

It inserts EDFA in the optical transmission link to amplify optical signals directly. The gain range can be adjusted greatly to meet the requirements of different regeneration distances. DCM module can be inserted in the middle for the dispersion compensation.

T AB L E 105 L I S T O F B O AR D S U B T Y P E

Board

Type

Board

Subtype Band

Output Optical

Power (dBm) Remark

EOBAS C P≤20 Single-slot, LC/PC

connector

EOBAD C，L P≤20 Double-slot, LC/PC

connector

EOBA

EOBAH C，L 20<P≤26

Double-slot.

OUT interface:

E2000/APC

Other interfaces:

LC/PC

EOLAS C P≤20 Single-slot, LC/PC

connector

EOLAD C，L P≤20 Double-slot, LC/PC

connector

EOLA

EOLAH C，L 20<P≤26

Double-slot.

OUT interface:

E2000/APC

Other interfaces:

LC/PC

EOPAS C P≤20 Single-slot, LC/PC

connector EOPA

EOPAD C，L P≤20 Double-slot, LC/PC

connector

EONA EONAD C，L P≤20 Double-slot, LC/PC



Board

Type

Board

Subtype Band

Output Optical

Power (dBm) Remark

connector

EONAH C，L 20<P≤26

Double-slot.

OUT interface:

E2000/APC

Other interfaces:

LC/PC

Different type of EOA board also provides the following features:

The saturation output power of EOBAH board is up to 26 dBm.

The features of EONA board are listed as follows:

Supports gain adjustment in a large range, which is up to 10 dB to meet the requirements of different line and regeneration distance.

Supports the function of gain gradient adjustment. the adjustment range is 0.5 dB to 1 dB to compensate the power difference of each channel caused by the SRS effect in the long-distance DWDM system.

Supports the output power adjustment in a large range. The range is -10 dBm to the saturation output power.

Supports the function of inserted DCM attenuation.

EOBA/EOLA/EOPA board supports the gain adjustment to provide the adjustment range up to ±2 dB.

Operating Principle Operating principle of EOBA/EOLA/EOPA The operating principle of EOBA/EOLA/EOPA board is similar. Take EOLA board for example, the operating principle is shown in Figure 104.

Chapter 3 Boards


F I G U R E 104 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F EOL A B O AR D

1510nm 1510nm

Line Output1510/1550

DemultiplexerEDFACoupler Coupler

1510/1550Multiplexer

Optical Power

Monitoring

EDFA Drive Circuit

Optical Power

Monitoring

Control and Communication

Line Input

Online Monitoring at Output Interface

1550nm 1550nm 1550nm 1550nm

After entering the EOLA board, the optical line signal is separated by the 1510/1550 demultiplexer into the signal with the wavelength 1510 nm and that with the wavelength 1550 nm. The 1510 nm wavelength is sent to the OSC/OSCF board while the 1550 nm wavelength is sent to the EDFA module for amplification. After that, these two wavelengths are combined again by the 1510/1550 multiplexer and then are output from the EOLA board.

The function of each module in the EOLA board is described as follows:

1510/1550 demultiplexer, 1510/1550 multiplexer

Located at the receiving and transmitting end of the EOLA board respectively, the demultiplexer and the multiplexer implement the separation and combination of the supervisory channel (1510 nm) and the main optical channel (1550 nm).

The EOBA board only has the multiplexer; the OPA board only has the demultiplexer; while the OLA board has both the demultiplexer and the multiplexer.

Coupler

One coupler is after the 1510/1550 demultiplexer and another coupler is before the 1510/1550 multiplexer. They extract some light from the main optical channel signal and send it to two optical power monitoring modules.


It receives the small amount of optical signal from the coupler, monitors the optical power and implements the gain control. The optical power monitoring module at the transmitting end also provides an online monitoring interface for the purpose of monitoring the parameters such as line spectrum and optical power with instruments without influencing the traffic.

EDFA, EDFA drive circuit

The EDFA amplifies the optical signal with the wavelength 1550 nm. The amplification is controlled by the EDFA drive circuit, which has the functions of gain adjustment, power clamp, gain lock, APSD and APR.



The gain adjustment range of the OA board suitable for 32-channel systems is ±3 dB; while for the OA board suitable for 40-channel systems, the gain adjustment range is ±2 dB. The adjustment precision is 0.1 dB.


It checks the input/output optical power and reports it to the EMS. At the same time, it receives control commands from the EMS.

Operating principle of EONA board The operating principle of EONA board is illustrated in Figure 105.

F I G U R E 105 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F EON A B O AR D

After entering the EONA board, the optical line signal is separated by the 1510/1550 demultiplexer into the signal with the wavelength 1510 nm and that with the wavelength 1550 nm. The 1510 nm wavelength is sent to the OSC/OSCF board. On the other hand, the 1550 nm wavelength is sent to the EDFA module for the first grade amplification, and then it is accessed into the DCM module for dispersion compensation after gain adjustment in EVOA module. Then, the 1550 nm wavelength is proceeded the second grade amplification in EDFA module. After that, these two wavelengths are combined again by the 1510/1550 multiplexer and then are output from the EONA board.

The function of each module in the EONA board is described as follows:

1510/1550 demultiplexer, 1510/1550 multiplexer

Located at the receiving and transmitting end of the OA board respectively, the demultiplexer and the multiplexer implement the separation and combination of the supervisory channel (1510 nm) and the main optical channel (1550 nm).

Coupler

Chapter 3 Boards


One coupler is after the 1510/1550 demultiplexer and another coupler is before the 1510/1550 multiplexer. They extract some light from the main optical channel signal and send it to two optical power monitoring modules.


It receives the small amount of optical signal from the coupler, monitors the optical power and implements the gain control. The optical power monitoring module at the transmitting end also provides an online monitoring interface for the purpose of monitoring the parameters such as line spectrum and optical power with instruments without influencing the traffic.

EDFA, EDFA drive circuit

The EDFA amplifies the optical signal with the wavelength 1550 nm. The amplification is controlled by the EDFA drive circuit, which has the functions of gain adjustment, power clamp, gain lock, APSD and APR.

The gain adjustment range of EONA board is 10 dB (±5 dB). The adjustment precision is 0.1 dB.

EVOA (Electrically Variable Optical Attenuator)

It adjusts optical attenuation according to the commands from EMS.


It checks the input/output optical power and reports it to the EMS. At the same time, it receives control commands from the EMS.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators EOA board can be divided into three types: EOBA, EOLA and EOPA.

EOBA board

Figure 106 illustrates the front panel of EOBA board.



F I G U R E 106 FR O N T P AN E L O F EOBA B O AR D

EOBAS EOBAD EOBAH

T AB L E 106 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F EOBA B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N S

Board

Item EOBA

Board ID EOBAS EOBAD EOBAH

Label mn

Located below the board ID on the front panel.

m: two digits, indicating the amplification gain of EOBA board. For example, 25 means the gain of OBA board is 25 dB.

n: two digits, indicating the saturated output power of EOBA board. For example, 20 means the output optical power is 20 dBm.





4. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


Board

Item EOBA

Board ID EOBAS EOBAD EOBAH

IN Line input interface, LC/PC connector


SIN 1510 nm input interface, LC/PC connector Optical interface

OUT

Line output interface, LC/PC connector


Line output interface, E2000/APC connector


Indicates that the laser class of EOBA board Laser class sign

CLASS 3R CLASS 3B CLASS 3B

Number of occupied slot 1 2 2

Slots for OLA board







Note: The relations between the working status and corresponding indicator status of EOBA board are same as those of OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for detailed description.

EOLA board

Figure 107 illustrates the front panel of EOLA board. Table 107 describes the front panel and related basic operations of EOLA board.



F I G U R E 107 FR O N T P AN E L O F EOL AD B O AR D

EOLAS EOLAD EOLAH

T AB L E 107 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F EOL A B O A R D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N S

Board

Item EOLA

Board ID EOLAS EOLAD EOLAH

Label mn





Optical IN Line input interface, LC/PC connector




4. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


Board

Item EOLA

Board ID EOLAS EOLAD EOLAH


SIN 1510 nm input interface, LC/PC connector

SOUT 1510 nm output interface, LC/PC connector

interface

OUT





Indicates that the laser class of EOLA board Laser class sign

CLASS 3R CLASS 3B CLASS 3B

Number of occupied slot 1 2 2

Slots for OLA board








EOPA board

Figure 108 illustrates the front panel of EOLA board. Table 108 describes the front panel and related basic operations of EOLA board.



F I G U R E 108 FR O N T P AN E L O F EOPAD B O AR D

EOPAS EOPAD

T AB L E 108 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F EOPA B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N S

Board

Item EOPA

Board ID EOPAS EOPAD

Label mn








4. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


Board

Item EOPA

Board ID EOPAS EOPAD




Optical interface

OUT Line output interface, LC/PC connector


Indicates that the laser class of EOPA board Laser class sign

CLASS 3R CLASS 3B


Slots for OLA board








EONA board

Figure 108 illustrates the front panel of EONA board. Table 108 describes the front panel and related basic operations of EONA board.



F I G U R E 109 FR O N T P AN E L O F EONA B O AR D

EONAD EONAH

T AB L E 109 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F EONA B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N S

Board

Item EONA

Board ID EONAD EONAH

Label mn








4. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


Board

Item EONA

Board ID EONAD EONAH


DCM1 DCM input interface, LC/PC connector

DCM2 DCM output interface, LC/PC connector

SIN 1510 nm input interface, LC/PC connector

MON1 Local monitoring output interface, LC/PC connector

MON2


Optical interface

OUT Line output interface, LC/PC connector



Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of EONA board is CLASS 3B


Slots for OLA board







Optical Connections of EOA Board Figure 110 illustrates typical optical connections of EOA boards.



F I G U R E 110 TY P I C AL OP T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N S O F EOA B O AR D

OSCOPM

EOLA

EOLA

EOBA

EOBAEOPA

EOPAEASTInput

EASTOutput

OSC OSC

WEST Output

WESTInput

OPM OPM

OTMOTM OLA

OSCλ OSCλ

OSCλ

OSCλ

OSCλ

OSCλ

EOBA board: receives multiplexed optical signal through IN interface,

and outputs the amplified signal through OUT interface. The monitoring signal from OSC board is input to OBA board through SIN interface. The MON interface is connected to OPM board.

EOPA board: receives optical line signal through IN interface and outputs the amplified signal through OUT interface. It outputs the monitoring signal to OSC board through SOUT interface. The MON interface is connected to OPM board.

EOLA board: receives optical line signal to be amplified through IN interface, and outputs amplified line signal through OUT interface. Its SIN/SOUT interfaces are connected to the output/input interfaces of OSC board. The MON interface is connected to OPM board.

Performance and Alarm Messages The performance messages of EOA board are listed in Table 110.

T AB L E 110 P E R F O R M AN C E M E S S AG E S O F EOA B O AR D

Type Item Remark

Pump laser n bias current n=1-4

Pump TEC current n=1-4, only EOA board with TEC function has this performance

Pump laser temperature offset n=1-4, only EOA board with TEC function has this performance

Pump background PD current n=1-4-

Board Environment temperature -

Board

EDF temperature Only EOA board of L board has this performance.

Inner-modulation interface Amount of Optical attenuation Only for EONA board

EOA Input Interface Input optical power -

Chapter 3 Boards


Type Item Remark


Pump reflection power Only EOA with the output power is higher than 24 dBm has this performance

EOA Output Interface

Pump reflectance Only EOA with the output power is higher than 24 dBm has this performance

Note: for the pump laser n (n>1), the perfomance value is only exist if the number of pump is more than one.

The alarm messages of EOA board are listed in Table 111.

T AB L E 111 AL AR M M E S S A G E S O F EOA B O AR D

Type Item Remark

Pump laser n bias current over-threshold alarm

n=1-4

Pump laser n cooling current over-threshold alarm

n=1-4, only EOA board with TEC function has this performance

Pump laser temperature offset over-threshold

n=1-4

Pump laser n end-of-life alarm n=1-4-

Board Environment temperature over-threshold alarm

-

EDF temperature offset out of limit alarm Only EOA board with TEC function in L board has this performance.

Modules failure or communication fault alarm

-

Board

DSP operating alarm -

High input optical power alarm -

Low input optical power alarm -

Input optical power out of upper limit alarm -

EOA Input Interface

Input optical power out of lower limit alarm -

High output optical power alarm -

Low output optical power alarm -

No output optical power alarm -

Output optical power out of upper limit alarm

-

EOA Output Interface

Output optical power out of lower limit alarm

-



Type Item Remark

High reflection power alarm Only for EOA board with the output power higher than 24 dBm

High reflectance alarm Only for EOA board with the output power higher than 24 dBm

The event messages of EOA board are listed in Table 112.

T AB L E 112 E V E N T M E S S AG E S O F EOA B O AR D

Type Item Remark

MCU reset -

DSP start-up -

DSP download program failure - Board Port

Board data configuration is faulty -

EDFA pump laser automatic shut-down

It is only reported when the board software operates automatically rather than when EMS sends commands

EDFA pump laser automatic startup

It is only reported when the board software operates automatically rather than when EMS sends commands

Enter optical power control -

Output Port

Quit optical power control -

Internal Module Interface Attenuation adjustment failure -

DRA Board Functions RAMAN amplifiers share the characteristics of small noise coefficient, adjustable gain, flat gain, standard structure and high reliability. The DRA board implements the distributed amplification of optical signals by using RAMAN amplifier to feed the RAMAN pump light into transmission fiber in the reverse direction. Cooperating with EDFA, it is applicable to single-hop ultra-long distance systems.

The DRA board has the following functions.

Chapter 3 Boards


Supporting the amplification of wavelengths in C band, L band and C+L band (1529 nm-1604 nm), and implementing ultra-capacity and ultra-long distance optical fiber communication

Supporting gain adjustment, gain spectrum adjustment and gain stabilization

Gain adjustment: Adjust pump laser optical power, combining with gain adjustment of EDFA. During the adjustment, it adopts slow change control so as to improve system security.

Gain spectrum adjustment: Adjust optical power of each pump laser respectively to implement the spectrum adjustment so as to solve problems of channel flatness.

Gain stabilization: Stabilize pump power.

Laser automatic shut-down

Performance monitoring and alarm processing, performing corresponding operations according to requirements of EMS

Operating Principle The operating principles of DRA board are different for the amplification of C-band wavelengths and L-band wavelengths. Figure 111 and Figure 112 illustrates the operating principles of DRA board in case of C band and C+L band wavelength amplification respectively.

F I G U R E 111 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F DRA B O AR D (C B AN D )

RAMAN Pump Module(C-Band)


C-band opticalsignal input

C-band opticalsignal output

Extended pumplight

Output onlinemonitoring



F I G U R E 112 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F DRA B O AR D (C+L B AN D )

RAMAN Pump Module(C-Band)

C+L band optical signal inputC+L band opticalsignal output

Extended pump lightC band outputonline monitoring

RAMAN Pump Module(L-Band)

Control and CommunicationUnit

Control and CommunicationUnit

L band output online monitoring

DRA (L band)

DRA (C band)

Two types of RAMAN pump modules are available for DRA board, C-band module and L-band module. C-band RAMAN module works independently in system, while L-Band module can only work with the cooperation of C-band module.

C-band RAMAN module: Works independently to amplify C-band optical signals. It has the functions of output power detection, pump light multiplexing and pump/signal coupling.

L-band RAMAN module: Only provides driver for pump source and amplifies L-band optical signals. It must be used with C-band together.

While L-band RAMAN module and C-band RAMAN module work together, the DRA board receives optical signals through the input interface of C-band module. C-band signals are amplified in C-band module. L-band signals are amplified in L-band and then the amplified signals are input to C-band module through the extended pump optical interface. Finally, the C-band module outputs amplified C+L band optical signals together.

Chapter 3 Boards


Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of DRA board is illustrated in Figure 113.Table 113 describes the front panel and related operations of DRA board.

F I G U R E 113 FR O N T P AN E L O F DRA B O AR D

DRA（C-band） DRA（L-band）

T AB L E 113 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F DRA B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N S

Board Item


Board ID DRA DRA


Laser warning sign


1. Running and alarm

indicators



4. Laser class sign



Board Item


IN C-band or C+L band optical signal input interface, E2000/APC connector

-

OUT C-band or C+L band optical signal output interface, LC/PC connector -

MON Local monitoring output interface, LC/PC connector -

EXT Extended interface for L-band pump light, LC/PC connector -

PMON C-band pump monitoring output interface, LC/PC connector

L-band pump monitoring output interface, LC/PC connector

Optical interface

POUT - L-band pump light output interface, LC/PC connector


Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class sign of DRA is CLASS 3B

Slots for DRA board





A board slot at the right side of DRA should be reserved without inserted board at the right of DRA board for heat dissipation.

In the application of DRA board, connectors used in optical line should be as few as possible. The reflectance of fiber connecting surface should be no more than -30 dB so as to ensure the amplification efficiency of DRA board.

If line optical fiber route changes or optical fiber changes, fiber pigtails connected to DRA board should be recleaned. Record reflectance and reflected power of DRA board.

Cleaning precautions

Use fiber microscope to observe optical fibers to check whether they are clean while cleaning fiber surfaces for DRA board. The reflectance should be no more than -30 dB (the reflectance alarm threshold is -15 dB). Clean fiber surface once you plug/unplug fiber pigtails or replace DRA board.

Note: The relationship between the status of DRA board and corresponding status of indicators are same as that of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for the detailed description.

Chapter 3 Boards


Optical Connections of DRA Board C-band DRA board can be used separately to implement the amplification

of C-band optical signals.

L-band DRA band must be used with C-band DRA board together. Connect the POUT interface of L-band DRA board to the EXT interface of C-band DRA board to implement the amplification of C and L band optical signals.

In ultra-long distance systems, DRA board is used with small gain OA boards in series. The location and optical connection relation of DRA board is shown in Figure 69.

Performance and Alarm Messages The performance and alarm messages of DRA board are listed in Table 114.

T AB L E 114 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F DR A B O AR D

Type Item Remark

Laser TEC current -


Output optical power Only C-band DRA board has this performance.

Output optical power of pump -

Reflected optical power of pump -

Pump reflectance -


Module temperature alarm -

Pump reflection power high alarm -

Pump refection rate high alarm -

No output optical power alarm Only C-band DRA board has this performance.

Low output optical power alarm Only C-band DRA board has this performance.

Pump laser bias current over-threshold alarm -

Pump laser TEC current over-threshold alarm -

Alarm

Pump temperature offset alarm -

Pump laser automatic shut-down - Event

Pump laser automatic start up -



Power Management Boards


LAC Line Attenuation Compensator

OWM Optical Wavelength Monitor


MCPD Multiple Channel Power Detector

OA/OTU subrack

LAC Board Functions The LAC board adjusts its electrically variable optical attenuator (EVOA) through the EMS according to measured line optical power to ensure the power of each span, received power at receiving end and OSNR keep normal.

The operating wavelength range of LAC board is C band or L band. The intrinsic insertion loss is less than 2 dB. The adjustment range of EVOA is 2 dB-26 dB, the adjustment precision is 0.5 dB and adjustment step is 0.2 dB.

LAC board includes two types: LACG and LACT.

LACG board: It has two EVOAs, being applicable to OLA, OADM and back-to-back OTM sites.

LACT board: It has one EVOA, being applicable to single-end OTM sites.

The LAC board supports the monitoring function for input power and output power.

LAC board with Gain Flattening Filter (GFF) can compensate DWDM spectral dipping caused by Simulated RAMAN Scattering effect to improve transmitting performance of the system.

Operating Principle Taking an LACG board as example, Figure 114 illustrates its operating principle.

Chapter 3 Boards


F I G U R E 114 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F LAC B O AR D (L ACG)

Coupler

Coupler

Coupler

Coupler

EVOA

Optical Power Monitoring Unit




EVOA Drive Circuit

Control and Communiction

Unit

EVOA

OUT1

IN2

IN1

OUT2

GFF

GFF

Note: Compared with LACG board, LACT board reduces an optical direction.

The EMS sends attenuation adjustment command through the control and communication unit in LAC board. Upon receiving the command, the EVOA drive circuit drives corresponding EVOA in the optical receiving module to adjust attenuation amount.

EVOA: electrically variable optical attenuator; an EVOA is configured for each optical direction, which is driven by EVOA drive circuit.

Coupler: separates optical signal from the main optical channel and sends part of the signal to the optical power measuring unit.

EVOA drive circuit: reports measured input optical power and output optical power to control and communication unit. Meanwhile, it receives control commands from the control and communication unit and sends adjustment command to EVOA.

Optical power measuring unit: measures output optical power and input optical power, and feeds it to EVOA drive circuit.

GFF: uses to compensate the DWDM spectral dipping caused by SRS effect. GFF is an optional element.


It reports the power value received from the optical power monitoring module to the EMS, and receives control commands from the EMS.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panels of LACG board and LACT board are illustrated in Figure 115. Table 115 describes the front panel and related basic operations of LAC board.



F I G U R E 115 FR O N T P AN E L O F L AC B O AR D

LACG Board LACT Board

T AB L E 115 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F L AC B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N S

BoardItem

LACG LACT

Board ID LACG LACT



IN - Optical input interface, LC/PC connector

OUT - Optical output interface, LC/PC connector

Optical interface

IN1 Optical input interface 1, LC/PC connector

-

Chapter 3 Boards


BoardItem

LACG LACT

OUT1 Optical output interface 1, LC/PC connector

-


-

OUT2 Optical output interface 2, LC/PC connector

-


Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of LAC board is CLASS 1

Slots for LAC board All slots in OTU subrack Slots in OA subrack except slot 5-9 Slots in TMUX subrack except slot 7 and 8




Note: The relations between the status of LACG/LACT board and corresponding status of indicators are same as those of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for the detailed description.

Optical Connections of LAC Board The LACG board is applicable to OLA, OADM and back-to-back OTM sites while the LACT board is applicable to single-end OTM sites.

The optical connections of LAC boards can be divided into two types, as described in Figure 116 and Figure 117 respectively. For the first connection way shown in Figure 116, LACT boards are usually configured after EOBA board, while LACG boards are configured before EOLA board. LACT boards are configured before EOPA boards, while LACG boards are configured before EOLA boards as shown in Figure 117.

F I G U R E 116 T H E O P T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N O F L AC B O AR D S (1 )

EOLAEOBA EOPALACT

LACG

EOBAEOPA EOLA LACT

OTM OLA OTM



F I G U R E 117 T H E O P T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N O F L AC B O AR D S (2 )

EOLAEOBA EOPA

LACT

LACG

EOBAEOPA EOLA

LACT

OTM OLA OTM

Performance and Alarm Messages The performance and alarm messages of LAC board are listed in Table 116.

T AB L E 116 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F LAC B O AR D

Type Item

Output optical power Performance

Input optical power

High input optical alarm

No output optical alarm

Low output optical alarm

No input optical alarm

Alarm

Low input optical alarm

Attenuation adjustment failure

MCU reset Event

Data configuration of board is faulty

OWM Board Functions OWM (Optical Wavelength Monitor) board functions to supervise central frequency drift of optical channels after these channels have been multiplexed and then send the frequency adjustment message to NCPF board. Each OWM board can implement the wavelength control for bidirectional 80 C-band wavelengths.

The impact of frequency drift is relatively small in a DWDM system with the channel spacing at 100 GHz. However, in a system with higher single channel rate and smaller channel spacing (for example, in the system with the spacing at 50 GHz), the frequency drift will influence the system stability directly.

Chapter 3 Boards


In an 80-channel DWDM system with the spacing at 50 GHz consisting of ZXWM M900, OWM board, multiplexing type boards, OTU series boards, EOA board, master board (NCPF/NCPF) and the EMS ZXONM E300 can be combined to build up a centralized wavelength supervision subsystem to improve the stability and precision of wavelength control.

Note: For detailed knowledge of integrated wavelengh supervision subsystem, please refer to Appendix C in this manual.

OWM board functions to supervise central frequency drift of optical channels after multiplexing and send frequency adjustment message to NCP/NCPF board.

Each OWM board can implement the wavelength control for bidirectional 80 C-band or L-band wavelengths.

Operating Principle The operating principle of OWM board is illustrated in Figure 118.

F I G U R E 118 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F OWM B O AR D

1×2Optical Switch

TF Wavelength Supervisor

Con

trol

and

C

omm

unic

atio

n U

nit

TF Drive Circuit

Optical Switch Drive Circuit

NCPor

NCPF

Reference wavelength

C/L-band input light 1

C/L-band input light 2 Detection

wavelength

Detection wavelengh

Wavelength control message

OWM board consists of a 1×2 optical switch, tunable filter (TF), wavelength supervisor, drive circuits and the control and communication unit.

1×2 optical switch: selects aggregate optical signals to be detected. Each OWM board can only detect either C-band 80-channel aggregate signal or L-band 80-channel aggregate signal.

TF: uses narrow-band tunable filter to get current detection wavelength, which is set in the EMS ZXONM E300.

Wavelength supervisor: monitors wavelength offset according to the detection wavelength got from the TF. It also acts as synchronization check device during wavelength adjustment.

Drive circuits: includes optical switch drive circuit and TF drive circuit. They receive control commands from the control and communication unit and then drive the 1×2 optical switch and TF.



Control and communication unit: drives optical switch and TF via optical switch drive circuit and TF drive circuit. It calculates wavelength offset according to the detection wavelength and reference wavelength got from the wavelength supervisor. It also sends adjustment command to NCP/NCPF board.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicator The front panel of OWM board is illustrated in Figure 119. Table 117 describes the front panel and related basic operations of OWM board.

F I G U R E 119 FR O N T P AN E L O F OWM B O AR D

T AB L E 117 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F OWM B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N S

BoardItem

OWM

Board ID OWM






4. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


BoardItem

OWM

IN1 Optical input interface 1 for C/L-band multiplexed signal, LC/PC connector Optical

interface IN2 Optical input interface 2 for C/L-band multiplexed signal, LC/PC

connector


Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of OWM board is CLASS 1

Slots for OWM board All slots in OTU subrack Slots in OA subrack except slot 5-9 Slots in TMUX subrack except slot 7 and 8




Note: The relations between the status of OWM board and corresponding status of indicators are same as those of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for the detailed description.

Optical Connections of OWM Board OWM board is configured at the transmitting end of the system.

Each OWM board only detects two C/L-band 80-channel optical signals. Therefore, a 160-channel bidirectional node needs two OWM boards. An 80-channel four-direction node also needs two OWM boards.

All optical transponder boards supervised by an OWM board must be managed by the same NCP/NCPF board with the OWM board. That is, the OWM board and optical transponder boards must be installed in the cabinet managed by the same NCP/NCPF board.

For the detailed configuration of OWM board, please refer to Appendix C in this manual.



Performance and Alarm Messages The performance and alarm messages are listed in Table 118.

T AB L E 118 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F OWM B O AR D

Type Item Remark

Performance Board environment temperature -

Wavelength offset over-threshold alarm Alarm threshold: wavelength offset is out of ±5 GHz

Board environment temperature over-threshold alarm

Alarm threshold: temperature is out of 0℃-65℃

Alarm

Module failure alarm -

Supervision circuit damage or device fault -

Optical switch failure -

Successful wavelength adjustment -

Unable to supervise wavelength -

Wavelength band error -

Unadjustable object board -

Adjustment failed several times -

Wavelength adjustment time out -

Data error -

Data type do not match for the board type -

Event

Agent can not find the corresponding wavelength or board

-

OPM Board Functions The OPM board implements the supervision of optical channel performance, measuring parameters of each optical channel, such as optical power, central wavelength and OSNR, and then reports these data to the EMS. Each OPM board detects performances of four optical interfaces.

The precision for parameter measurement is as follows.

Optical power: ±1.0 dBm

Central wavelength: ±0.1 nm

OSNR: ±1.5 dB (OSNR<25 dB)

Chapter 3 Boards


Operating Principle The operating principle of OPM board is illustrated in Figure 120.

F I G U R E 120 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F OPM B O AR D

Opticalswitch

Detectingand

ProcessingUnit


As shown in Figure 120, the OPM board has four optical interfaces. The detecting and processing unit measures parameters of each optical channel. Then the control and communication unit reports the detected performance data to the EMS, which can issue commands to query optical channel parameters through the control and communication unit.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of OPM board is illustrated in Figure 121. The front panel and related basic operations are described in Table 119.



F I G U R E 121 FR O N T P AN E L O F OPM B O AR D

T AB L E 119 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F OPM B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N S

Board Item

OPM

Board ID OPM






Optical interface



Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of OPM board is CLASS 1

Slots for OPM board All slots in OTU subrack Slots in OA subrack except slot 5-9 Slots in TMUX subrack except slot 7 and 8




4. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


Board Item

OPM




Connect IN1, IN2, IN3 or IN4 interface to MON interface of a board to measure the parameters of optical channel occupied by this interface. The measured result is displayed in the ZXONM E300 EMS.

Note: The relationship between the status of OPM board and corresponding status of indicators are same as that of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for the detailed description.

Performance and Alarm Messages The performance and alarm messages of OPM board are listed in Table 120.

T AB L E 120 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F OPM B O AR D

Type Item Remark

Optical power of channel (optical interface 1-4)

-

Central wavelength of channel (optical interface 1-4)

- Performance

OSNR of channel (optical interface 1-4)

-

No channel optical power alarm (optical interface 1-4)

Alarm threshold: 5 dB less than normal optical power

Wavelength offset alarm (optical interface 1-4)

Alarm threshold: the offset from nominal wavelength is out of the range ±0.15 nm

Alarm

OSNR alarm (optical interface 1-4)

Alarm threshold: 3 dB less than the recommended OSNR index

Event Optical switch failure (optical interface 1-4)

-



MCPD Board Board Function MCPD board is applied in the ultra-long span system with DRA or RPU board, to correctly and quickly verify different statuses, such as no optical input, ASE noise input, and +ASE noise of multi-channel signal input. The position of MCPD board in the system is described in Figure 122.

Note: For detail description about RPU board, please refer to Unitrans ZXWM M900 (V2.20) Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing Optical Transmission System RPOA Subsystem User’s Manual.

F I G U R E 122 TH E P O S I T I O N O F MCPD B O AR D I N T H E SY S T E M

MCPD board provides the functions described as follows:

Supports optical power monitoring for the aggregate input optical, and reports the data to the EMS system.

Correctly monitors if the modulation signals exist in the input optical.

Assists with APR and APSD functions.

Supports the application in C+L band.

Chapter 3 Boards


Operating Principle The operating principle of MCPD board is shown in Figure 123.

F I G U R E 123 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F MCPD B O AR D

O/E Conversion

Power Monitoring

Control and Communication

Signal SpectrumMonitoring

After O/E conversion, the aggregate optical signals are accessed to the spectrum monitoring and power monitoring. And then the control and communication unit reports the monitoring result to the EMS. EMS system can send the query commands for the channel parameter via control and communication unit.

O/E conversion

It converts the aggregate optical signals into the electric signals, and then sends the signals to the spectrum monitoring unit and power monitoring unit.

Spectrum monitoring

It monitors the spectrum features and controls the gain for the electrical signals after O/E conversion.

Power monitoring

It monitors the power of input power.


It reports the signal spectrum and optical power to EMS, and accepts the control commands from EMS.

Performance and Alarm

TH E P E R F O R M AN C E AN D AL AR M M E S S AG E S O F MCPD B O AR D AR E L I S T E D I N TA B L E 121 .



T AB L E 121 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F MCPD B O AR D

Type Item Remark

Performance Input optical power -

Board self-test failure alarm -

Low optical power alarm -

No optical power alarm - Alarm

LOS alarm -

MCU reset -

Data error -

Event

Board criterion imcomplement

Board criterion includes optical power

criterion and ASE monitoring voltage

criterion.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of MCPD board is illustrated in Figure 124. The front panel and related basic operations are described in Table 119.

F I G U R E 124 FR O N T P AN E L O F MCPD B O A R D




4. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


T AB L E 122 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F MCPD B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N S

Board Item

MCPD

Board ID MCPD



Optical interface IN Optical input interface, LC/PC connector



Slots for OPM board All slots in OTU subrack Slots in OA subrack except slot 5-9 Slots in TMUX subrack except slot 7 and 8




Connect IN interface to MON interface of a board to measure the parameters of optical channel occupied by this interface. The measured result is displayed in the ZXONM E300 EMS.

Protection Boards


OP Optical Protect Board

OPCS Optical Protect for Channel Section

OPMS Optical Protect for Mux Section

OMCP Optical Multi-Channel Protection

OA/OTU subrack

OP Board Functions The OP board is used to implement OMS line 1+1 protection and OCH 1+1 protection function.



It performs protection switching or restoring based on received optical power, manual switching/restoring command from EMS or automatic protection switching (APS) external command (complying with ITU-T G.841).

With the ZXONM E300 EMS, users can manage current protection switching status of OP board.

Operating Principle The operating principles of OP board are illustrated in Figure 125.

F I G U R E 125 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F OP B O AR D

Coupler

1×2switch

Coupler

Coupler

TOUT1

TOUT2

ROUT

TIN

RIN1

RIN2


As shown in Figure 125, there are two directions: concurrent transmitting direction from TIN to TOUT1/TOUT2, preferred receiving direction from RIN1/RIN2 to ROUT.

In concurrent transmitting direction: Optical signal received through TIN are divided into two optical signals with same wavelength by the coupler, and then output through TOUT1 and TOUT2. These two optical signals protect each other.

In preferred receiving direction: Optical signals received through RIN1 and RIN2 are input to corresponding couplers separately. Part of light output from couplers is input to the control and communication unit for optical power measurement. The other part of light is input to the 1×2 switch, which selects optical signal according to APS controller’s instruction and measured optical power. Finally, the selected optical signal is output through ROUT port.

Chapter 3 Boards


Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of OP board is illustrated in Figure 126.

F I G U R E 126 FR O N T P AN E L O F OP B O AR D

Table 123 describes the front panel and related basic operations of OP board.

T AB L E 123 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F OP B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N S

Board Item

OP

Board ID OP


TIN Transmitting end input interface, LC/PC connector

TOUT1 Transmitting end working line/channel output interface, LC/PC connector

Optical interface TOUT2 Transmitting end protection line/channel output interface, LC/PC

connector


2. Optical switching status indicator



5. Laser class sign



Board Item

OP

ROUT Receiving end output interface, LC/PC connector

RIN1 Receiving end working line/channel output interface, LC/PC connector

Optical interface

RIN2 Receiving end protection line/channel output interface, LC/PC connector


Laser warning sign


Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of OP board is CLASS 1

Slots for OP board All slots in OTU subrack Slots in OA subrack except slot 5-9 Slots in TMUX subrack except slot 7 and 8




Table 124 lists the relationship between the board status and corresponding status of indicators.

T AB L E 124 C O R R E S P O N D E N C E R E L AT I O N S B E T W E E N T H E W O R K I N G S T AT U S AN D I N D I C AT O R S T AT U S O F OP B O AR D

Indicators Working Status

NOM (Green) ALM (Red) STA


The red indicator and the green indicator flash alternately. Off





Board initialing On Flashing slowly and regularly Off

The board is waiting for download

The red indicator and the green indicator flash quickly at the same time. Off

Downloading status The red indicator and the green indicator flash slowly at the same time. Off

Switching alarm Flashing slowly and regularly - On (red)

No switching Flashing slowly and regularly - On (green)

Chapter 3 Boards


Note:

STA bi-color indicators are green and red.

The “-” symbol means that the indicator status is indefinite.

Optical Connections of OP Board OP board can be used to implement OCH 1+1 protection and OMS 1+1 protection. The following introduces these two kinds of protection modes respectively.

OCH 1+1 Protection

OP board applies the operating principle of “concurrent transmitting and preferential receiving” to implement OCH 1+1 protection. Two configuration modes are available for OCH 1+1 protection function: OTU redundancy configuration and OTU shared configuration.

OTU redundancy configuration mode

In this mode, a pair of transmitter and receiver OTU type boards is configured on the working channel and the protection channel respectively. For OCH protection, OP boards are located before transmitting-end OTU board in optical terminal and after receiving-end OTU board.

The OTU redundancy configuration mode is applicable to both chain networks and ring networks. Figure 127 illustrates the optical connection relation of OTU redundancy OCH 1+1 protection in a chain network.

F I G U R E 127 OP T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N S O F OP B O AR D (OTU 1+1 P R O T E C T I O N , OTU R E D U N D AN C Y M O D E I N C H AI N N E T W O R K )

Figure 128 illustrates the optical connection relation in a ring network.



F I G U R E 128 OP T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N S O F OP B O AR D (OTU 1+1 P R O T E C T I O N , OTU R E D U N D AN C Y M O D E I N R I N G N E T W O R K )

OMU

OP

Protection channel

OTU ODU

OMU

ODU

ODU

OMU

ODU

OMU

OP

Working channel

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

Transmitting end: The TIN interface of OP board is connected to transmitting optical interface of user equipment. The TOUT1 and TOUT2 interfaces are connected to client-side receiving optical interfaces of OTU board on the working channel and the protection channel respectively.

Receiving end: The ROUT interface of OP board is connected to receiving optical interface of user equipment. The RIN1 and RIN2 interfaces are connected to client-side transmitting optical interfaces of OTU board on the working channel and the protection channel respectively.

OTU shared configuration mode

In this mode, a pair of transmitter OTU and receiver OTU are shared in the working channel and the protection channel. OP boards are located after transmitting-end OTU board in optical terminal and before receiving-end OTU board.

The OTU shared configuration mode is only applicable to ring networks. Figure 129 illustrates the optical connection relation of OP board in the OTU shared configuration mode.

Chapter 3 Boards


F I G U R E 129 OP T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N O F OP B O AR D (OTU 1+1 P R O T E C T I O N )

OMU

OP

Protection channel

OTUODU

OMU

ODU

ODU

OMU

ODU

OMU

OP

Working channel

OTU

OTU

OTU

Transmitting end: TIN interface of OP board is connected to transmitting optical interface at line side of OTU board. TOUT1 and TOUT2 interfaces are connected to CHn optical interfaces of OMU boards on the working channel and the protection channel respectively.

Receiving end: ROUT interface of OP board is connected to receiving optical interface at line side of OTU board. RIN1 and RIN2 interfaces are connected to CHn optical interfaces of ODU boards on the working channel and the protection channel respectively.

OMS 1+1 Protection

For OMS protection, OP boards are located after multiplexed signal at the transmitting end of OTM equipment and before multiplexed signal at the receiving end of OTM equipment. According to the different positions of EOA boards, two configuration modes are available for OMS 1+1 protection function: EOA shared configuration mode and EOA redundancy configuration mode.

EOA shared configuration mode

In this mode, a pair of EOBA/EOPA board is shared on the working channel and the protection channel. OP boards are located after transmitting-end EOBA board in optical terminal and before receiving-end EOPA board, as shown in Figure 130.



F I G U R E 130 OP T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N O F OP B O AR D (O A S H AR E D C O N F I G U R AT I O N M O D E )

OMD

OP

OP

A direction line 1

ODU

ODU

OMU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

A direction line 2

EOBA

EOBA

EOPA

EOPA

Line 1 - Working channel Line 2 - Protection channel

B direction line 1

B direction line 2...

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

1λ

nλ

3λ2λ

1λ

nλ

3λ2λ

1λ

nλ

3λ2λ

1λ

nλ

3λ2λ

Transmitting end: TIN interface of OP board is connected to OUT interface of EOBA board. TOUT1 and TOUT2 interfaces are connected to line fibers on the working channel and the protection channel respectively.

Receiving end: ROUT interface of OP board is connected to IN interface of EOPA board. RIN1 and RIN2 interfaces are connected to line fibers of ODU boards on the working channel and the protection channel respectively.

EOA redundancy mode

In this mode, a pair of transmitter and receiver OTU type boards is configured on the working channel and the protection channel respectively. OP boards are located before transmitting-end OTU board in optical terminal and after receiving-end OTU board, as shown in Figure 131.

F I G U R E 131 OP T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N O F OP B O AR D (EO A R E D U N D AN C Y C O N F I G U R AT I O N M O D E )

OMD

OP

OP

A Direction line 1

��

ODU

ODU

OMU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

��

� n

�� OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

��

� n

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

��

� n

��

� n

A Direction line 2

B Direction line 1

B Direction line 2

Line1-Working channel Line 2-Protection channel

EOBA

EOBA

EOPA

EOPA

EOPA

EOBA

EOPA

EOBA

Chapter 3 Boards


Transmitting end: TIN interface of OP board is connected to OUT interface of OMU board. TOUT1 and TOUT2 interfaces are connected to IN interface on the working channel and the protection channel respectively.

Receiving end: ROUT interface of OP board is connected to IN interface of ODA board. RIN1 and RIN2 interfaces are connected to OUT interface on the working channel and the protection channel respectively.

Performance and Alarm Messages The performance and alarm messages are listed in Table 125.

T AB L E 125 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F OP B O AR D

Type Item Remark

Working channel input optical power - Performance

Protection channel input optical power -

No working channel input optical power Low working channel input optical power

-

Alarm No protection channel input optical power Low protection channel input optical power

-

Optical switch failure -

Optical switch protection switching -

Optical switch restoring - Event

Repeat switching event

When OP board receives two different switching commands in 50 ms, it will only perform the first switching and report alarm to EMS.

OPMS Board Functions OPMS (Optical Protect for Mux Section) board is used to implement the optical multiplex section shared protection function.

Two types of OPMS board are available: OPMSS board with preventing resonance switch and OPMSN without preventing resonance switch.



Operating Principle Figure 132 illustrates the operating principle of OPMS board.

FIGURE 132 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF OPMS BOARD

Optical SwichControlling Unit

Protection channel

Working channel

Working channel

Protection channel

Protection channel

Working channel

Working channel

Protection channel

Checking and ControllingCircuit

A d

irec

tion B

directio

n

OPMS board performs the protection switching when it receives the switching command sent by the APS controller of OSCF/APSF board. It also accepts and conducts the forcible switching or recovery command sent from NCPF board. The protection switching and recovery is implemented by the optical switch in OPMS board.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of OPMS board is shown in Figure 133.

Chapter 3 Boards


FIGURE 133 FRONT PANEL OF OPMS BOARD

Table 126 describes the front panel and related information for basic operations of the OPMS board.

TABLE 126 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTIONS OF OPMS BOARD AND RELATED BASIC OPERATIONS

Board

Item OPMS

Board ID OPMS



STA Optical switch status indicator, bi-color (red-green)

Laser warning sign


ARO A-direction red-ribbon output optical interface

SC/PC connector

Optical interface

ARI1 A-direction local red-ribbon input optical interface

SC/PC connector



3. Optical switch status indicator




Board

Item OPMS

BRO1 B-direction local red-ribbon output optical interface

SC/PC connector

BRI B-direction red-ribbon input optical interface

SC/PC connector

ABO A-direction blue-rippon output optical interface

SC/PC connector

BRI1 B-direction local red-ribbon input optical interface

SC/PC connector

ARO1 A-direction local red-ribbon output optical interface

SC/PC connector

BBI B-direction blue-ribbon input optical interface

SC/PC connector

ARI A-direction red-ribbon input optical interface

SC/PC connector

BBO1 B-direction local blue-ribbon output optical interface

SC/PC connector

ABI1 A-direction local blue-ribbon input optical interface

SC/PC connector

BRO B-direction red-ribbon output optical interface

SC/PC connector

ABI A-direction blue-ribbon input optical interface

SC/PC connector

ABO1 A-direction local blue-ribbon output optical interface

SC/PC connector

BBI1 B-direction local blue-ribbon input optical interface

SC/PC connector

Optical interface

BBO B-direction blue-ribbon output optical interface

SC/PC connector


2

Slots for board





Table 127 lists the relationship between the board status and the status of corresponding indicators.

Chapter 3 Boards


TABLE 127 RELATIONS BETWEEN THE WORKING STATUS AND INDICATOR STATUS OF OPMS BOARD


NOM (Green) ALM (Red) STA (Bi-color)


The green indicator and the red indicator flash alternately.

OFF


OFF -


ON -

Initializing The green indicator and the red indicator flash quickly three times.

OFF

Downloading status The green indicator and the red indicator flash quickly at the same time.

OFF

A-direction switching alarm


- Continuously lit in red

B-direction switching alarm


- Continuously lit in green


Performance and Alarm Messages OPMS board has only event messages as listed in Table 129.

TABLE 128 EVENT MESSAGES OF OPMS BOARD

Type Item

Performance -

Alarm -

Control optical switch for status switching Event

Online upgrade of software

Configuration of OPMS Board During the configuration of multiplex section shared protection, wavelengths carrying services should be different. Working wavelengths and protection wavelengths of outer ring and inner ring should be assigned symmetrically.

For example, 16 wavelengths (192.1 THz to 193.8 THz) are used as working wavelengths of outer ring, while 16 wavelengths (194.3 THz to 196.0 THz) are used as working wavelengths of inner ring.

As shown in Figure 134, a pair of services is transmitted between node A and node B.



FIGURE 134 CONFIGURATION FOR MULTIPLEX SECTION SHARED PROTECTION

B

DF E

AH

G

C

21(F→E)

21(F→E)

43(E→F)43(E→F)

43(A→B)

21(B→A)

21(B→A)

43(A→B)

λλ

λ

λ

λλ

λ

λ

The service from node B to node A is carried by wavelength 21 (outer ring) while the service from node A to node B is carried by wavelength 43 (inner ring). In this way, the working wavelength 21 and 43 can be used repeatedly between other nodes in the ring network. The wavelength 21 on the inner ring can act as the protection wavelength of the wavelength 21 on the outer ring. Similarly, the wavelength 43 on the outer ring can act as the protection wavelength of the wavelength 43 on the inner ring, so as to implement the shared protection of multiple services on the network.

To configure the multiplex section shared protection, an OPMS board with preventing resonance switch (OPMSS) should be configured at least in the ring to prevent self-excitation in the ring.

OPCS Board Functions OPCS (Optical Protect for Channel Section) board is used to implement the optical channel shared protection of ZXMP M800 equipment. It detects channel faults and performs optical channel switching once some fault occurs in the optical line.

Operating Principle Figure 135 illustrates the operating principle of OPCS board.

Chapter 3 Boards


FIGURE 135 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF OPCS BOARD

Optical SwitchControlling Unit

Protection channel

Working channel

Working channel

Protection channel

Protection channel

Working channel

Working channel

Protection channel

Checking andCotnrolling Circuit

A d

irec

tion B

directio

n

A-direction droppedwavelength

A-direction addedwavelength

B-direction droppedwavelength

B-direction addedwavelength

OPCS board receives and executes the protection switching or recovery command sent from OSC/APS board. The protection switching and recovery is implemented by the optical switches in OPCS board.



Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of OPCS board is shown in Figure 136.

FIGURE 136 FRONT PANEL OF OPCS BOARD

Table 129 describes the front panel and related information for basic operations of the OPCS board.

TABLE 129 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTIONS OF OPCS BOARD AND RELATED BASIC OPERATIONS

Board

Item OPCS

Board ID OPCS



[Note]

STA Optical switch status indicator, bi-color (red-green)

AWO

A-direction working signal output optical interface

LC/PC connector


2. Optical switching status indicator



5. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


Board

Item OPCS

APO A-direction protection signal output optical interface

LC/PC connector

BWI B-direction working signal input optical interface

LC/PC connector

BPI B-direction protection signal input optical interface

LC/PC connector

AWI A-direction working signal input optical interface

LC/PC connector

API A-direction protection signal input optical interface

LC/PC connector

BWO B-direction working signal output optical interface

LC/PC connector

BPO B-direction protection signal output optical interface

LC/PC connector

AADD A-direction working signal optical add interface

LC/PC connector

ADROP A-direction working signal optical drop interface

LC/PC connector

BADD B-direction working signal optical add interface

LC/PC connector

Optical interface

Optical interface

BDROP B-direction working signal optical drop interface

LC/PC connector


Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of OPCS board is CLASS 1


2

Slots for board





Note: The relations between the working status and corresponding indicator status of OPCS board are same as those of OPMS board. Please refer to Table 127 for detailed description.



Performance and Alarm Messages The performance, alarm and event messages of OPCS board are listed in Table 130.

TABLE 130 PERFORMANCE, ALARM AND EVENT MESSAGES OF OPCS BOARD

Type Item

Input optical power of A-direction working channel Performance

Input optical power of B-direction working channel

Low input power of A-direction working channel

No input power of A-direction working channel

Low input power of B-direction working channel Alarm

No input power of B-direction working channel

Control optical switch for status switching Event

Online upgrade of software

Configuration of OPCS Board During the configuration of optical channel shared protection, wavelengths carrying services should be different. For example, a pair of services is transmitted between node A and node B, as shown in Figure 137.

FIGURE 137 CONFIGURATION FOR OPTICA CHANNEL SHARED PROTECTION

B

DF E

AH

G

C

21(F→E)

21(F→E)

22(E→F)22(E→F)

22(A→B)

21(B→A)

21(B→A)

22(A→B)

λλ

λ

λ

λλ

λ

λ

The service from node B to node A is carried by wavelength 21 (outer ring) while the service from node A to node B is carried by wavelength 22 (inner ring). In this way, the working wavelength 21 and 22 can be used repeatedly between other nodes in the ring network. The wavelength 21 on the inner ring can act as the protection wavelength of the wavelength 21 on the outer ring. Similarly, the wavelength 22 on the outer ring can act as the protection wavelength of the wavelength 22 on the inner ring, so as to implement the shared protection of multiple services on the network.

Chapter 3 Boards


Although the wavelengths can be assigned flexibly, be sure that working wavelengths in two directions are different. For convenient debugging and maintenance, adjacent even and odd wavelengths are generally assigned to two directions respectively.

OMCP Board Functions The OMCP uses optical cross connection to implement traffic adding/dropping and protection switching with optical switch modules in it. Each OMCP board supports bidirectional channel 1:8 protection. Two cascaded OMCP boards support directional channel 1:16 protection.

Operating Principle An OMCP board drives two optical switch modules at the same time. The operating principle of OMCP board is illustrated in Figure 138.

F I G U R E 138 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F OMCP B O AR D

Optical Switch Module

IN8

IN0

OUT8

OUT1


.

.

.

.

.

.

IN1 2×2 optical switch 1

2×2 optical switch 8

OUT0

The OMCP board mainly consists of optical switch module and the control and communication unit.

Optical switch module



Each optical switch module contains eight 2×2 optical switches. As shown in Figure 138, the channel from IN0 to OUT0 is the protection channel, while the channels from IN1/OUT1 to IN8/OUT8 are working channels.

Working status

Eight 2×2 optical switches are all in cross status. The IN0 is connected to OUT0; the IN1 is connected to OUT1, and so on.

Protection status

If the traffic i is interrupted due to failure of wavelength channel i (1≤i≤8), the OMCP board switches to protection status from working status when the traffic interruption is detected. The 2×2 optical switch i turns to straight-through status from cross status with other optical switches unchanged.

In the protection status, the INi and OUTi are disconnected. The INi is connected to OUT0. Then the traffic i is transmitted through channel 0 to implement 1: N channel protection. In this case, the original traffic carried by channel 0 is discarded.


This unit monitors the power supply of the board. And it performs the board and EMS supervision function.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of OMCP board is illustrated in Figure 139.

Chapter 3 Boards


F I G U R E 139 FR O N T P AN E L O F OMCP B O A R D

T AB L E 131 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F OMCP B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N S

Board Item

OMCP

Board ID OMCP


ALM Alarm indicator, red Indicator [Note]

STA Status indicator, bi-color (green and red), indicating switching status

Laser warning sign


AIn Working channel input interface of optical switch module A, n=1~8, corresponding to IN1-IN8 in Figure 138

AOn Working channel output interface of optical switch module A, n=1~8, corresponding to OUT1-OUT8 in Figure 138

API Protection channel input interface of optical switch module A, corresponding to IN0 in Figure 138

Optical interface

APO Protection channel output interface of optical switch module A, corresponding to OUT0 in Figure 138




4. Laser class sign



Board Item

OMCP

BIn Working channel input interface of optical switch module B, n=1~8 corresponding to IN1-IN8 in Figure 138

BOn Working channel output interface of optical switch module B, n=1~8 corresponding to OUT1-OUT8 in Figure 138

BPI Protection channel input interface of optical switch module B corresponding to IN0 in Figure 138

BPO Protection channel output interface of optical switch module B corresponding to OUT0 in Figure 138


Laser class sign Indicates that the laser class of OMCP board is CLASS 1

Slots for OMCP board





When the faulty channel recovers, the traffic can only be switched back to the channel in EMS manually.

Since the insertion loss of protection interfaces (IN0/OUT0) of OMCP board is greater than that of other interfaces, make sure that the input power of transmitting end OTU and the output power of receiving end OTU of traffic 0 are in the normal optical power range.

T AB L E 132 C O R R E S P O N D E N C E R E L AT I O N S B E T W E E N T H E W O R K I N G S T AT U S AN D I N D I C AT O R S T AT U S O F OMCP B O AR D



The Bootrom program is downloaded. Off Off Off


The red indicator and the green indicator flash alternately. Off





The board is performing self-test upon power on.

The red indicator and the green indicator flash quickly for three times. Off

The board is in the downloading status.

The red indicator and the green indicator flash quickly at the same time. Off

The input of channel is - - Glowing in red

Chapter 3 Boards




switched.

The output of channel is switched. - - Glowing in green

Both the input and output of channel are switched at the same time.

- - Glowing in orange

Note: For the bi-color indicator STA, when the red light and green light glows at the same time, it will be lighted in orange.

Optical Connections of OMCP Board OMCP boards are located at both ends of channels to be protected, that is, before transmitting end OTU and after receiving end OTU. They are used in pairs.

When both the transmitting end and the receiving end are configured with an OMCP board, the system can implement bidirection 1: N (N≤8) protection, as shown in Figure 140.

Optical switch module A corresponds to channel connections in local transmitting direction, while optical switch module B corresponds to channel connections in local receiving direction. The relations between optical switch module and optical interfaces of OMCP board are described in Table 131.

F I G U R E 140 OP T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N O F OMCP B O AR D (B I D I R E C T I O N AL 1 :8 P R O T E C T I O N )

OMCP

AO8OMUOTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

AI8

Clientsignalinput

ODU

ODU OMU

OTU

API

APO

BPI

OTUBI8BO8

BPO

OMCP

OTU BPI

BPO

BI8 BO8

OTUAO8 AI8

API

APO

Clientsignaloutput

Clientsignalinput

Clientsignaloutput

…

…

…

…

…

…

As shown in Figure 140, at the transmitting end, client side signals are input to the OMCP board through input interfaces. The output interfaces of OMCP board are connected to client-side interfaces of OTU board.

At the receiving end, the OMCP board’s input interfaces are connected to client-side interfaces of OTU board while its output interfaces are connected to user equipment.



The system can implement bidirectional 1:N (N≤16) protection by cascading OMCP board (slave OMCP) with existing OMCP board (master OMCP), as shown in Figure 141.

F I G U R E 141 OP T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N O F OMCP B O AR D (B I D I R E C T I O N AL 1 :16 P R O T E C T I O N )

The dashed frame indicates a site. two slabe OMCPs in the same dashed frame belong to one OMCP board

Connect the APO/BPO interfaces of master OMCP to API/BIP interfaces of slave OMCP board correspondingly with optical fibers.

At the transmitting end, client-side signals are connected to input interfaces of OMCP board. The output interfaces of OMCP board are connected to client-side interfaces of OTU board.

At the receiving end, the input interfaces of OMCP board are connected to client-side interfaces of OTU board. The output interfaces of OMCP board are connected to user equipment.

Chapter 3 Boards


Performance and Alarm Messages The OMCP board only has event messages as listed in Table 133.

T AB L E 133 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F OMCP B O AR D

Type Item

Performance -

Alarm -

Optical switch status switching

Optical switch status restoring Event

Optical switch failure

Control and Supervision Boards


NCP NE Control Processor


OHP Overhead Processing Board

NCPF NE Control Processor for Fast Ethernet

OSCF Optical Supervision Channel for Fast Ethernet

OHPF Overhead Processing Board for Fast Ethernet

APSF Automatic Protection Switching for Fast Ethernet

OA subrack

PBX Power Box Board Interface area of subrack

PWSB Power Supervision Board Monitoring plug-in box

FCB Fan-Control Board Independent fan unit

NCP Board Functions and Operating Principle NCP board is the NE control processor in 2 M supervision systems to implement all functions of NE supervision subsystem. It has the following functions:

Collecting and processing alarm and performance messages of the NE where it is located, reporting these messages to the EMS and forwarding data received from other NCPs, receiving control commands issued by the EMS;



Storing configuration data. It can work separately without the EMS once it has been configured.

Providing Qx and f interface for upper-layer management system. 10/100 M Ethernet electrical interface is used as Qx interface while RS232 interface is used as f interface (complying with V.28 protocol);

Providing ECC route for communication with other NEs, and S interface for communication with other boards;

Sending equipment alarms to PWSB board through alarm output interface;

Receiving information about fan rotate speed, temperature of fan plug-in box sent from FCB board, reporting them to the EMS, and forwarding rotate speed adjustment command from the EMS to FCB board;

Providing management function for multiple racks. One NCP board can manage four racks at most.

The operating principle of NCP board is illustrated in Figure 142.

F I G U R E 142 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F NCP B O AR D

MCU

Databaseand

Program

Qx

EMS

SOther boards

ECCOther NEsf interface

Fan communicationinterface

FCB

Alarm output interfacePWSB

Front Panel: Interface and Indicators The front panel of NCP board is shown in Figure 143.

Chapter 3 Boards


F I G U R E 143 FR O N T P AN E L O F NCP B O AR D

T AB L E 134 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F NCP B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N S

Board NCP

Board ID NCP



Interface RS232 DB9 socket (female), complying with V.28 protocol

Reset button RST Reset NCP board

DIP switch S2

Located at the PCB of NCP board Switch DIP2 to “ON” position to enter mandatory IP address

status. The IP address of OSCF board is 192.192.192.11 Switch DIP1 and DIP8 to “ON” position to enter Probe &

debugging status. Switch all pins to non-ON position to enter application

program status.


Slots for NCP board Slot 8 in OA subrack


2. RS232 interface

3. Reset button



The indicator lights, NOM (green) and ALM (red), on the NCP board represents the running status of the NE. The working status and indicator status of the NCP(/NCPF) board are listed in is shown in Table 135.

T AB L E 135 C O R R E S P O N D E N C E R E L AT I O N S B E T W E E N T H E W O R K I N G S T AT U S AN D T H E I N D I C AT O R S T AT U S O F NCP/NCPF B O AR D

Indicator Status Working/Debugging Status


Working Status

The system is lack of basic databases. Off Flashing

The NCP/NCPF board has been equipped in the ZXWM M900; but it has not been configured in the EMS. On Flashing

The system runs normally or it is downloading a program to a board. Flashing Off

Errors occur while the system is running. Off On

The NCP/NCPF board is started and initialized. The red indicator and green indicator flash alternately.

The Agent program is downloaded to the NCP/NCPF board.

The red indicator and green indicator flash at the same time.

Debugging Status

Mandatory IP status (the DIP2 pin of the DIP switch S2 is set to “ON”) Off On

Probe & debugging status ( the DIP1 and DIP8 of the DIP switch S2 are set to “ON”) On Off

Chapter 3 Boards


Performance and Alarm Messages The performance and alarm messages of NCP board are listed in Table 136.

T AB L E 136 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F NCP B O AR D

Type Item

Performance -

Card dismount alarm Alarm

Card mount alarm

Event -

OSC Board OSC board is used in 2 M supervision systems, mainly performing the following functions:

Forwarding monitoring information carried by the supervision channel (1510 nm or 1625 nm) to NCP/NCPF board and OHP board, and implementing the conversion in the reverse direction.

Implementing APS controller and automatic power reduction (APR) function

In terms of different requirements, OSC board is divided into terminal OSC board (OSCT) and line OSC board (OSCL).

OSCT board: processes supervision signal in one direction. It is applicable to OTM equipment.

OSCL board: processes supervision signals in two directions. If two OSCL board are installed in an OA subrack, supervision signals in four directions can be processed at the same time. The OSCL board is applicable to OLA and OADM equipment.



Operating Principle The operating principle of OSC board is illustrated in Figure 144.

F I G U R E 144 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F OSC B O AR D

TranscoderO/E Converter


Optical supervisionsignal input

E/O Converter Transcoder

Optical supervisionsignal output

DataProcessng Unit

At the receiving end, the OSC board receives optical supervision signal from its adjacent NE. After O/E conversion, code transform and data processing, it forwards the electrical signal to NCP/NCPF board and OHP board via the control and communication unit.

At the transmitting end, the control and communication unit receives electrical signal from NCP/NCPF board and OHP board. After data processing, code transform and E/O conversion, the optical signal carrying supervision information is sent to the adjacent NE.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panels of OSCL and OSCT board are illustrated in Figure 145.

Chapter 3 Boards


F I G U R E 145 FR O N T P AN E L O F OSC B O AR D

OSCL OSCT

T AB L E 137 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F OSC B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N S

Board Item

OSCL OSCT

Board ID OSCL OSCT






4. Laser class sign



Board Item

OSCL OSCT

IN - Optical supervision signal input interface, LC/PC connector

OUT - Optical supervision signal output interface, LC/PC connector

IN1 Optical supervision signal input interface 1, LC/PC connector

-

OUT1 Optical supervision signal output interface 1, LC/PC connector

-

IN2 Optical supervision signal input interface 2, LC/PC connector

-

Optical interface

OUT2 Optical supervision signal output interface 2, LC/PC connector

-


Slots for OSC board Slot 5 and slot 7 in OA subrack Master OSC board must be installed in slot 7




Note: The relations between the status of OSC board and corresponding status of indicators are same as those of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for the detailed description.

Optical Connections of OSC Board A pair of optical interfaces of OSC board transmits/receives the supervision information of a site.

In a system with 80 channels or below, OSC boards are connected to SIN/SOUT interfaces of EOBA, EOPA and EOLA boards with optical fibers, as shown in Figure 146.

Chapter 3 Boards


F I G U R E 146 OP T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N O F OSC B O AR D

OSCL

EOLA

EOLA

EOBA

EOBAEOPA

EOPAEASTInput

EASTOutput

OSCT OSCT

IN

WESTOutput

WESTInput

OTMOTM OLA

OUT

SIN

SOUTIN1

OUT1

OUT2

IN2

SOUT

SIN

SIN

OUT

IN

SOUT

SINSOUT

OMU

ODU OMU

ODU

In a 160-channel system, OSC boards are connected to CSR/CST interfaces of OBM boards with optical fibers, as shown in Figure 73 in the section “Optical Connections of OBM Board”.

Performance and Alarm Messages The performance and alarm messages of OSC board are listed in Table 138.

T AB L E 138 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F OSC B O AR D

Type Detection Point Item Remark


15-min/24-hour background BE -

15-min/24-hour ES -

15-min/24-hour SES -

15-min/24-hour UAS -

OSC sink port (optical input interface)

15-min/24-hour OOF times count -

Performance

OSC source port (optical output interface)


No input optical power alarm Default threshold: -48 dBm

Low input optical power alarm Default threshold: -45 dBm

LOF alarm -

UAS alarm -

SD alarm -

LOS alarm -

Alarm OSC sink port (optical input interface)

15-min/24-hour ES over-threshold alarm

-




15-min/24-hour SES over-threshold alarm

-

15-min/24-hour UAS over-threshold alarm

-

15-min/24-hour BE count over-threshold alarm

-

No output optical power alarm Default threshold: -10 dBm

Low output optical power alarm Default threshold: -7 dBm

OSC source port (optical output interface)

OSC RD (remote defect) alarm -

Loop locking succeeds/fails -

Segment locking succeeds/fails -

Protection locking succeeds/fails -

Switching maneuver succeeds/fails

-

Cleaning external commands succeeds/fails

-

Forcible switching succeeds/fails -

Line (loop) switching succeeds/fails

-

Event Protection switching port

Line (loop) restoring succeeds/fails

-

OHP Board Functions and Operating Principle OHP board processes orderwire data and transparent user channel data between sites in 2 M supervision systems. The operating principle of OHP board is illustrated in Figure 147.

Chapter 3 Boards


F I G U R E 147 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F OHP B O AR D


SignalingHDLC

Time Division Switching Unit

Conferencetelephone processing

CODEC SLIC 2 audiointerfaces

RS232 interface RS422 interface

PCMclock

DTMF

CODECSignal tonegenerator

To OSC board

SLIC: Subscriber Line Interface Circuit

HDLC: High-level Data Link Control

PCM: Pulse Code Modulation

DTMF: Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency

Orderwire overhead information processing

OHP board uses the circuit-switching mode to process speech and speech-related signaling. As shown in Figure 147, the time division switching unit, conference telephone processing unit, codec, SLIC, signal tone generator, PCM clock unit and signaling HDLC unit work together to implement the task. OHP board has the following functions related to orderwire data processing:

Supporting three calling modes: selection call, group call and broadcast call;

Being capable of communication crossing optical multiplex sections, that is, orderwire communication between different optical multiplex sections;

Supporting orderwire interconnection in multiple directions (no less than four directions);

Providing interfaces (audio interfaces) for main phone set and subsidiary phone set, which are located on the interface area of OA subrack. Both phone sets have same functions and can be used within the range of 200 m

Transparent user channel information processing

OHP board processes transparent user channel information carried by optical supervision channel. It provides two user transparent channel interfaces, RS232 interface and RS422 interface.

Control and communication information processing



The control and communication unit receives supervision information from other modules and report it to the EMS. It also receives control commands from the EMS.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of OHP board is shown in Figure 148.

F I G U R E 148 FR O N T P AN E L O F OHP B O AR D


Chapter 3 Boards


T AB L E 139 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F OHP B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N S

Board Item

OHP

Board ID OHP



Slots for OHP board Slot 6 in OA subrack

Note: The relations between the status of OHP board and corresponding status of indicators are same as those of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for the detailed description.

Performance and Alarm Messages The performance and alarm messages of OHP board are listed in Table 140.

T AB L E 140 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F OHP B O AR D

Type Item

Performance -

Alarm Loss of clock source alarm

Event Establishment of orderwire communication link establishment fails

NCPF Board Operating Principle NCPF board can be used as NE control processor in 2 M or 100 M supervision systems to implement NE-level network management function. It provides the following functions:

Collecting and processing alarm and performance messages of other boards in equipment, and report them to the EMS;

Storing configuration data. It can work separately without the EMS once it has been configured.

Providing S interface for communication with other boards;

Providing ECC route for communication with other NEs, and Qx and f interfaces for upper-layer management system;



In 2 M supervision systems, the implementation of ECC route and Qx interface is same as those of NCP board. In 100 M supervision systems, ECC route and Qx interface are provided by OSCF board.

RS232 interface is adopted as f interface. It complies with V.28 protocol.

Supporting standby route to ensure the transfer and exchange of supervision information when optical supervision channel fails;

In a 2 M supervision system, the standby route is accessed to the system by a HUB.

In a 100 M supervision system, the standby route is accessed to the system by an OSCF board.

Providing alarm output interface to send equipment alarms to PWSB board;

Receiving information about fan rotate speed, temperature of fan plug-in box sent from FCB board, reporting them to the EMS, and forwarding rotate speed adjustment command from the EMS to FCB board;

Providing management function for multiple racks. An NCPF board can manage four racks. More NCPF boards are needed for the management of more than four racks. In this case, add HUB between OSCF board and NCPF board to enable the communication between NCPF boards and OSCF boards.

The operating principle of NCPF board in a 2 M supervision system is same as that of NCP board, as shown in Figure 142.

The operating principle of NCPF board in a 100 M supervision system is illustrated in Figure 149.

F I G U R E 149 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F NCPF B O AR D (100 M S U P E R V I S I O N S Y S T E M )

MCU

Databaseand Program

Qx

EMS

S interface

ECCOther NEs

Standby route

f interface

Fan communiationinterface

FCB

Alarm outputinterface

OSCF

Ethernetinterface

Otherboards

PWSB

Chapter 3 Boards


Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of NCPF board is shown in Figure 150.

F I G U R E 150 FR O N T P AN E L O F NCPF B O AR D

T AB L E 141 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F NCPF B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N S

Board Item

NCPF

Board ID NCPF


NET

10/100BASE-T interface, RJ45 socket In different supervision systems, the usage of this interface is different too. In 2 M supervision systems, it is used to connect EMS In 100 M supervision systems, it is used to connect Ethernet

electrical interface of OSCF board

Interface

RS232 DB9 socket (female), complying with V.28 protocol


2. Ethernet interface

3. RS232 interface

4. Reset button



Board Item

NCPF

Reset button RST Reset NCPF board

DIP switch S2

Located at the PCB of NCPF board Switch DIP2 to “ON” position to enter mandatory IP address

status. The IP address of OSCF board is 192.192.192.11 Switch all pins to non-ON position to enter application program

status.


Slots for NCPF board Slot 8 in OA subrack

Note: The relations between the status of NCPF board and corresponding status of indicators are same as those of NCP board. Please refer to Table 135 for the detailed description.

Performance and Alarm Messages The performance and alarm messages of NCPF board are same as those of NCP board, as listed in Table 136.

OSCF Board OSCF board is used in 100 M supervision systems to implement transfer and exchange of ECC data, orderwire and transparent user channel data, and APS information between NEs. It provides the following functions:

Encapsulating ECC data, APS data, transparent user channel data and orderwire data between NEs in a 100 M supervision system into IP packets to implement transfer and exchange of these data;

Providing six 10/100BASE-T electrical Ethernet interfaces with automatic crossover function. Through these interfaces, other boards (such as NCPF, OHPF and APSF), EMS, slave OSCF board and standby route can be accessed into the 100 M supervision system to implement the transfer of internal supervision information of a NE.

Providing two 100BASE-FX or 10BASE-FL optical Ethernet interfaces for the accessing of 1510 nm or 1625 nm optical supervision channel to implement the transfer of supervision information between NEs. Use 10BASE-FL interfaces in 10 M supervision systems while use 100BASE-FX interfaces in 100 M supervision systems.

Providing hardware-based layer 3 transfer capability

Supporting dynamic routing with OSPF (open shortest path first) protocol adopted

Chapter 3 Boards


Operating Principle The operating principle of OSCF board is illustrated in Figure 151.

F I G U R E 151 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F OSCF B O AR D


RouteSwitching

Unit

Ethernet electricalinterface 1 ~ 6

Ethernet opticalinterface 1

Ethernet opticalinterface 2

OSC

At the transmitting end, the OSCF board receives data packets from NCPF, APSF and OHPF board in the NE through Ethernet electrical interfaces. These data packets are forwarded to other NEs after being switched to corresponding Ethernet optical interfaces by the route switching unit.

At the receiving end, the OSCF board receives data packets from other NEs through Ethernet optical interfaces. The route switching unit switches these data packets to corresponding Ethernet electrical interfaces according to the types, destination IP addresses and MAC addresses of these packets. Through these interfaces, the packets are forwarded to NCPF, APSF and OHPF board in the NE.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of OSCF board is shown in Figure 152.



F I G U R E 152 FR O N T P AN E L O F OSCF B O AR D

T AB L E 142 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F OSCF B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N S

Board Item

OSCF

Board ID OSCF



STA Indicates connection status and data receiving/transmitting status of optical interfaces, bi-color (green and red)

Yellow indicator, located at the right top corner of each Ethernet electrical interface. It indicates connection status of Ethernet electrical interface

Indicator

Green indicator, located at the right bottom corner of each Ethernet electrical interface. It indicates data receiving/transmitting status of Ethernet electrical interface.

IN1 Supervision signal 10BASE-FL or 100BASE-FX input interface 1, LC/PC connector

Optical interface

OUT1 Supervision signal 10BASE-FL or 100BASE-FX output interface 1, LC/PC connector


2. Optical interface status indicator


4. Ethernet electrical interface status indicator

5. Ethernet electrical interface

6. Laser alarm sign

7. Laser class sign

Chapter 3 Boards


Board Item

OSCF

IN2 Supervision signal 10BASE-FL or 100BASE-FX input interface 2, LC/PC connector

OUT2 Supervision signal 10BASE-FL or 100BASE-FX output interface 2, LC/PC connector

Ethernet electrical interface

1~6 10/100BASE-T interface with automatic crossover function, RJ45 socket. They are connected to NCPF, APSF, OHPF, slave OSCF board, standby route or EMS computer.



DIP switch S2

Located at the PCB of OSCF board Switch DIP2 to “ON” position to enter mandatory IP address

status. The IP address of OSCF board is 192.192.192.11 Switch DIP1 and DIP8 to “ON” position to enter Probe &

debugging status. Switch all pins to non-ON position to enter normal running

status.


Slots for OSCF board

For two or less optical directions, insert an OSCF board in slot 7 of OA subrack

For three or more optical directions, insert the master OSCF board into slot 7 of OA subrack and other OSCF boards into any other spare slots of OA subrack.




Table 143 describes the running status of the board and corresponding indicators’ status.

T AB L E 143 C O R R E S P O N D E N C E R E L AT I O N S B E T W E E N T H E W O R K I N G S T AT U S AN D T H E I N D I C AT O R S T AT U S O F OSCF B O AR D



Working Status

The board is waiting for configuration. The red indicator and the green indicator flash alternately.


It flashes slowly and regularly. Off


It flashes slowly and regularly. On

Board initialization On It flashes





slowly and regularly.

The board is waiting for program downloading.

The red indicator and the green indicator flash quickly at the same time.

The board is in the program downloading status.

The red indicator and the green indicator flash slowly and regularly at the same time.

Debugging Status

The board is running the Boot program in the mandatory IP status. (the DIP2 pin of the DIP switch S2 is set to “ON”)

Off On

Probe & debugging status ( the DIP1 and DIP8 of the DIP switch S2 are set to “ON”) On Off

Note:

Both the DIP switch S2 and the Ethernet electrical interface for debugging are located on the PCB of the OSCF board.

When the board is in the debugging status, the STA indicator light and Ethernet electrical interface indicator lights of the OSCF board are all blacked out.

Table 144 describes the working status of optical/electrical interfaces of the OSCF board and corresponding indictors’ status.

T AB L E 144 C O R R E S P O N D E N C E R E L AT I O N S B E T W E E N T H E W O R K I N G S T AT U S AN D T H E I N D I C AT O R S T AT U S O F T H E OP T I C AL /E L E C T R I C AL I N T E R F AC E S O N OSCF B O AR D

Indicator Status

Working Status STA (Bi-color)

Ethernet Electrical Interface Indicator (Yellow)

Ethernet Electrical Interface Indicator (Green)

The optical interface 1 is connected while the optical interface 2 is unconnected.

Glowing in green. - -

The optical interface 1 is sending and receiving data packets; while the optical interface 2 is unconnected.

Flashing in green. - -

The optical interface 2 is connected while the optical interface 1 is unconnected.

Glowing in red. - -

The optical interface 2 is sending and receiving data packets; while the optical interface 1 is unconnected.

Flashing in red. - -

Both the optical interface 1 and 2 are connected. Glowing in orange. - -

Chapter 3 Boards


Both the optical interface 1 and 2 are sending and receiving data packets.

Flashing in orange. - -

Both the optical interface 1 and 2 are unconnected. - On -

The Ethernet electrical interface is connected. - Off -

The Ethernet electrical interface is unconnected. - On Flashing


Configuration of OSCF Board Optical Connections When the transmission distance is short and span loss is less than 28 dB,

use 100BASE-FX optical interfaces of OSCF board to transfer supervision information. In this case, the optical connection of OSCF board is same as that of OSCL board. Please refer to the section “Optical Connections of OSC Board”.

When the transmission distance is short and span loss is between 28 dB and 42 dB, use 10BASE-FL optical interfaces to transfer supervision information. In this case, the optical connection of OSCF board is same as that of OSCL board. Please refer to the section “Optical Connections of OSC Board”.

When the transmission distance is long and span loss is more than 42 dB, use 100BASE-FX optical interfaces of OSCF board and OTU boards together to transfer supervision information. In this case, an operating wavelength in the DWDM system will be occupied.

Taking unidirectional supervision channel as example, Figure 153 illustrates optical connection relations of OSCF boards.

F I G U R E 153 OP T I C AL C O N N E C T I O N B E T W E E N OSCF B O AR D AN D OTU B O AR D

OSCF OTU

OMU

Long-distance transmission

OTU

OTU

ODU

OTU

OTU

OTU

OSCF

EOBAEOP

A

IN1/OUT1 interfaces or IN2/OUT2 interfaces of OSCF board are connected to client-side interfaces of OTU boards.



Note: OTU boards connected to OSCF board must be those supporting continuous-rate traffic.

Network Cable Connections Since the Ethernet electrical interfaces of OSCF board have automatic crossover function, OSCF board can be connected to other boards (NCPF, APSF, OHPF or slave OSCF board), standby router and EMS computer in 100 M supervision systems with crossover network cable or straight network cable.

Performance and Alarm Messages The performance and alarm messages of OSCF board are listed in Table 145.

T AB L E 145 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F OSCF B O AR D


Input optical power Only for 10BASE-FL optical interfaces

15-min received massage -

15-min sent data message -

15-min lost data message -

OSC sink port (optical input interface)

15-min CRC error packet -

Laser bias current - OSC source port (optical output interface) Output optical power Only for 10BASE-FL optical

interfaces

15-min received massage -

15-min sent data message -

15-min lost data message -

Performance

Network port (electrical interface 1-6)

15-min CRC error packet -

LOS alarm -

Low input optical power Only for 10BASE-FL optical interfaces. Default alarm threshold is -40 dBm.

No input optical power Only for 10BASE-FL optical interfaces

15-min CRC error packet over-threshold alarm

-

Alarm

OSC sink port

15-min message loss over-threshold alarm

-

Chapter 3 Boards



Laser bias current over-threshold alarm

-

OSC source port

Laser failure alarm Only for 10BASE-FL optical interfaces. Default alarm threshold is -10 dBm.

15-min CRC error packet over-threshold alarm

-

Network port 15-min message loss over-threshold alarm

-

Laser shut-down - OSC source port

Laser start up -

Over-long packet over-threshold event

Event OSC sink port and network port Over-short packet

over-threshold event

Over 10 over-long/short packets in 15 minutes

OHPF Board Operating Principle OHPF board processes orderwire data and transparent user channel data between sites in 100 M supervision systems. The operating principle of OHPF board is illustrated in Figure 154.

F I G U R E 154 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F OHPF B O AR D


Voiceprocessing

Time divisionswitching

Conference telephoneprocessing

CODEC SLIC

PCM

2 audiointerfaces

10M/100MEthernet interface

RS232interface

RS422interface

PCM clock



Orderwire overhead information processing

OHPF board uses VoIP technology to process voice and voice-related signalings. It sends voice in IP packets to OSCF board, which will forward it to the destination NE. As shown in Figure 154, the voice processing unit, time division switching unit, conference telephone processing unit, codec, SLIC and PCM clock unit work together to implement the task.

OHPF board has the following functions related to orderwire data processing:

Supporting three calling modes: selection call, group call and broadcast call;

Being capable of communication crossing optical multiplex sections;

Supporting orderwire interconnection in multiple directions (no less than four directions);

Providing interfaces (audio interfaces) for main phone set and subsidiary phone set, which are located on the interface area of OA subrack. Both phone sets have same functions and can be used within the range of 200 m

Transparent user channel information processing

OHPF board provides two transparent user channel interfaces (RS232 interface and RS422 interface), which can receive and send data simultaneously.

Control and communication information processing

OHPF board communicates with OSCF board through Ethernet interfaces shown in Figure 154. The control and communication unit receives supervision information from other modules and report it to the EMS. It also receives control commands from the EMS.

Front Panel: Interface and Indicators The front panel of OHPF board is shown in Figure 155.

Chapter 3 Boards


F I G U R E 155 FR O N T P AN E L O F OHPF B O AR D

T AB L E 146 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F OHPF B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N S

Board Item

OHPF

Board ID OHPF


Interface NET 10/100BASE-T interface, RJ45 socket Connect it to Ethernet electrical interface of OSCF board

Reset button RST Reset OHPF board


Slots for OHPF board Slot 6 in OA subrack



3. Reset button



Note: The relations between the status of OHPF board and corresponding status of indicators are same as those of the OTU board. Please refer to Table 31 for the detailed description.

Performance and Alarm Messages OHPF board has no performance and alarm messages but an event message, as listed in Table 147.

T AB L E 147 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F OHPF B O AR D

Type Item

Performance -

Alarm -

Event Establishment of orderwire communication link establishment fails

APSF Board APSF board implements APS information management and switching control function in 2 M or 100 M supervision systems to ensure that APS data processing speed meet the requirement for APS switching time. It has the following functions:

Managing APS information of multiple racks. Each APSF board can transfer APS information between four racks. In a 100 M supervision system, additional APSF boards are needed for more than four racks. Add a HUB between OSCF board and APSF board to enable the communication between them.

Forwarding clock information to help CA board to access external clock and distribute clock unifiedly.

Providing automatic power reduction (APR) function.

Collecting and processing internal APS information of an NE, and forwarding APS information to other NEs through OSCF board. It acts as an APS protocol controller in 100 M supervision system.

Chapter 3 Boards


Operating Principle The operating principle of APSF board is illustrated in Figure 156.

F I G U R E 156 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F APSF B O AR D

APS informationcollecting


APS informationprocessing

To APSF board ofother NES

From other boards

To protection board

Ethernetinterface

RS232 interface

OSCF

When the main optical channel in a system fails, APSF board collects APS information sent from each board. The APS information processing unit analyzes and processes the APS information and then forwards it to the APSF board of corresponding NE. It also informs the protection board to perform switching in specified time.

The control and communication unit communicates with NCPF board through S interface. It provides an RS232 interface for debugging board.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of APSF board is shown in Figure 157.



F I G U R E 157 FR O N T P AN E L O F APSF B O A R D

T AB L E 148 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F APSF B O A R D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N S

BoardItem

APSF

Board ID APSF



STA Switching status indicator, bi-color (green and red)

NET 10/100BASE-T interface, RJ45 socket Connect to Ethernet electrical interface of OSCF board

Interface

RS232 DB9 socket (female) Output debugging information of board

Reset button RST Reset APSF board


Slots for APSF board Slot 9 in OA subrack



3. RS232 interface

4. Reset button

Chapter 3 Boards


Table 149 describes the working status of the board and corresponding indicator status.

T AB L E 149 C O R R E S P O N D E N C E R E L AT I O N S B E T W E E N T H E W O R K I N G S T AT U S AN D T H E I N D I C AT O R S T AT U S O F APSF B O AR D

Indicator Status Working Status NOM

(Green) ALM (Red) STA (Bi-color)





Board initialization On Flashing slowly and regularly

-

The board is waiting for program downloading.

The red indicator and the green indicator flashes quickly at the same time.

-

The board is in the program downloading status.

The red indicator and the green indicator flashes slowly and regularly at the same time.

-

No protection group has been configured. - - Off

No switching - - Off

A-direction switching - - Glowing in red

B-direction switching - - Glowing in

green

The protection mode of the first protection group is the channel ring shared protection or the MS ring shared protection Straight through - - Glowing in

orange

No switching - - Off

Adding switching - - Glowing in red

Dropping switching - - Glowing in

green

The protection mode of the first protection group is the 1:N channel protection Adding/Dropping

switching - - Glowing in orange


Performance and Alarm Messages APSF board has no performance and alarm message.



PBX Board PBX (Power Box) board provides the following two functions:

Processing active and standby power supply provided by the power distribution subrack and powering boards in the subrack where it is located;

Monitoring input/output voltage of the subrack and reporting under-voltage/over-voltage alarms to the EMS.

Operating Principle The operating principle of PBX board is illustrated in Figure 158.

F I G U R E 158 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F PBX B O AR D

Voltageseparationdetection

Reverseconnectionprotection

Softstart

Balance

Reverseconnectionprotection

Softstart Balance

Voltageseparationdetection

Power alarm

Power alarm

Powersupply forsubrack

Standby DC

Active DC

PBX board 2

PBX board 1

Subrack power supply

The active and standby DC power supplies are input to the PBX boards through air switches on the power distribution subrack and power sockets in interface areas of OA/OTU/TMUX subrack. The active power supply is input to PBX1 board in the upper slot of interface area while the standby power supply is input to PBX2 board in the lower slot in interface area.

After the processing of reverse connection protection, soft start and balance output, the power is supplied to other boards in slots of the subrack through power sockets on the backplane.

Alarm report

Chapter 3 Boards


The voltage separation detection unit monitors input/output voltage and sends the monitoring signal to PWSB board through the power alarm interface in interface area of OA/OTU/TMUX subrack.

Front Panel and Rear Panel The front panel and rear panel of PBX board are shown in Figure 159.

F I G U R E 159 FR O N T P AN E L AN D R E A R P A N E L O F PBX B O AR D

T AB L E 150 PAN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F PBX B O AR D AN D R E L AT E D B A S I C OP E R AT I O N S

Board PBX

NOM Running indicator, green When the board runs normally, it glows in green

OV Over-voltage alarm indicator, red When an over-voltage alarm is detected, the OV indicator will be lit.

Indicator

UV Under-voltage alarm indicator, red When an under-voltage alarm is detected, the UV indicator will be lit.

Power socket It is located on the rear panel of PBX board. The socket is secured with three screws. The left and right short screws are for -48 V, while the middle long screw is for the ground GND.

Signal interface It is located on the rear panel of PBX board, including address wires and output wire for power alarm signal

Slots for PBX board

PBX board is mounted in the PBX plug-in box on subrack. Each subrack has two PBX plug-in boxes, as shown in Figure 11 and Figure 18.

1. Indicators

2. Power socket

3. Signal interface



Performance and Alarm Messages The performance and alarm messages of PBX board are listed in Table 151.

T AB L E 151 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S AG E S

Type Item

Input voltage monitoring Performance

Output voltage monitoring

Alarm -

Event -

PWSB Board PWSB (Power Supervision) board provides the following functions:

Automatically detecting the over-voltage and under-voltage status of output voltage of the subrack where it is located;

Detecting voltage alarms of subracks and in-position status of PBX boards;

Outputting audible and visual alarms and reporting them to the EMS;

Sending equipment alarms to the first cabinet of row in equipment room.

The relation between PWSB board and power distribution subrack is illustrated in Figure 160.

Chapter 3 Boards


F I G U R E 160 RE L AT I O N S B E T W E E N PWSB B O AR D AN D P O W E R D I S T R I B U T I O N S U B R AC K

Lighteningprotection and

filter

Lighteningprotection and

filter

Air switchDC1-1

DC1-6

DC2-1

DC2-6

…

…

DC1

DC2

-48V

LED board NCP/NCPF

WARN

ALM_IN

External alarm input

ALM_OUT

Firstcabinet ofrow

Power Distribution Subrack

Subrack data interfaceBUS

…

…

LED

Power alarm inputfrom subracksSP_ALM 1-4

PWSB

Operating Principle The operating principle of PWSB board is illustrated in Figure 161.

F I G U R E 161 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F PWSB B O AR D


-48V 1 -48V 2

Power supply processing/detecting unit

Indicatorson panel

Subrack poweralarm input

Externalalarm input

Total poweralarm

First cabinet in row

AlarmLED NCP/NCPF

FAN busInputequipmentalarm

Outputequipmentalarm

DIP switch forcabinet No.



PWSB board consists of the control and communication unit, power supply processing/detecting unit and panel indicators.

Power supply processing/detecting unit

Two groups of -48 V power supply provided by power distribution subrack are input to the PWSB board through it. Each of the accessed two groups of power supply can act as either the active or standby one for the purpose of protection.

After the voltage separation detection, the input power supply and total power alarm are sent to the control and communication unit.

The power supply processing/detecting unit also provides the reverse connection protection and output balance functions.

Panel indicators

The indicators on panel of PWSB board are controlled by the control and communication unit, indicating alarm status of two groups of power supply.


It receives and processes power alarms of each subrack, 10 external input alarms and equipment alarms from NCP/NCPF board. The control and communication unit also controls the LED board and alarm output of the first cabinet of row.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators PWSB board is installed in the monitoring plug-in box of 1U height (as shown in Figure 26), which is located below the power distribution subrack (as shown in Figure 24).

The front panel of PWSB board is shown in Figure 162.

F I G U R E 162 FR O N T P AN E L O F PWSB B O A R D

1. Indicators (Nom, Alm, M_OV, M_UV, S_OV, S_UV)

The relations between running status of PWSB board and status of indicators are described in Table 152.

Chapter 3 Boards


T AB L E 152 C O R R E S P O N D I N G R E L AT I O N S B E T W E E N R U N N I N G S T AT U S AN D I N D I C AT O R S T AT U S O F PWSB B O AR D

Indicators Working Status

NOM (green) ALM (red)

M_OV (red)

M_UV (red)

S_OV (red)

S_UV (red)


Flashing slowly and regularly Off - - - -


Flashing slowly and regularly On - - - -

Master power supply over-voltage alarm occurs.

Flashing slowly and regularly - On - - -

Master power supply under-voltage alarm occurs.

Flashing slowly and regularly - - On - -

Slave power supply over-voltage alarm occurs.

Flashing slowly and regularly - - - On -

Slave power supply under-voltage alarm occurs.

Flashing slowly and regularly - - - - On

2. DIP switch for cabinet No. selection

The 4-pin DIP switch is used to define the number of cabinet where PWSB board is located. It has no silkscreen ID on the front panel. Figure 163 illustrates the DIP switch. If the pin is set to “ON” position, it means the corresponding selection digit is “0”. The definitions of cabinet No. are listed in Table 153.

F I G U R E 163 DIP S W I T C H O N PWSB B O AR D

ON

1 2 3 4

DIP

T AB L E 153 D E S C R I P T I O N O F C AB I N E T N O .

1 2 3 4 DIP

Cabinet No. Selection Digit 3

Selection Digit 2

Selection Digit 1

Selection Digit 0

Cabinet 0 (master) 0 0 0 0

Cabinet 1 (extended) 0 0 0 1





3. -48_In1/-48_In2

The master/slave power supply input interfaces are used to connect the master/slave -48 V power supply from the power distribution subrack. They are type-D 3-pin DC power supply sockets, as shown in Figure 13. The definitions of pins are described in Table 154.

T AB L E 154 D E F I N I T I O N S O F P I N S I N -48_IN 1 / -48_ I N2 PO W E R S O C K E T

Pin Signal Function Signal Attribute

A1 -48V GND -48 V ground Power supply

A2 PGND Protection ground Protection ground

A3 -48V -48 V Power supply

- Screws beside socket Protection ground Protection ground

4. Alm_In

It is a DB25 socket used as an external alarm input interface. Alarms from external monitoring equipment are input to PWSB board through this interface and displayed in the EMS. The input alarm signals are isolated with optical couplers or relays. Table 155 lists the definitions of pins of Alm_In socket.

T AB L E 155 D E F I N I T I O N S O F P I N S I N AL M _ I N S O C K E T

Pin No. Signal Name Function Signal Attribute

1 ALMIN1_C1 External alarm input 1 + Optical coupler/relay isolated

14 ALMINCOM_C0 External alarm input 1 - Optical coupler/relay isolated

















Chapter 3 Boards


Pin No. Signal Name Function Signal Attribute



5. Alm_Out

The alarm output interface is a DB15 socket (male), as shown in Figure 164. It is connected to the first cabinet of its row or other monitoring unit out of the cabinet. Table 156 describes the definitions of pins in the Alm_Out socket.

F I G U R E 164 DB15 S O C K E T (M AL E )

81

9 15

T AB L E 156 D E F I N I T I O N S O F P I N S I N AL M _OU T S O C K E T

Pin No. Signal Name Function Description Signal Attribute

1 BUZZ_OUT+ Buzzer signal + On-off signal

9 BUZZ_OUT- Buzzer signal - On-off signal

2 S_ALARM+ Critical alarm signal + On-off signal

10 S_ALARM- Critical alarm signal - On-off signal

3 G_ALARM+ Major alarm signal + On-off signal

11 G_ALARM- Major alarm signal - On-off signal

4 ALM_SET+ Alarm setting signal + On-off signal

12 ALM_SET- Alarm setting signal - On-off signal

6 BGND -48 V ground -48 V ground

13 BGND -48 V ground -48 V ground

8 M_-48V -48 V output -48 V

15 M_-48V -48 V output -48 V

Note:

The signals (relay isolated) are sent from PWSB board to the first cabinet of its row.

It depends on the connection of the alarm setting signals (ALM_SET+ and ALM_SET-) whether alarm signals are valid when they are connected or disconnected.

If the ALM_SET+ and the ALM_SET- are disconnected, alarm signals are valid when the alarm signals are connected. It is determined before making cables on site.



6. Warn

The internal alarm interface is a DB9 socket (female). It is connected to J3 interface of OA subrack. Signals, which are optical coupler isolated, are sent from NCP board.

The DB9 socket is shown in Figure 15. The definitions of pins in Warn socket are described in Table 157.

T AB L E 157 D E F I N I T I O N S O F P I N S I N W AR N S O C K E T

Pin No. Signal Name Function Signal Attribute From/to

1 RING_C1 Ring control signal + Optical coupler isolated

6 RING_C0 Ring control signal - Optical coupler isolated

2 YELLOW_C1 Warning signal Optical coupler isolated

7 YELLOW_C0 Warning signal Optical coupler isolated

3 RED_C1 Critical alarm signal Optical coupler isolated

8 RED_C0 Critical alarm signal Optical coupler isolated

From NCP to PWSB

4 ALM_PWR_1+ Power alarm + Optical coupler isolated

9 ALM_PWR_1- Power alarm - Optical coupler isolated

From PWSB to NCP

Note: The above table lists four pairs of on-off signal isolated by optical coupler or relay.

7. Led

The alarm LED interface is a DB9 socket (female). The alarms are output to the LED board on the cabinet door through this interface.

8. Sp_Alm1-Sp_Alm4

For subrack power supply alarm sockets are available on PWSB board. They are DB9 sockets (female), which can be connected to J12 interface of OA subrack, J4 interface of OTU subrack or J12 interface of TMUX subrack. The definitions of pins are described in Table 158.

T AB L E 158 D E F I N I T I O N S O F P I N S I N S P_AL M S O C K E T

Pin No. Signal Definition Descriptions

1 Vinu1 Under-voltage alarm of subrack input power supply 1

6 Vino1 Over-voltage alarm of subrack input power supply 1

2 ONLINE1 Subrack PBX1 board in-position signal

7 Voutu Under-voltage alarm of subrack output power supply

3 ALMCOM Common alarm terminal

8 Vouto Over-voltage alarm of subrack output power supply

4 ONLINE2 Subrack PBX2 board in-position signal

9 Vino2 Over-voltage alarm of subrack input power supply 2

Chapter 3 Boards


Pin No. Signal Definition Descriptions

5 Vinu2 Under-voltage alarm of subrack input power supply 2

9. Bus

The local data interface is a type-D 36-pin in-line PCB soldered socket (female). It is the end interface of data bus of cabinet.

Performance and Alarm Messages The performance and alarm messages of PWSB board are listed in Table 159.

T AB L E 159 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F PWSB B O AR D


Performance - - -

Subrack master power supply input under-voltage alarm -

Subrack master power supply input over-voltage alarm -

Subrack slave power supply input under-voltage alarm -

Subrack slave power supply input over-voltage alarm -

Board port

External alarm 1-10

External alarm types are specified in the EMS

Subrack master power supply input under-voltage alarm -

Subrack master power supply input over-voltage alarm -

Subrack master PBX board dismount alarm -

Subrack slave power supply input under-voltage alarm -

Subrack slave power supply input over-voltage alarm -

Subrack slave PBX board dismount alarm -

Subrack power supply output under-voltage alarm -

Alarm

4 subrack ports

Subrack power supply output over-voltage alarm -




Subrack power supply monitoring failure alarm -

Subrack power supply power down alarm -

Event - - -

FCB Board The FCB board provides the following functions.

The FCB board monitors the running status of fans and temperature of the fan plug-in box, and then report the rotate speed and temperature to NCP/NCPF board.

EMS queries the working status of fans and temperature of the fan plug-in box, and adjusts the rotate speed of fans automatically via NCP/NCPF and FCB boards

If EMS disables the automatical speed adjustment function, or FCB board fails to communicate with the EMS, the FCB board will adjust rotate speed of fans if the temperature reported by its built-in temperature sensors is out of range, so as to lower the temperature.

When the FCB board fails, it can not control fans anymore. The fans will be forced to run at full speed.

Front Panel The structure of FCB board is illustrated in

Figure 34, while Table 160 describes its front panel and related information for basic operations.

T AB L E 160 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F O AD B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N

Board Item

FCB

NOM Running indicator (green) located on the front panel of independent fan unit It flashes slowly and regularly when the FCB board runs normally.

Indicator

ALM

Alarm indicator (red) located on the front panel of independent fan unit The ALM indicator glows in red and the NOM indicator flashes slowly and regularly when the fan unit reports alarm.

Power socket Provides - 48 V power for independent fan unit

Signal interface Carries fan bus from NCP board to FCB board

Chapter 3 Boards


Board Item

FCB

Position The FCB board is installed in independent fan unit, as shown in Figure 22.


When the FCB board fails, the fans will be forced to rotate at full speed.

Performance and Alarm Messages The performance and alarm messages of the FCB board are listed in Table 161.

T AB L E 161 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F FCB B O AR D

Type Item

Fan rotate speed Performance

FCB temperature

Alarm Fan failure

Event -

Clock Board


CA Clock Assignment

CSU Cross-switch and Synchronous-clock Unit TMUX subrack

CA Board CA (Clock Assignment) board acts as SDH equipment clock in TMUX subrack, complying with ITU-T G.781 Recommendation. It has the following main functions:

For input clocks of different level, the CA board monitors their quality and sorts them based on their priority. Then it selects an optimal clock as the reference clock source. The CA board supports two kinds of input clock, line clock and external clock.



Line clock: provided by convergence boards installed in TMUX subrack. The CA board supports 12 line clocks at most.

External clock: provided by external BITS equipment. The CA board supports two 2 MHz and two 2 Mbit/s clocks.

The CA board generates clocks complying with ITU-T G.813 Recommendation and assigns them to other boards as reference line clock or external clock. The line clock is sent to convergence boards installed in TMUX subrack. And the CA board provides two 2 MHz and two 2 Mbit/s external clocks.

Operating Principle The operating principle of CA board is illustrated in Figure 165.

F I G U R E 165 OP E R AT I N G P R I N C I P L E O F CA B O AR D

Clockselection unit

External clockprocessing unit

SEC clockprocessing unit

Clockassignment

unit

External clockprocessing unit

G.813

External clockinput

Line extractedclock

Interfaceboard clock

Externalclock output


Active/standbystatus control unit

Clock sent betweenactive and standby

CA board

The operating principles of clock input/output and active/standby switching of CA board are described below.

Clock input/output

The CA board receives clocks at different levels from convergence boards or external interfaces, and then forwards them to the clock selection unit or external clock processing unit for filtering. The filtered clocks are sent to the SEC clock processing unit, which selects the optimal clock and generates output clock complying with ITU-T G.813. Then the clock assignment unit distributes the generated clock to other boards as the reference clock, or sends it to the external clock processing unit, which outputs standard external clocks.

The Synchronization Status Message (SSM) of clock is sent to other service boards in the subrack through the data bus on TMUX subrack backplane.

Active/standby CA board switching

Two CA boards can be installed in a TMUX subrack to implement the hot backup. In normal running status, only one of them acts as the active

Chapter 3 Boards


board. The standby board is locked with the output clock of the active one so as to ensure the synchronization of output clock of active and standby CA boards.

Both the EMS and the board itself can control the switching between active CA board and standby CA board. The EMS sends switching command to the board through the control and communication unit. In another way, when the active CA board is power down or its clock output fails, the active/standby status control unit of the board enables the switching automatically to ensure the reliability and correctness of system clock.

Front Panel: Interfaces and Indicators The front panel of CA board is shown in Figure 166.

F I G U R E 166 FR O N T P AN E L O F CA B O AR D

T AB L E 162 FR O N T P AN E L D E S C R I P T I O N S O F C A B O AR D AN D R E L A T E D B AS I C OP E R A T I O N S

Board Item

CA

Board ID CA


2. Active/standby CA board indicator

3. Clock status indicator



Board Item

CA



M/S Active/standby CA board indicator, green

CKS1

Indicator

CKS2

Clock status indicator, green They indicate current clock running status of the system through different combination of indicator status.


Slots for CA board Slot 7 or slot 8 in TMUX subrack The CA board in slot 7 is the active board while that in slot 8 is the standby board by default.

The correspondence between CA board indicator and the board’s running status is shown in Table 163.

T AB L E 163 C O R R E S P O N D E N C E R E L AT I O N S B E T W E E N T H E W O R K I N G S T AT U S AN D I N D I C AT O R S T AT U S O F C A B O AR D



M/S (Green)

CKS1 (Green)

CKS2 (Green)

The Bootrom program is downloaded. Off Off - - -


The red indicator and the green indicator flash alternately.

- - -


Flashing slowly and regularly Off - - -


Flashing slowly and regularly On - - -

Board initialization On


- - -

Board is waiting for download

The red indicator and the green indicator flash quickly at the same time.

- - -

Board in downloading status

The red indicator and the green indicator flash slowly at the same time.

- - -

The board is configured as the active CA board - - On - -

The board is configured as the standby CA board. - - Off - -

Chapter 3 Boards




M/S (Green)

CKS1 (Green)

CKS2 (Green)

The CA board runs in the clock lock mode (normal tracing).

- - - On On

The CA board runs in the clock holdover mode. - - - On Off

The CA board runs in the fast pull-in mode. - - - Off On

The CA board runs in the clock free run mode. - - - Off Off



Performance and Alarm Messages The performance and alarm messages of CA board are listed in Table 164.

T AB L E 164 P E R F O R M AN C E A N D AL A R M M E S S A G E S O F CA B O AR D

Type Item

Performance -

Alarm Loss of clock alarm

CA board switching

Clock source automatic switching

Clock source manual switching Event

Clock source forcible switching

CSU Board Functions CSU (Cross-switch and Synchronous-clock Unit) board acts as a clock and signal cross-connect processing unit. Generally, two CSU boards are mounted together in the TMUX subrack for use.

CSU board provides the following functions.

Cross-connection function

CSU board receives the backplane service signals from various service boards installed in the same TMUX subrack, such as DSAE and SMU, cross-connects these signals and sends them to corresponding service boards.

The cross-connection capacity is 48×48 2.5 Gbit/s backplane signals.

Clock function

CSU board selects the optimal clock as the system clock from the input clocks at different levels according to certain algorithm. The input clock may be line clock, external clock or clock from the other CSU board in the TMUX board.

Line clock: comes from various service boards in the TMUX subrack. Each service board provides one clock. Up to 12 channels of clocks are available.

External clock: Provided by external BITS equipment. Two channels of 2 MHz and two channels of 2 Mbit/s clock signals are supported.

Clock from the other CSU board: The other CSU board can output one channel of clock signal according to certain algorithm.

Chapter 3 Boards


In addition, CSU board can convert the system clock into various clock signals and assign them to other service boards in the TMUX subrack as reference clock. These clock signals can also be output as external clocks or provided to the other CSU board.

Line clock: It is output to all the other service boards in the TMUX subrack. For each service board, one channel of clock signal is provided. Up to 12 channels of output clock signals are available.

External clock: Two channels of 2 MHz and 2 channels of 2 Mbit/s clock signals are output.

Clock output to the other CSU board: One channel of clock signal is output to the other CSU board.

CSU board receives APS commands sent by APSF board to implement the protection switching at electronic layer.

Operating Principle The operating principle of CSU board is illustrated in Figure 167.

FIGURE 167 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF CSU BOARD

Cross-connectunit

Control &communication unit

Clockprocessing

unit

……

……

Master/slaveswitching control

unit

Line clock

External clock

Clock from the other CSU board

Line clock

Clock to the other CSU board

External clock

48 channels of 2.5 Gbit/sbackplane signals

48 channels of 2.5 Gbit/sbackplane signals

CSU board consists of a cross-connect unit, a clock processing unit, a master/slave switching control unit and a control & communication unit, as described one by one below.

Cross-connect unit

This unit receives 48 channels of 2.5 Gbit/s backplane traffic signals from 12 service boards in the TMUX subrack, i.e. each service board provides 4 channels of 2.5 Gbit/s backplane traffic signals, cross-connects these signals and sends the processed signals to corresponding service boards.



Clock processing unit

This unit processes input clocks of various levels and then selects the optimal clock as the system clock from them according to certain algorithm. The input clocks may be line clocks extracted from service boards, external clock input from the external clock interface or the clock from the other CSU board.

On the other hand, this unit can also converts the system clock into clock signals in various format and then assigns them to service boards in the TMUX subrack as reference clock, outputs them as external clock, or provides to the other CSU board.

Master/slave switching control unit

Two CSU board can be mounted in the TMUX subrack for the purpose of hot backup. In normal situation, only one of them acts as the master board. The slave CSU board works in the locked mode so as to guarantee the consistence between the output clock phases of the master CSU board and the slave one.

Note: The “master/slave” concept only directs to the clock function of CSU board. The cross-connect units of both CSU boards work at the same time. Therefore, for service boards, the cross-connect unit is not classfied into master one or slave one.

The switching between master CSU board and slave CSU board can be controlled by the EMS or the board itself. The EMS issues the switching command to the board through the control & communication unit.

The switching of CSU board is non-revertive. The prerequisite of successful switching is that the slave CSU board is working normally. When the master CSU board fails or it receives a switching command, the master/slave switching control unit will perform the switching automatically so as to ensure the reliability and validity of system clock.

APS switching control unit

TMUX subrack implements the function of protection switching at electronic layer. CSU board performs the commands sent by APS. APS control unit sends APS commands to both the master and slave CSU boards of TMUX subsystem, in order to realize the protection switching function.

Control & communication unit

This unit monitors the power supply of the board and implements the supervision of board and the EMS.

Chapter 3 Boards


Front Panel The front panel of CSU board is shown in Figure 168.

FIGURE 168 FRONT PANEL OF CSU BOARD

Table 165 describes the front panel and related information for basic operations of the CSU board.

TABLE 165 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTIONS OF CSU BOARD AND RELATED OPERATION INFORMATION

Board

Item CSU

Board ID CSU



M/S Master/slave board indicator, green

CKS1

Indicator

CKS2

Clock status indicator, green

Indicates the current clock status of the system by different status combination of two indicators.


2. Master/slave CSU board indicator

3. Clock status indicators



Board

Item CSU


1

Slots for board Slot 7 and 8 in TMUX subrack

Slot 7 is used for master CSU board while slot 8 is used for slave CSU board by default.

Table 166 describes the relationship between the working status of CSU board and the status of indicators.

TABLE 166 RELATIONS BETWEEN THE WORKING STATUS AND INDICATOR STATUS OF CSU BOARD

Indicator Status Working Status NOM

(Green)

ALM

(Red)

M/S

(Green)

CKS1

(Green)

CKS2

(Green)

Downloading BootROM program

OFF OFF - - -


The green indicator and the red indicator flash slowly alternately.

- - -

Running normally


OFF - - -


ON - - -


- - -

Waiting for download

The green indicator and the red indicator flash quickly at the same time.

- - -

Downloading status

The green indicator and the red indicator flash slowly at the same time.

- - -

Master CSU board

- - ON - -

Slave CSU board

- - OFF - -

Locked (tracing normally)

- - - ON ON

Hold-in - - - ON OFF

Fast pull-in - - - OFF ON

Free oscillation - - - OFF OFF

Chapter 3 Boards


Note: The symbol “-” indicates indefinite status.

Performance and Alarm Messages The performance, alarm and event messages of CSU board are listed in Table 167.

TABLE 167 PERFORMANCE, ALARM AND EVENT MESSAGES OF CSU BOARD

Type Item

Performance Board environment temperature

Environment temperature alarm Alarm

Loss of clock alarm

MCU reset

EEPROM data error

CSU board switching

Clock source automatic switching

Clock source manual switching

Event

Clock source forced switching




A p p e n d i x A

Optical Connections of ZXWM M900

This appendix introduces the optical fiber connections between boards in the ZXWM M900 through examples of 40/48/80/96/160/176-channel systems.

8/16/32/40/48-Channel System The optical cable connections of 8, 16, 32, 40 and 48 channel systems are similar. Figure 169 illustrates the application of ZXWM M900 in a network and the optical fiber connection.

F I G U R E 169 AP P L I C AT I O N O F ZXWM M900 (N O M O R E T H AN 48-C H AN N E L S Y S T E M )

OBA

OMU

OTU n-1

Sn-1

OTU 2

OTU n

S1 OTU 1

Sn

S2

OS

CT

OPA

RM1

RM2

RMn-1

RMn

OLA

OLA

OLA

OSCL

MPI-S

R'

MPI-R S'

? ? ? ? ?

OSCL

OADM

MPI-S

R'

OAD

OAD

OTMOTM

S'

MPI-ROBA O

MU

OTU 2

S2

OTU n-1

OTU 1

S1

OTU n

Sn

Sn-1

OS

CT

OPA

RM1

RM2

RMn-1

RMn

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

SDn

SD2

SD1

SDn-1

ODU

OTU 1

OTU 2

OTU n-1

OTU n

R1

R2

Rn-1

Rn

SDn

SD2

SD1

SDn-1

ODU

OTU 1

OTU 2

OTU n-1

OTU n

R1

R2

Rn-1

Rn

OTU

OTU

OTU

OTU

? ?

? ?

? ?

??

??

??

??

? ?

? ?

? ?



Operating wavelength range: C-band (191.3 THz-196.0 THz)

Channel spacing: 100 GHz

80/96-Channel System Figure 170 illustrates the optical fiber connection in an 80/96-channel system consisting of ZXWM M900.

F I G U R E 170 AP P L I C AT I O N O F ZXWM M900 (80 /96 -C H AN N E L S Y S T E M)

Operating wavelength range: C-band (191.30 THz-196.05 THz)


Note: In contrast to a 40-channel system, the 80-channel system adds OCI boards to combine wavelengths in C100_1 band and C100_2 band with the frequency spacing at 100 GHz into wavelengths in C50_1 band with the spacing at 50 GHz.

160/176-Channel System Figure 171 illustrates the optical fiber connection in a 160/176-channel system consisting of ZXWM M900.

Appendix A Optical Connections of ZXWM M900


F I G U R E 171 AP P L I C AT I O N O F ZXWM M900 (160 /176-CH AN N E L S Y S T E M )

OMU( C100_1)

OTU

.

.

OMU( C100_

2)

OTU

.

.

OMU( L100_

1)

OTU

.

.

OMU( L100_

2)

OTU

.

.

OCI( C50_1)

OCI( L50_1)

OBM( C/L)

EOBA

EOBA

OSC

OBM( C/L)

OBM( C/L)

OSC

EOPA EOBA

DCM VGSC

EOPA EOBA

DCM VGSC

OPM

OPM

100kmG.652

DRA

OBM( C/L)

OSC

EOPA EOBA

DCM VGSC

EOPA EOBA

DCM VGSC

OPM

OPM

100kmG.652

DRA

OCI( C50_1)

OCI( L50_1)

ODU( C100_1)

ODU( C100_

2)

ODU( L100_

1)

ODU( L100_

2)

OTU

.

.

OTU

.

.

OTU

.

.

OTU

.

.

OTM1 OLA OTM2

Operating wavelength range:

C-band (191.30 THz-196.05 THz)

L-band (186.95 THz-190.90 THz)


Note: In contrast to an 80/176-channel system, the 160/176-channel system adds additional OBM boards in OTM and OLA equipment.

The OBM board in OTM combines or separate signals in L band.

The OBM board in OLA multiplexes/demultiplexes signals in C+L band so as to amplify signals in different band separately.

Requirements on Operating Wavelength The operating wavelengths of ZXWM M900, which employs the specific central wavelengths in multi-channel systems as its operating wavelengths, comply with ITU-T G.692 strictly. All the line-side interfaces of optical transponder boards, the aggregate interfaces of convergence boards (SRM /GEM/DSA) and the channel interfaces of add/drop boards meet the wavelength requirements specified in this appendix.

Wavelength Allocation in 8/32/40-Channel Systems 8/32/40 Wavelength System Table 168 lists the wavelength allocation in a system consisting of ZXWM M900 with 40 wavelengths in C band. The spacing between wavelengths is 100 GHz.



T AB L E 168 WAV E L E N G T H AL L O C AT I O N (8 /32 /40 C H AN N E L , C B AN D )

S/N

Sub-band Name

Central Frequency (THz)

Central Wavelength (nm)

S/N

Sub-band Name



1 C100_1 192.1 1560.61 21 C100_1 194.1 1544.53

2 C100_1 192.2 1559.79 22 C100_1 194.2 1543.73

3 C100_1 192.3 1558.98 23 C100_1 194.3 1542.94

4 C100_1 192.4 1558.17 24 C100_1 194.4 1542.14

5 C100_1 192.5 1557.36 25 C100_1 194.5 1541.35

6 C100_1 192.6 1556.55 26 C100_1 194.6 1540.56

7 C100_1 192.7 1555.75 27 C100_1 194.7 1539.77

8 C100_1 192.8 1554.94 28 C100_1 194.8 1538.98

9 C100_1 192.9 1554.13 29 C100_1 194.9 1538.19

10 C100_1 193.0 1553.33 30 C100_1 195.0 1537.40

11 C100_1 193.1 1552.52 31 C100_1 195.1 1536.61

12 C100_1 193.2 1551.72 32 C100_1 195.2 1535.82

13 C100_1 193.3 1550.92 33 C100_1 195.3 1535.04

14 C100_1 193.4 1550.12 34 C100_1 195.4 1534.25

15 C100_1 193.5 1549.32 35 C100_1 195.5 1533.47

16 C100_1 193.6 1548.51 36 C100_1 195.6 1532.68

17 C100_1 193.7 1547.72 37 C100_1 195.7 1531.90

18 C100_1 193.8 1546.92 38 C100_1 195.8 1531.12

19 C100_1 193.9 1546.12 39 C100_1 195.9 1530.33

20 C100_1 194.0 1545.32 40 C100_1 196.0 1529.55

48/96 Wavelength System

T AB L E 169 WAV E L E N G T H AL L O C AT I O N (48 /96 C H AN N E L , C B AN D )

S/N Sub-band Name



S/N Sub-band Name



1 C100_2 196.05 1529.16 49 C100_2 193.65 1548.11

2 C100_1 196.00 1529.55 50 C100_1 193.60 1548.51

3 C100_2 195.95 1529.94 51 C100_2 193.55 1548.91

4 C100_1 195.90 1530.33 52 C100_1 193.50 1549.32

5 C100_2 195.85 1530.72 53 C100_2 193.45 1549.72

6 C100_1 195.80 1531.12 54 C100_1 193.40 1550.12

7 C100_2 195.75 1531.51 55 C100_2 193.35 1550.52



S/N Sub-band Name



S/N Sub-band Name



8 C100_1 195.70 1531.90 56 C100_1 193.30 1550.92

9 C100_2 195.65 1532.29 57 C100_2 193.25 1551.32

10 C100_1 195.60 1532.68 58 C100_1 193.20 1551.72

11 C100_2 195.55 1533.07 59 C100_2 193.15 1552.12

12 C100_1 195.50 1533.47 60 C100_1 193.10 1552.52

13 C100_2 195.45 1533.86 61 C100_2 193.05 1552.93

14 C100_1 195.40 1534.25 62 C100_1 193.00 1553.33

15 C100_2 195.35 1534.64 63 C100_2 192.95 1553.73

16 C100_1 195.30 1535.04 64 C100_1 192.90 1554.13

17 C100_2 195.25 1535.43 65 C100_2 192.85 1554.54

18 C100_1 195.20 1535.82 66 C100_1 192.80 1554.94

19 C100_2 195.15 1536.22 67 C100_2 192.75 1555.34

20 C100_1 195.10 1536.61 68 C100_1 192.70 1555.75

21 C100_2 195.05 1537.00 69 C100_2 192.65 1556.15

22 C100_1 195.00 1537.40 70 C100_1 192.60 1556.55

23 C100_2 194.95 1537.79 71 C100_2 192.55 1556.96

24 C100_1 194.90 1538.19 72 C100_1 192.50 1557.36

25 C100_2 194.85 1538.58 73 C100_2 192.45 1557.77

26 C100_1 194.80 1538.98 74 C100_1 192.40 1558.17

27 C100_2 194.75 1539.37 75 C100_2 192.35 1558.58

28 C100_1 194.70 1539.77 76 C100_1 192.30 1558.98

29 C100_2 194.65 1540.16 77 C100_2 192.25 1559.39

30 C100_1 194.60 1540.56 78 C100_1 192.20 1559.79

31 C100_2 194.55 1540.95 79 C100_2 192.15 1560.20

32 C100_1 194.50 1541.35 80 C100_1 192.10 1560.61

33 C100_2 194.45 1541.75 81 C100_2 192.05 1561.02

34 C100_1 194.40 1542.14 82 C100_1 192.00 1561.42

35 C100_2 194.35 1542.54 83 C100_2 191.95 1561.83

36 C100_1 194.30 1542.94 84 C100_1 191.90 1562.24

37 C100_2 194.25 1543.33 85 C100_2 191.85 1562.64

38 C100_1 194.20 1543.73 86 C100_1 191.80 1563.05

39 C100_2 194.15 1544.13 87 C100_2 191.75 1563.46

40 C100_1 194.10 1544.53 88 C100_1 191.70 1563.87

41 C100_2 194.05 1544.92 89 C100_2 191.65 1564.27

42 C100_1 194.00 1545.32 90 C100_1 191.60 1564.68

43 C100_2 193.95 1545.72 91 C100_2 191.55 1565.09

44 C100_1 193.90 1546.12 92 C100_1 191.50 1565.5

45 C100_2 193.85 1546.52 93 C100_2 191.45 1565.91

46 C100_1 193.80 1546.92 94 C100_1 191.40 1566.32



S/N Sub-band Name



S/N Sub-band Name



47 C100_2 193.75 1547.32 95 C100_2 191.35 1566.73

48 C100_1 193.70 1547.72 96 C100_1 191.30 1567.14

80/160 Wavelength System

T AB L E 170 WAV E L E N G T H AL L O C AT I O N (80 C H AN N E L , C B AN D )

S/N Sub-band Name



S/N Sub-band Name



1 C50_1 196.05 1529.16 41 C50_1 194.05 1544.92

2 C50_1 196.00 1529.55 42 C50_1 194.00 1545.32

3 C50_1 195.95 1529.94 43 C50_1 193.95 1545.72

4 C50_1 195.90 1530.33 44 C50_1 193.90 1546.12

5 C50_1 195.85 1530.72 45 C50_1 193.85 1546.52

6 C50_1 195.80 1531.12 46 C50_1 193.80 1546.92

7 C50_1 195.75 1531.51 47 C50_1 193.75 1547.32

8 C50_1 195.70 1531.90 48 C50_1 193.70 1547.72

9 C50_1 195.65 1532.29 49 C50_1 193.65 1548.11

10 C50_1 195.60 1532.68 50 C50_1 193.60 1548.51

11 C50_1 195.55 1533.07 51 C50_1 193.55 1548.91

12 C50_1 195.50 1533.47 52 C50_1 193.50 1549.32

13 C50_1 195.45 1533.86 53 C50_1 193.45 1549.72

14 C50_1 195.40 1534.25 54 C50_1 193.40 1550.12

15 C50_1 195.35 1534.64 55 C50_1 193.35 1550.52

16 C50_1 195.30 1535.04 56 C50_1 193.30 1550.92

17 C50_1 195.25 1535.43 57 C50_1 193.25 1551.32

18 C50_1 195.20 1535.82 58 C50_1 193.20 1551.72

19 C50_1 195.15 1536.22 59 C50_1 193.15 1552.12

20 C50_1 195.10 1536.61 60 C50_1 193.10 1552.52

21 C50_1 195.05 1537.00 61 C50_1 193.05 1552.93

22 C50_1 195.00 1537.40 62 C50_1 193.00 1553.33

23 C50_1 194.95 1537.79 63 C50_1 192.95 1553.73

24 C50_1 194.90 1538.19 64 C50_1 192.90 1554.13

25 C50_1 194.85 1538.58 65 C50_1 192.85 1554.54

26 C50_1 194.80 1538.98 66 C50_1 192.80 1554.94

27 C50_1 194.75 1539.37 67 C50_1 192.75 1555.34

28 C50_1 194.70 1539.77 68 C50_1 192.70 1555.75

29 C50_1 194.65 1540.16 69 C50_1 192.65 1556.15

30 C50_1 194.60 1540.56 70 C50_1 192.60 1556.55



S/N Sub-band Name



S/N Sub-band Name



31 C50_1 194.55 1540.95 71 C50_1 192.55 1556.96

32 C50_1 194.50 1541.35 72 C50_1 192.50 1557.36

33 C50_1 194.45 1541.75 73 C50_1 192.45 1557.77

34 C50_1 194.40 1542.14 74 C50_1 192.40 1558.17

35 C50_1 194.35 1542.54 75 C50_1 192.35 1558.58

36 C50_1 194.30 1542.94 76 C50_1 192.30 1558.98

37 C50_1 194.25 1543.33 77 C50_1 192.25 1559.39

38 C50_1 194.20 1543.73 78 C50_1 192.20 1559.79

39 C50_1 194.15 1544.13 79 C50_1 192.15 1560.20

40 C50_1 194.10 1544.53 80 C50_1 192.10 1560.61

T AB L E 171 WAV E L E N G T H AL L O C AT I O N (80 C H AN N E L , L B AN D )

S/N Sub-band Name



S/N Sub-band Name



1 L50_1 190.90 1570.42 41 L50_1 188.90 1587.04

2 L50_1 190.85 1570.83 42 L50_1 188.85 1587.46

3 L50_1 190.80 1571.24 43 L50_1 188.80 1587.88

4 L50_1 190.75 1571.65 44 L50_1 188.75 1588.30

5 L50_1 190.70 1572.06 45 L50_1 188.70 1588.73

6 L50_1 190.65 1572.48 46 L50_1 188.65 1589.15

7 L50_1 190.60 1572.89 47 L50_1 188.60 1589.57

8 L50_1 190.55 1573.30 48 L50_1 188.55 1589.99

9 L50_1 190.50 1573.71 49 L50_1 188.50 1590.41

10 L50_1 190.45 1574.13 50 L50_1 188.45 1590.83

11 L50_1 190.40 1574.54 51 L50_1 188.40 1591.26

12 L50_1 190.35 1574.95 52 L50_1 188.35 1591.68

13 L50_1 190.30 1575.37 53 L50_1 188.30 1592.10

14 L50_1 190.25 1575.78 54 L50_1 188.25 1592.52

15 L50_1 190.20 1576.20 55 L50_1 188.20 1592.95

16 L50_1 190.15 1576.61 56 L50_1 188.15 1593.37

17 L50_1 190.10 1577.03 57 L50_1 188.10 1593.79

18 L50_1 190.05 1577.44 58 L50_1 188.05 1594.22

19 L50_1 190.00 1577.86 59 L50_1 188.00 1594.64

20 L50_1 189.95 1578.27 60 L50_1 187.95 1595.06

21 L50_1 189.90 1578.69 61 L50_1 187.90 1595.49

22 L50_1 189.85 1579.10 62 L50_1 187.85 1595.91

23 L50_1 189.80 1579.52 63 L50_1 187.80 1596.34



S/N Sub-band Name



S/N Sub-band Name



24 L50_1 189.75 1579.93 64 L50_1 187.75 1596.76

25 L50_1 189.70 1580.35 65 L50_1 187.70 1597.19

26 L50_1 189.65 1580.77 66 L50_1 187.65 1597.62

27 L50_1 189.60 1581.18 67 L50_1 187.60 1598.04

28 L50_1 189.55 1581.60 68 L50_1 187.55 1598.47

29 L50_1 189.50 1582.02 69 L50_1 187.50 1598.89

30 L50_1 189.45 1582.44 70 L50_1 187.45 1599.32

31 L50_1 189.40 1582.85 71 L50_1 187.40 1599.75

32 L50_1 189.35 1583.27 72 L50_1 187.35 1600.17

33 L50_1 189.30 1583.69 73 L50_1 187.30 1600.60

34 L50_1 189.25 1584.11 74 L50_1 187.25 1601.03

35 L50_1 189.20 1584.53 75 L50_1 187.20 1601.46

36 L50_1 189.15 1584.95 76 L50_1 187.15 1601.88

37 L50_1 189.10 1585.36 77 L50_1 187.10 1602.31

38 L50_1 189.05 1585.78 78 L50_1 187.05 1602.74

39 L50_1 189.00 1586.20 79 L50_1 187.00 1602.17

40 L50_1 188.95 1586.62 80 L50_1 186.95 1603.57

176-Wavelength System The wavelength allocation in a 176-channel system consisting of ZXWM M900 is described in Table 169.


Appendix B

Configuration of Optical Supervision System

This appendix describes the definition, working principle and configuration of two kinds of supervision systems supported by the ZXWM M900: 2 M supervision system and 100 M supervision system.

2 M Supervision System Definition The 2 M supervision system employs 32 bytes (64 kbit/s) to carry ECC data, orderwire voice data, APS data and transparent user channel data of the system, forwarding and exchanging them in the format of PCM32 frame.

The supervisory channel uses the 1510 nm wavelength. If the operating wavelengths of the system only involve those in L band, the 1625 nm wavelength will be used by the supervisory channel.

System Composition The function of 2 M supervision system is mainly implemented by the NCP, OSC and OHP board together.

Note: In the 2 M supervision system, the NCPF board can replace the NCP board to complete the same function. In this case, the NET interface on the front panel of the NCPF board should be connected to the EMS.

The control information between boards is transferred via the backplane. Figure 172 illustrates the relationship between boards in the supervision systems.



F I G U R E 172 2 M S U P E R V I S O R Y S Y S T E M

Hardware Configurations 1. Installing boards

Insert the NCP (or NCPF), OSC and the OHP board into corresponding slots in the OA subrack following the instruction in Table 7. These three boards are mandatory for a 2 M supervision system.

2. Accessing to the EMS

The NCP or NCPF board implements the communication between the NE and the EMS through the interface Qx.

For the NCP board, the Qx interface is the J9 interface in the common interface area of the OA subrack.

For the NCPF board, the Qx interface is the NET interface on its front panel.

If the NE communicates with the EMS directly, connect the network interface of the NE to that of the NM computer with a crossover network cable.

If the NE communicates with the EMS through a HUB, connect both the network interface of the NE and that of the NM computer to the HUB with straight network cables, as shown in Figure 172.

3. Connecting optical fibers

Connect optical fibers according to the actual networking and the information forwarding direction to transfer the supervision information between NEs.



Connect the OSC board to the optical board of the main optical channel (OA or OBM) with optical fibers following the instruction in the section “OSC Board”.

Note: Each optical interface pair on the OSC board implements the recieving and sending of the supervision information for one site.

Connect optical boards of the main optical channel with each other.

Refer to the instruction in the section “OA Board” for the connection of OA boards.

Refer to the instruction in the section “OBM Board” for the connection of OBM boards.

Optional Hardware Configurations The following introduces optional configurations of a 2 M supervision system. You can carry out corresponding configurations for the system according to the actual requirements.

Adding a standby route

The standby route is the Ethernet route connecting NCP/NCPF boards of all the NEs to the NM computer. When the optical supervisory channel fails, the standby route can guarantee the forwarding and exchanging of the supervision information.

When the NCP board is used, connect both the J9 interface of the OA subrack and the network interface of the standby route to the HUB, as shown in Figure 172.

When the NCPF board is used, connect both the NET interface on the NCPF board and the network interface of the standby route to the HUB.

Managing the APS bus of multiple racks

In a 2 M supervision system, additional APSF boards are needed when multiple racks have been equipped in the ZXWM M900 and so the APS bus should be managed. The APSF board is used to transfer the APS bus information between the master and the slave racks and implement the APR function in multiple directions.

Transferring clock information in the TMUX subrack

If the ZXWM M900 in a 2 M supervision system implements the clock function through the CA board in the TMUX subrack, an additional APSF board is needed to transfer the clock information.

Note: The APSF board should be installed in the slot 9 of the OA subrack in the master rack. Please refer to Table 8 for detailed information about the slot arrangement of the OA subrack.



EMS Software Configurations The ZXWM M900 is managed by the ZXONM E300 network management software. The following introduces the common configuration of a 2 M supervision system in the ZXONM E300.

Creating NEs in the 2 M supervision system

In the client operation window of ZXONM E300, click the menu item Device Config > Create NE to create each NE in the supervision system according to the requirements listed in Table 172.

T AB L E 172 R E Q U I R E M E N T S O N T H E C R E AT I O N O F NE S I N A 2 M S U P E R V I S I O N S Y S T E M

Item Requirement

System Type ZXWM M900

Device Type ZXWM M900

IP Address The IP address of the NE should be unique in the whole network. It is recommended to set 18 as the last section of the IP address.

Subnet Mask The default setting is 255.255.255.0. It can be changed according to actual requirements.

Others There is no special requirement for other items. All the configuration should observe the configuring principle of the EMS and be consistent with the actual setting of the NE.

4. Installing boards

Double click the icon of the newly-created NE in the client operation window to enter the Card Management dialog box.

Install the NCP, OHP, OSC and other service boards according to the actual board configuration.

5. Establishing optical connections between NEs

Select the NEs to be connected in the client operation window, and then click the menu item Device Config > Common Management > Link Management to enter the Link dialog box.

Establish bidirectional optical connections between main optical channel boards of each NE, such as OA boards.

6. Other configurations

If the orderwire function is needed, set the orderwire phone number for each NE.

If it is necessary to deal with the transparent user channel data, configure the user channel.

For more configuration operations in detail, please refer to related manuals of the ZXONM E300.



100 M Supervision System Definition and Features The 100 M supervision system adopts the 10/100 M Ethernet technology to encapsulate ECC data, orderwire voice data, APS data and transparent user channel data in IP data packets. All these data are transferred and exchanged in the format of Ethernet data frame.

The supervisory channel uses the 1510 nm wavelength. If the operating wavelengths of the system only involve those in L band, the 1625 nm wavelength will be used by the supervisory channel.

The 100 M supervision system shares the following features:

Supporting the supervision system at the rate of 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s

A 10 M supervision system is suitable for the long-distance transmission complying with Ethenet protocols.

A 100 M supervision system is suitable for the short-distance transmission complying with Ethenet protocols.

If the span is too large, which may cause too much line loss, we can implement the in-band supervision by accessing the 100 M supervision information to OTU boards. The precondition is that the OTU boards support the accessing of continuous-rate traffic.

Compying with the OSPF protocol and supporting dynamic routes. When the network topology changes, it will collect and regenerate the route table automatically to keep the supervison channel unobstructed.

Performing various protection and control functions, such as APS MS and channel protection, APR control and clock management

Adopting the VoIP technology to improve the orderwire communication capability and expandability

Providing the transparent user channel based on RS232/RS422 interfaces, and supporting the communication between Ethernet interfaces in the whole network

Supporting QoS guarantee by updating board software, which ensures that IP packets with the higher priority, such as APS and voice data packets, can be forwarded first.

Supporting large-scale networking, while just occupying rather few IP addresses



System Composition The function of 100 M supervision system is mainly implemented by the NCPF, OSCF, APSF and OHPF board together.

Figure 173 illustrates the basic structure of a 100 M supervision system.

F I G U R E 173 100 M S U P E R V I S O R Y S Y S T E M

In the figure above, the number 1 – 6 indicates six electrical Ethernet interfaces on the OSCF board respectively (port 1 – port 6); while the number 7 and 8 indicates two optical interfaces respectively on the OSCF board (IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2).

Due to the compliance with the OSPF protocol, the NCPF, APSF, OHPF, slave OSCF, the standby route and the NM computer can be connected to any one of port 1 – port 6. There is no fixed relationship between the ports and boards.

More than four optical supervision directions can be implemented by equipping the OA subrack with more than two OSCF boards, among which one OSCF board must be inserted into the slot 7. In this way, it is unnecessary to configure several racks.



Hardware Configurations

Note: This section only introduces the configuration of a 100 M supervision system for your reference. The configuration of a 10 M supervision system is similar to that of the 100 M supervision system.


For a 100 M supervision system, the NCPF, OSCF, APSF and OHPF board must be installed in the OA subrack following the instruction in Table 9.

Note: If only two or less optical supervision directions are needed, insert one OSCF board into the slot 7 of the OA subrack.

If three or more optical supervision directions are needed, insert more OSCF boards. One of these OSCF boards should be inserted into the slot 7 of the OA subrack. Other OSCF boards can be inserted into other unused slots of the OA subrack without restriction.

2. Connecting network cables

In the 100 M supervision system, the control information between boards is transferred via Ethernet interfaces on the front panel of the boards. Connect the system boards, the standby route and the NM computer to any one of the port 1 – port 6 on the OSCF board.

i. The electrical Ethernet interfaces on the OSCF board have the automatic crossover function. Therefore, they can be connected to the boards or other devices with either crossover network cables or straight-through network cables.

ii. If a standby route is needed, connect it to one electrical Ethernet interface on the OSCF board.

iii. Each NCPF board can manage four racks. If there are more than four racks, additional NCPF boards are needed. In this case, connect each NCPF board to the OSCF board through a HUB.

iv. Each APSF board can support the transfer of the protection and switching information among four racks. If there are more than four racks, additional APSF boards are needed. In this case, connect each APSF board to the OSCF board through a HUB.

3. Connecting optical fibers

Connect optical fibers according to the actual networking and the forwarding direction to transfer the supervision information between NEs.

Connect the OSCF board to optical boards of the main optical channel (OA or OBM) with optical fibers following the instruction in the section “OSC Board”.



Note: Each optical interface pair on the OSCF board implements the recieving and sending of the supervision information for one site.

EMS Software Configurations

Note: Only the ZXONM E300 with the version V3.16R2 or above supports the configuration of the 100 M supervision system consisting of ZXWM M900.

The following introduces the configuration steps of a 100 M supervision system in the ZXONM E300.

1. Creating NEs in the 100 M supervision system

In the client operation window of ZXONM E300, click the menu item Device Config > Create NE to create each NE in the supervision system according to the requirements listed in Table 173.

T AB L E 173 R E Q U I R E M E N T S O N T H E C R E AT I O N O F NE S I N A 100 M S U P E R V I S I O N S Y S T E M

Item Requirement

System Type ZXWM M900 (100M)

Device Type ZXWM M900 (100M)

IP Address The IP address of the NE should be unique in the whole network. The last section of the IP address should be n×32+1, where n is an

integer and n ≤ 7.

Subnet Mask The default setting is 255.255.255.224. It can be changed according to actual requirements.

Others There is no special requirement for other items. All the configuration should observe the configuring principle of the EMS and be consistent with the actual setting of the NE.


Double click the icon of the newly-created NE in the client operation window to enter the Card Management dialog box.

Install the NCPF, APSF, OHPF, OSCF and other service boards according to the actual board configuration.

3. Establishing optical connections between NEs

Select the NEs to be connected in the client operation window, and then click the menu item Device Config > Common Management > Link Management to enter the Link dialog box.

Establish bidirectional optical connections between main optical channel boards of each NE, such as OA boards.

4. Setting the IP address of OSCF



Select the NE in the client operation window, and then click the menu item Device Config > 100M Route Management > Card IP Configure. Set the IP address in the popped up dialog box based on the following principles.

Electric Port 1-6

The Electric Port 1-6 in the Address SN column correspond to six optical interfaces on the OSCF board respectively. These six optical interfaces share the same IP address together, which are allocated by the EMS automatically according to the IP address of the NE.

Optical Port 7/Optical Port 8

The Optical Port 7 and Optical Port 8 in the Address SN column correspond to the optical interface IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 respectively, which are the communication interfaces between the OSCF boards of two adjacent NEs. Their IP address should be set according to the optical connection relationship between NEs. Table 174 describes the configuration principles of them.

T AB L E 174 C O N F I G U R AT I O N P R I N C I P L E O F IP AD D R E S S O F OP T I C AL I N T E R F AC E S O N OSCF B O AR D

Item Configuration Principle

IP Address

It can not conflict with other IP addresses in the network. If two OSCF boards are connected to each other with optical fibers, the

IP addresses of corresponding optical interfaces should be set in the same network section.

If there is no optical connection between two OSCF boards, the IP addresses of their optical interfaces can not be set in the same network section. For example, the IP address of the optical interface 7 and that of the optical interface 8 on the same OSCF board can not be set in the same network section.

Subnet Mask The default setting is 255.255.255.0. It can be changed according to actual requirements. If the optical interface has not been enabled, set 0.0.0.0 as the subnet mask.

Area ID The default value is 0. It is recommended to adopt the default value when the quantity of NEs is less than 200.

Checkpoint: To enable the IP address, you must reset the OSCF board through hardware or NM software after configuring its IP address.

5. Configuring the multicast group route

If the function of orderwire or MS protection is needed in the supervision system, you should calculate the route of corresponding multicast group first in the EMS.

Checkpoint: Only after the orderwire or MS protecion has been configured correctly, can the system generate corresponding multicast group automatically. For the



configuration operations in detail, please refer to related manuals of the ZXONM E300.

The 100 M supervision system issues the orderwire and protection switching commands to related NEs in the multicast group following the multicast mode. Each supervision system involves three multicast groups, one orderwire group and two protection groups. The system generates the IP addresses of these multicast groups automatically, which are in the multicast network section (224.*.*.*).

Configure the multicast group route by the following steps:

i. Select the NE in the client operation window, and then click the menu Device Config > 100M Route Management > NE Multicast Group Route to pop up the configuration dialog box;

ii. Select the group in the Select Group pull-down list, and then click the Calculation and Apply button to load the route information to the board.


A p p e n d i x C

Configuration of Integrated Wavelength Supervision Subsystem

This appendix introduces the basic concepts, hardware continuation and software configuration of the integrated wavelength supervision subsystem.

Overview Stable wavelengths reflect that their corresponding frequencies do not drift. The impact of frequency drift on the system is relatively small in a DWDM system with the channel spacing at 100 GHz. However, in a system with higher single channel rate and smaller channel spacing (for example, in an 80-channel system with the spacing at 50 GHz), the frequency drift will impact on the system stability directly.

The ZXWM M900 supports two wavelength stabilization modes suitable for systems with different channel spacings.

For systems with the spacing at 100 GHz, the automatic power control, and the temperature and internal wavelength feedback is used to stabilize wavelengths via optical transponder boards.

For systems with the spacing at 50 GHz, the internal and external wavelength feedback is adopted to improve the stability and precision of wavelength control.

Internal wavelength feedback: Its function is same as that of system with the spacing at 100 GHz, which is performed by optical transponder boards.

External wavelength feedback: This function is implemented through integrated inspection and sequence adjustment. This mode is adopted in integrated wavelength supervision subsystems.

The following sections describe the configuration of integrated supervision subsystem in detail.



Subsystem Composition An integrated wavelength supervision subsystem is composed of OWM board, boards of multiplexing type, optical transponder boards, NCP or NCPF board and the EMS ZXONM E300. Figure 174 illustrates the functional block diagram of the subsystem.

F I G U R E 174 IN T E G R AT E D W AV E L E N G T H SU P E R V I S I O N SU B S Y S T E M

OWM

Multiplexingboard

OTU1

OTU2

OTUn

NCP/NCPF

...

Output of OTU

Output from MONinterface

Wavelength control information

ZXONM E300

The function of each board in the subsystem is described as follows.

OWM board

Detecting the wavelength deviation of each channel in the aggregate optical signal, and informing the NCP/NCPF board if the deviation of any wavelength is out of limit.

Receiving commands relative to wavelength adjustment from the ZXONM E300, and then feeding the adjusting result back to the ZXONM E300.

NCP/NCPF board

It receives the wavelength adjustment commands from the OWM board, and forwards the commands to corresponding optical transponder boards until the wavelength deviation meets the requirement.

Multiplexing board

It outputs the aggregate optical signal, which will be inspected, to the OWM board. In actual connections, the aggregate optical signal is output from the MON interface on the board of amplification type.

Optical transponder board

It receives the wavelength adjustment command from the NCP/NCPF board, and then sends the adjusting result back to the NCP/NCPF board. It can be the board of OTU series, SRM41, SRM42 or GEMF board. The channel spacing of the board should be 50 GHz.

Appendix C Configuration of Integrated Wavelength Supervision Subsystem


ZXONM E300

Users can set related parameters, enables or disables the wavelength adjustment function through the ZXONM E300, which gives the adjustment command to the OWM board.

Hardware Configurations In terms of equipment type in DWDM systems, this section introduces the hardware configuration of OTM and OADM equipment for an integrated wavelength supervision subsystem.

Configurations of OTM Taking an 80-channel DWDM system as example, Figure 175 illustrates the position of OWM board configured in OTM equipment.

F I G U R E 175 PO S I T I O N O F OWM B O AR D I N OTM E Q U I P M E N T

As shown in Figure 175, the OWM board is equipped at the transmitting end, with the IN interface connected to the MON interface on the OBA board.

The wavelengths of all the OTUs monitored by the OWM board should be in either C band or L band. For a DWDM system involving wavelengths in C+L band, two OWM boards should be equipped, one for wavelengths in C band and the other for those in L band.



The OWM board and all the OTUs monitored by it must be managed by the same NCP/NCPF board. In other words, the OWM board and all the monitored OTU boards should be installed in the cabinet(s) managed by the same NCP/NCPF board.

For back-to-back OTM equipment, boards of two optical directions should be installed in two different cabinets. In each cabinet, mount the NCP/NCPF board and OWM board of one direction.

Configurations of OADM Taking a bidirectional OADM site as example, Figure 176 illustrates the position of OWM board configured in OADM equipment.

F I G U R E 176 PO S I T I O N O F OWM B O AR D I N O ADM E Q U I P M E N T

OAD

OAD

OPA

OBA

OBA

OPA

OSC OSC

OWM

OWM

MONinterface

MONinterface

OTUOTU

In OADM equipment, the OWM board only monitors the added wavelengths instead of those passing through.

The IN interface on the OWM board is connected to the MON interface on the OBA board so as to monitor the wavelengths added at the OAD board.

An OWM board can only monitor wavelengths in the same band. For a DWDM system involving wavelengths in C+L band, two OWM boards should be equipped, one for wavelengths in C band and the other for those in L band.

One OWM board should be equipped in each line direction of OADM equipment, so that the EMS can filter the supervision wavelength according to the direction information.

The OWM board and all the OTUs monitored by it must be managed by the same NCP/NCPF board. In other words, the OWM board and all the monitored OTU boards should be installed in the cabinet(s) managed by the same NCP/NCPF board.

Appendix C Configuration of Integrated Wavelength Supervision Subsystem


EMS Software Configurations

Note: Only the ZXONM E300 with the version V3.16R2 or above supports the software configuration of integrated wavelength supervision subsystems.

The EMS software configurations for an integrated wavelength supervision subsystem include the setting of supervision wavelength, and the commanding of inspection and adjustment etc.

The detailed configurations are described in Table 175 as follows.

T AB L E 175 EMS S O F T W AR E C O N F I G U R AT I O N S O F I N T E G R AT E D W AV E L E N G T H S U P E R V I S I O N S U B S Y S T E M

1. Automatic Wavelength Adjustment Configuration

Purpose To set the inspection port of the OWM board, enable or disable the inspection and adjustment of the wavelengths for the boards monitored by the OWM board.

Menu Item Maintenance > Power Management > OWM Set Wavelength Auto Adjustment

Configuration

Board: Select an OWM board from the pull-down list box to display the information about all the OTU boards which can be monitored by this OWM board in the dialog box.

In Port: Select the inspection port, Port1 or Port2, from corresponding pull-down list box. The default option is Port1. The Port2 is usually used for the automatic calibration function.

Whether Auto Inspect: Select from the pull-down list box to enable or disable the automatic wavelength inspection function for each board one by one. You can also tick the Whole Inspect check box to enable the function for all boards at one time.

Enable Adjust: Select or unselect this check box to enable or disable the automatic adjustment function for all boards whose automatic inspection function has been enabled.

Result

After selecting the OWM board, the EMS will filter out the boards with the wavelength locking function and those without the wavelength adjustment function.

After the supervision command has been given, the OWM board will report the alarm when the wavelength drift of the inspected OTU is out of limit.

After the adjustment command has been given, the OTU adjusts the wavelength automatically when the wavelength drift of the inspected OTU is out of limit.



2. Automatic Calibration Configuration

Purpose

Optical components age after longtime running, due to which the wavelength inspection error can not meet the requirement of index. In order to guarantee the system precision, the automatic calibration function is provided. Offering a standard wavelength to the OWM board, the EMS gives an automatic calibration command. Then the OWM board calculates the deviation between the measured wavelength and the standard one. When the OWM inspect the operating wavelength, it will deduct the deviation from the measured value to ensure the precision.

Menu Item Maintenance > Power Management > OWM Calibrate

Configuration

Board: Select an OWM board from the pull-down list box. Port: Select the inspection port of the OWM board. The default

option is Port2. Frequency (THz): Select the calibrating wavelength (unit: THz).

Result Click the Apply button to give the calibration command, and then the OWM board will return the calibration result.


A p p e n d i x D

Configuration of OMS Layer Power Management Subsystem

This appendix introduces the basic concepts and configurations of the Optical Multiplex Section (OMS) layer power management.

Introduction to Automatic Power Management The ZXWM M900 provides the automatic power management function by adopting the optical power equalization technology for the OMS layer and the Optical Channel (OCH) layer

Power management of OCH layer

The purpose of OCH power management is to establish and hold the power equalization of the optical channel. It includes the fixed power compensation and the dynamic channel power management.

Fixed power compensation: It uses the LAC board with Gain Flattening Filter (GFF) to ensure the flatness of the gain spectrum.

Dynamic channel power management: It uses the VMUX board and adopts the gain spectrum slope adjustment technology, dynamic gain equalization technology, and the optical performance supervision technology to solve the problem of power disequilibrium between different channels, which is caused by non-linearity effect and unflatness accumulation of multi-stage OAs in ultra long-haul and large-capacity systems.

Power management of OMS layer

The purpose of OMS power management is to establish and keep the optimal status of OMS aggregate power. The following sections introduce the concept and implementation of OMS power management.



Power Management of OMS Layer Working principle

The power management of OMS layer is based on each power management domain. A power management domain is the transmission section between two OTMs, that is, the OMS, as shown in Figure 177.

F I G U R E 177 PO W E R M AN A G E M E N T D O M AI N

OTM OTMOLA OLA OLA OLA

A1 A2 A3 An

G1 G2 G3 Gn-1

OMS

OTS OTS

Gn

NODE1 NODE2 NODE3 NODEn-1 NODEn

OMS: Optical Multiplex Section

OTS: Optical Transmission Section

Ax: Line attenuation before node x, x=1, 2, 3, …, n

Gx: Gain of node x, x=1, 2, 3, …, n-1, n

The power of the OMS layer is optimized according to the preset parameters of the system and the current power of each OTS. Ideally, the difference between gain attenuation meets the following formula.

011

=−∑∑==

n

i

n

i

AiGi

In actual optical path, the optimization begins once the attenuation difference meets the fault condition of OMS power management. When the difference reaches the value in a specified range, the optimization ends. Finally, it ensures that all the attenuation difference in the same OMS approaches to zero.



Hardware and Software Support

The power management function of OMS layer needs related hardware and software support, as listed in Table 176.

T AB L E 176 H AR D W AR E /S O F T W AR E N E E D E D I N P O W E R M AN AG E M E N T O F OMS L AY E R

Hardware/Software Function

LAC It determines the attenuation amount of LAC according to the optimization algorithm when the line attenuation changes.

OA

HOBA

Hardware (Board)

DRA

They provide the gain adjustment function through determining the gain according to the optimization algorithm when the line attenuation changes.

Software (EMS)

ZXONM E300

It supports the setting of related parameters of power management, the query of current power status, the commanding of power management. However, only the ZXONM E300 of V3.16R2 or above supports these operations.

Division of Power Management Domain

The OMS layer power management requires that the performance of each power management domain is independent, such as the power and SNR. The division of power management domain is different for systems with different channels, as described below.

Systems with channels less than 80

In such systems, every OTM and OADM, OADM and OADM, and every OTM and OTM constructs their respective power management domain. Taking an 80-channel system as example, Figure 178 illustrates an OMS power management domain between two OTMs. In the figure, all the OLAs between OTM1 and OTM2 are omitted.

F I G U R E 178 D I V I S I O N O F P O W E R M AN AG E M E N T D O M AI N (80 -C H AN N E L S Y S T E M )

OMU(C)

OTU

.

.

OMU(C+)

OTU

.

.

OCI(C)

OSC DRA

OCI(C)

ODU(C)

ODU(C+)

OTU

.

.

OTU

.

.

OTM1 OTM2

OSC

DCM VGSC

OPM

OBA

OBA OPA

OMS



The OA, LAC, HOBA and DRA boards in the OMS can all be taken as the monitoring boards and the implementing boards of this power management domain.

Systems with channels more than 80

When a system has more than 80 operating wavelengths covering C band and L band, the power management domain should be divided into the domain of C band and that of L band, as illustrated in Figure 179. All the OLAs between OTM1 and OTM2 are omitted in the figure.

F I G U R E 179 D I V I S I O N O F P O W E R M AN AG E M E N T D O M AI N (M O R E TH AN 80 C H AN N E L S )

OMU(C)

OTU

.

.

OMU(C+)

OTU

.

.

OMU(L)

OTU

.

.

OMU(L+)

OTU

.

.

OCI(C)

OCI(L)

OBM（C/L）

OBA

OBA

OSC

OBM(C/L)

OSC

OPA OBA

DCM VGSC

OPA OBA

DCM VGSC

OPM

OPM

DRA

OCI(C)

OCI(L)

ODU(C)

ODU(C+)

ODU(L)

ODU(L+)

OTU

.

.

OTU

.

.

OTU

.

.

OTU

.

.

OTM1 OTM2

OMS (C Band)

OMS (L Band)

In the OMS (C Band), all the OA, LAC and HOBA boards processing optical signals in C band can be taken as the monitoring boards and the implementing boards of the C band power management domain.

In the OMS (L Band), all the OA, LAC and HOBA boards processing optical signals in L band can be taken as the monitoring boards and the implementing boards of the L band power management domain.

Note: The DRA board amplifies both the optical signals in C band and those in L band, which makes the C band and L band can not be independent of each other. Therefore, in systems with channels more than 80, the DRA board can not be taken as the implementing board in the power management domain.

Working Conditions of OMS Power Optimization

When the ZXONM E300 detects that the gain attenuation difference meets the start/end condition of power optimization, it will give the start/end command to corresponding boards.

The OMS layer power management includes the following two modes:



OMS layer power optimization: The operator gets the adjustment value of each executor according to the automatic power optimization algorithm, determines whether to modify the value, and then gives the adjustment command to the board through the ZXONM E300.

Automatic power management: The operator sets the optimization conditions first. The ZXONM E300 will send the adjustment value calculated through the optimization algorithm automatically to the board without the need of manual operation.

Table 177 describes the working conditions of the two optimization modes with default settings.

T AB L E 177 WO R K I N G C O N D I T I O N S O F OMS L AY E R P O W E R M AN AG E M E N T

Default Threshold Working Condition Fault OMS Power

Optimization Automatic Power Management

Remark

OTS attenuation mismatch

≥ ±2 dB ≥ ±2 dB It can be changed in the ZXONM E300.

OMS attenuation mismatch

≥ ±3 dB ≥ ±3dB It can be changed in the ZXONM E300.

Optimization starting OMS

normalized optical power difference between the beginning and the end OA

≥ ±2 dB ≥ ±2 dB It can be changed in the ZXONM E300.


≤ ±1 dB ≤ ±1 dB -


≤ ±1 dB ≤ ±1 dB -

Optimization ending OMS

normalized optical power difference between the beginning and the end OA

≤ ±1 dB ≤ ±1 dB -

No input light - - -

No output light - - -

Optimization failure


≥ ±3 dB - It can be changed in the ZXONM E300.



Default Threshold Working Condition Fault OMS Power

Optimization Automatic Power Management

Remark



OMS normalized optical power difference between the beginning and the end OA


EMS Configurations

Note: Only the ZXONM E300 with the version V3.19R1 or above supports the configuration of the OMS layer power management function.

This section introduces the creation and configuration of the OMS power management domain.

Checkpoint: Before the configuration, you should check the following items first.

All necessary boards have been installed correctly;

The optical connections are correct;

The EMS communicates with the NE well.

Creating an OMS Power Management Subsystem The following describes the steps to create an OMS power management subsystem.

1. Establish the optical connection of main optical channel between NEs

i. In the Main View of the client operation window, select the source NE and the destination NE;

ii. Click the menu item Device Config > Common Management > Link Management to establish the optical connections between boards for the main optical channel according to the actual networking requirements.



2. Establish the optical connections between boards in each NE

i. In the Main View of the client operation window, select the NE;

ii. Click the menu item Device Config > Common Management > Inner Connection of NEs to pop up the configuration dialog box;

iii. Select a source board and then click the Config button;

iv. In the pop-up dialog box, select the destination board and establish the optical connection between ports of the boards according to the traffic flow direction.

3. Enable the SNMS resource

The OMS layer power management subsystem is a kind of Subnet Management System (SNMS). Its functions can only be implemented in the WDM SNMS View of the client operation window.

i. Open the WDM SNMS View in the client operation window first, and then click the menu item System > SNMS Start/Stop to pop up the SNMS Start Config dialog box.

ii. Click the Start button to enable the SNMS resource.

4. Configure the SNMS resource

Search the information about OTS/OMS already created in the SNMS and save the searching result.

Note: Only when some connections in NEs or between NEs change, should the SNMS resource be reconfigured. If no connection changes, and the SNMS resource has been configured, this step can be skipped.

i. In the WDM SNMS View of the client operation window, click the menu item Config > SNMS Resource Config to pop up the SNMS Config dialog box.

ii. Click the Auto Compute button to refresh the information about OTS/OMS in the EMS database.

iii. Select All Records in the Compute Result dialog box and then click the Apply button.

5. Configure the power management domain

Note: If the power management domain adopts the default parameters, this stepcan be skipped.

i. In the WDM SNMS View, click the menu item Power Adjust > Power Management Domain Config to pop up the PNMS Config dialog box;



ii. Select the PNMS Layer to configure the power management layer, and then select the OMS layer (namely, power management domain) and the PNMS layer (namely, OTS) from corresponding pull-down list box;

iii. Click the Config Monitor button to select the monitor board in the pop-up dialog box;

iv. Click the Config Executer button to select the executer board in the pop-up dialog box;

v. In the Parameter Config combo box, set the SOTS attenuation limit, OA supplemental gain, OMS compute power’s K value and the OMS mismatch power;

vi. Select the OMS in the SNMS TYPE combo box and then select the OMS layer (namely, power management domain) to be configured.

vii. In the OMS configuration, set the corresponding parameters.

Configuring the OMS Power Management Subsystem After the OMS power management domain has been created successfully, configure the management domain in the ZXONM E300 to implement the OMS layer power optimization, automatic power management and the query of optimization logs. Table 178 describes the configuration operations in detail.

T AB L E 178 C O N F I G U R AT I O N S O F OMS PO W E R M AN A G E M E N T S U B S Y S T E M

1. Configure OMS Layer Power Optimization

Purpose To query current performance and optimization result of the OMS power management domain, modify the adjustment value manually and issue the command

Menu Item WDM SNMS View: Power Adjust > OMS Optimize

Query current performance of the OMS power management domain:In the OMS optimization dialog box, select the PNMS, click the Query performance button, and then the current power, modified value and attenuation of each OTS will be shown in Monitor state, Executer current value and SOTS attenuation list boxes.

Query the power optimization result: In the OMS optimization dialog box, select the PNMS, click the Power optimization button to display the attenuation sum of OMS and each OTS after the optimization in the pop-up dialog box. The query result is shown in the Monitor state, Executer current value and SOTS attenuation list boxes. Moreover, the Executer modified value list box displays the modified value of current executor calculated by using the optimization algorithm.

Configuration

Adjust the modified value of the executer manually: Click the Power optimization button to query the optimization result of the PNMS first, modify the value in the Executer modified value list box and then click the Apply button.



Result

This function is only effective for NEs in normal communication with the EMS.

In the SOTS attenuation list box, the yellow background of a queried item indicates that the attenuation sum of this OTS exceeds the matching threshold.

In the Executer modified value list box, the yellow background of a queried item indicates that the executer board should be adjusted according to the optimization algorithm. At the same time, the recommended value is displayed in the Modified value column, which can be changed.

2. Configure Automatic Power Management

Purpose To set the stop condition of automatic power management, configure the time interval, enable or disable the automatic power management

Menu Item WDM SNMS View: Power Adjust > Auto Power Optimize Management

Configuration

1. Set the time interval of the automatic power management; 2. Set the stop condition of automatic power management. The

optimization will be stopped once any condition is met. It is recommended to set the stop condition as follows. One OTS gain decrease exceeds 3 dB OMS gain decrease exceeds 4 dB OMS OA power margin exceeds 3 dB

3. Click the Query button to report information about all the PNMSs managed by the server (manager);

4. Configure the power management region. The Power Region Config list box displays all the PNMSs which have been configured.

5. Enable or disable the PNMS. By default, the automatic power management function is disabled.

Result

This function is only effective for NEs in normal communication with the EMS.

If the automatic power management is enabled, the optimization result can not be changed manually during the optimization.

3. Query Power Management Log

Purpose To query the records of power optimization and automatic power management

Menu Item WDM SNMS View: Power Adjust > Power Optimize Log Query

Configuration

Set the query condition (time period) in the dialog box, and click the Query button to display the optimization log. Or click the Advance button to set the filter condition (Succeed or Failed), and select the PNMS to be queried.

Result In the log, the Operation Type column displays the type of the OMS power optimization, manually or automatically.




Abbreviations

Abbreviation Full Name

AFR Absolute Frequency Reference

AFEC Advanced FEC

AGENT Agent

AIS Alarm Indication Signal

APO Auto Performance Optimization

APR Automatic Power Reduction

APS Automatic Protection Switching

APSD Automatic Power ShutDown

APSF Automatic Protection Switching for FastEthernet

ASE Amplified Spontaneous Emission

AWG Array Waveguide Grating

BER Bit Error Ratio

BLSR Bidirectional Line Switching Ring

BSHR Bidirectional Self-Healing Ring

CDR Clock and Data Recovery

CMI Code Mark Inversion

CODEC Code and Decode

CPU Central Processing Unit

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

DBMS Database Management System

DCC Data Communications Channel

DCF Dispersion Compensation Fiber

DCG Dispersion Compensation Grating

DCN Data Communications Network

DCM Dispersion Compensation Module

DDI Double Defect Indication

DGFF Dynamic Gain Flattening Filter

DSF Dispersion Shifted Fiber

DGD Differential Group Delay

DTMF Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency




DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

DVB Digital Video Broadcasting

DXC Digital Cross-connect

EAM Electrical Absorption Modulation

ECC Embedded Control Channel

EDFA Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier

EFEC Enhanced FEC

ERZ Electrical Return to Zero

ES Errored Second

ESCON Enterprise System Connection

EX Extinction Ratio

FC Fiber Channel

FDDI Fiber Distributed Data Interface

FDI Forward Defection Indication

FEC Forward Error Correction

FICON Fiber Connection

FPDC Fiber Passive Dispersion Compensator

FWM Four Wave Mixing

GE Gigabits Ethernet

GEF Gain Equalizing Filter

GFF Gain Flattening Filter

GUI Graphical User Interfaces

HDTV High Definition TV

Interleaver -

IP Internet Protocol

IWF Integrated Wavelength Feedback

LD Laser Diode

LOF Loss of Frame

LOS Loss of Signal

MANAGER Manager

MCU Management and Control Unit

MBOTU OTU Main Board

MQW Multiple Quantum Well

MSP Multiplex Section Protection

MST Multiplex Section Termination

NE Network Element

NNI Network Node Interface

Abbreviations



NMCC Network Manage Control Center

NRZ Non Return to Zero

NT Network Termination

NZDSF Non-Zero Dispersion Shifted Fiber

OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer

OBA Optical Booster Amplifier

OCH Optical Channel

ODF Optical fiber Distribution Frame

ODU Optical channel Data Unit

OGMD Optical Group Mux/DeMux Board

OLA Optical Line Amplifier

OLT Optical Line Termination

ONU Optical Network Unit

OP Optical Protection Unit

OPA Optical PreAmplifier



OSNR Optical Signal-Noise Ratio

OTM Optical Terminal

OTN Optical Transport Network

OXC Optical Cross-connect

PDC Passive Dispersion Compensator

PMD Polarization Mode Dispersion

PDL Polarization Dependent Loss

RAC Receiver Adaptive Control

RZ Return to Zero

SAN Storage Area Network

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy


SEF Severely Errored Frame

SES Severely Errored Second

SFP Small Form Factor Pluggable

SLIC Subscriber Line Interface Circuit

SMCC Sub-network Management Control Center

SMT Surface Mount

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

STM Synchronous Transfer Mode




SWE Electrical Switching Board

TCP Transmission Control Protocol

TFF Thin Film Filter

TMN Telecommunications Management Network

TTI Trail Trace Identifier

UAS Unavailable Second

VCF Voltage-Controlled Optical Filter

VOA Variable Optical Attenuator

WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing


Figures

Figure 1 Outline and Dimensions of ZTE Cabinet (with Depth 300 mm) ............... 2 Figure 2 Basic Fittings in ZTE Cabinet............................................................. 3 Figure 3 Grounding Terminals in Cabinet ........................................................ 5 Figure 4 Components’ Position in Cabinet ....................................................... 8 Figure 5 Structure of OA Subrack .................................................................. 9 Figure 6 Outline of Dustproof Net .................................................................11 Figure 7 Left Fiber Cable Reel-in Box.............................................................11 Figure 8 Boards Arrangement in OA Subrack (for 2 M Supervisory System without

APSF) ...............................................................................................12 Figure 9 Boards Arrangement in OA Subrack (for 2 M Supervisory System with APSF)

........................................................................................................13 Figure 10 Boards Arrangement in OA Subrack (for 100 M Supervisory System) ...14 Figure 11 Common Interface Area on Backplane of OA Subrack ........................15 Figure 12 Pins Order of DIP Switch (J10) .......................................................16 Figure 13 Pins of J1/J17 Power Socket ..........................................................19 Figure 14 DB9 Socket (male) .......................................................................19 Figure 15 DB9 Socket (female) ....................................................................20 Figure 16 Structure of OTU Subrack..............................................................22 Figure 17 Board Slots in OTU Subrack ...........................................................23 Figure 18 Common Interface Area on Backplane of OTU Subrack ......................24 Figure 19 Board Slots in TMUX Subrack .........................................................26 Figure 20 Common Interface Area on TMUX Backplane ....................................27 Figure 21 Structure of Orderwire Phone Bracket .............................................29 Figure 22 Structure of Independent Fan Unit..................................................30 Figure 23 Maintenance of Independent Fan Unit .............................................31 Figure 24 Structure of Power Alarm Subrack ..................................................31 Figure 25 Structure of Power Distribution Subrack ..........................................32 Figure 26 Structure of Monitoring Plug-in Box.................................................34 Figure 27 Outline of ODF Plug-in Box ............................................................35 Figure 28 Inner Structure of ODF Plug-in Box.................................................35 Figure 29 Position and Number of Optical Connectors on ODF Board ..................35 Figure 30 Structure of DCM Plug-in Box.........................................................36 Figure 31 Structure of OTU Board.................................................................41 Figure 32 Structure of PBX Board .................................................................42 Figure 33 Structure of PWSB Board...............................................................43 Figure 34 Structure of FCB Board .................................................................44 Figure 35 Operating Principle of Terminal OTU Board.......................................46 Figure 36 Operating Principle of Regenerator OTU Board..................................46 Figure 37 Front Panel of OTU Board ..............................................................48 Figure 38 Operating Principle of Terminal OTUF Board .....................................53 Figure 39 Operating Principle of Regenerator OTUF Board ................................53 Figure 40 Front Panel of OTUF Board.............................................................55 Figure 41 Operating Principle of Single-Path Bidirectional OTU10G ....................61 Figure 42 Operating Principle of Single-channel Unidirectional OTU10G G ...........61 Figure 43 Front Panel of Single-Path Bidirectional OTU10G Board ......................62 Figure 44 Operating Principle of Single-Channel Bidirectional EOTU10G ............67 Figure 45 Operating Principle of Regenerator EOTU10G..................................68 Figure 46 Front Panel of Single-Channel Bidirectional EOTU10G Board .............70 Figure 47 Operating Principle of SRM41/SRM42 Board .....................................77 Figure 48 Front Panel of SRM41 Board ..........................................................79



Figure 49 Operating Principle of GEM2 Board................................................87 Figure 50 Front Panel of GEM2 Board ..........................................................89 Figure 51 Operating Principle of GEMF Board..................................................94 Figure 52 Front Panel of GEMF Board ............................................................97 Figure 53 Operating Principle of GEM8 Board..............................................103 Figure 54 Front Panel of GEM8 Board ........................................................104 Figure 55 Operating Principle of DSA Board................................................112 Figure 56 Front Panel of DSA Board ..........................................................114 Figure 57 TM Working Mode of DSA Board .................................................117 Figure 58 OAD Working Mode of DSA Board ...............................................117 Figure 59 Operating Principle of DSAF Board ..............................................125 Figure 60 Front Panel of DSAF Board.........................................................128 Figure 61 Operating Principle of DSAE Board ..............................................137 Figure 62 Front Panel of DSAE Board.........................................................139 Figure 63 TM Working Mode of DSAE Board................................................141 Figure 64 OAD Working Mode of DSAE Board..............................................142 Figure 65 Operating Principle of SMU Board................................................147 Figure 66 Front Panel of SMU Board ..........................................................149 Figure 67 Operating Principle of OCI Board ..................................................155 Figure 68 Front Panel of OCI Board.............................................................156 Figure 69 Optical Connections of OCI Boards in an 80/96-Channel System .......158 Figure 70 Optical Connections of OCI Boards in a 160/176-Channel System......159 Figure 71 Operating Principle of OBM Board .................................................160 Figure 72 Front Panel of OBM Board............................................................162 Figure 73 Optical Connections of OBM Boards...............................................164 Figure 74 Operating Principle of OMU Board .................................................166 Figure 75 Front Panel of OMU40 Board ........................................................168 Figure 76 Optical Connections of OMU Board (Wavelength Number n ≤ 40).....170 Figure 77 Optical Connections of OMU Board (more than 48-channel) ..............170 Figure 78 Operating Principle of VMUX Board ...............................................172 Figure 79 Front Panel of VMUX Board..........................................................173 Figure 80 Optical Connections of VMUX Board ..............................................175 Figure 81 Operating Principle of ODU Board .................................................176 Figure 82 Front Panel of ODU Board............................................................178 Figure 83 Optical Connection of ODU Board (Wavelength Number n ≤ 40) ......180 Figure 84 Operating Principle of OAD Board (8 Wavelengths)..........................181 Figure 85 Front Panel of OAD8 Board ..........................................................182 Figure 86 Optical Connections of OAD8 Board ..............................................184 Figure 87 Operating Principle of WBU/AD2 Board ........................................186 Figure 88 Operating Principle of WBU/DGE Board..........................................187 Figure 89 Front Panel of WBU Board..........................................................188 Figure 90 Optical Connections of WBU/AD2 Baord .......................................190 Figure 91 Operating Principle of WSUD/MA2 Board........................................193 Figure 92 Operating Principle of WSUD/E Board............................................194 Figure 93 Operating Principle of WSUA/MD2 Board........................................195 Figure 94 Operating Principle of WSUA/E Board ............................................195 Figure 95 Front Panel of WSU Board..........................................................196 Figure 96 Optcial Connections of WSUD/MA2 Board.....................................198 Figure 97 Optical Connections of WSUD/MA2 Board (with WSUA/E Boards).....199 Figure 98 Operating Principle of WBM Board...............................................201 Figure 99 Front Panel of WBM Board .........................................................202 Figure 100 Optical Connections of WBM Board ............................................204 Figure 101 Operating Principle of SDM Board ...............................................206 Figure 102 Front Panel of SDM Board ..........................................................207 Figure 103 Optical Connection of SDM Board................................................208 Figure 104 Operating Principle of EOLA Board ..............................................213 Figure 105 Operating Principle of EONA Board ..............................................214 Figure 106 Front Panel of EOBA Board.........................................................216 Figure 107 Front Panel of EOLAD Board.......................................................218 Figure 108 Front Panel of EOPAD Board.......................................................220 Figure 109 Front Panel of EONA Board ........................................................222

Figures


Figure 110 Typical Optical Connections of EOA Board...................................224 Figure 111 Operating Principle of DRA Board (C Band)...................................227 Figure 112 Operating Principle of DRA Board (C+L Band)...............................228 Figure 113 Front Panel of DRA Board ..........................................................229 Figure 114 Operating Principle of LAC Board (LACG)......................................233 Figure 115 Front Panel of LAC Board...........................................................234 Figure 116 the optical connection of LAC boards (1) ......................................235 Figure 117 the optical connection of LAC boards (2) ......................................236 Figure 118 Operating Principle of OWM Board...............................................237 Figure 119 Front Panel of OWM Board .........................................................238 Figure 120 Operating Principle of OPM Board................................................241 Figure 121 Front Panel of OPM Board ..........................................................242 Figure 122 The Position of MCPD Board in the System ...................................244 Figure 123 Operating Principle of MCPD Board..............................................245 Figure 124 Front Panel of MCPD Board ........................................................246 Figure 125 Operating Principle of OP Board ..................................................248 Figure 126 Front Panel of OP Board ............................................................249 Figure 127 Optical Connections of OP Board (OTU 1+1 Protection, OTU Redundancy

Mode in Chain Network).....................................................................251 Figure 128 Optical Connections of OP Board (OTU 1+1 Protection, OTU Redundancy

Mode in Ring Network) ......................................................................252 Figure 129 Optical Connection of OP Board (OTU 1+1 Protection)....................253 Figure 130 Optical Connection of OP Board (OA shared configuration mode) .....254 Figure 131 Optical Connection of OP Board (EOA redundancy configuration mode)

......................................................................................................254 Figure 132 Operating Principle of OPMS Board ............................................256 Figure 133 Front Panel of OPMS Board ......................................................257 Figure 134 Configuration for Multiplex Section Shared Protection...................260 Figure 135 Operating Principle of OPCS Board ............................................261 Figure 136 Front Panel of OPCS Board.......................................................262 Figure 137 Configuration for Optica Channel Shared Protection .....................264 Figure 138 Operating Principle of OMCP Board..............................................265 Figure 139 Front Panel of OMCP Board ........................................................267 Figure 140 Optical Connection of OMCP Board (Bidirectional 1:8 Protection) .....269 Figure 141 Optical Connection of OMCP Board (Bidirectional 1:16 Protection)....270 Figure 142 Operating Principle of NCP Board ................................................272 Figure 143 Front Panel of NCP Board...........................................................273 Figure 144 Operating Principle of OSC Board................................................276 Figure 145 Front Panel of OSC Board ..........................................................277 Figure 146 Optical Connection of OSC Board ................................................279 Figure 147 Operating Principle of OHP Board................................................281 Figure 148 Front Panel of OHP Board ..........................................................282 Figure 149 Operating Principle of NCPF Board (100 M Supervision System) ......284 Figure 150 Front Panel of NCPF Board .........................................................285 Figure 151 Operating Principle of OSCF Board ..............................................287 Figure 152 Front Panel of OSCF Board.........................................................288 Figure 153 Optical Connection between OSCF Board and OTU Board................291 Figure 154 Operating Principle of OHPF Board ..............................................293 Figure 155 Front Panel of OHPF Board.........................................................295 Figure 156 Operating Principle of APSF Board...............................................297 Figure 157 Front Panel of APSF Board .........................................................298 Figure 158 Operating Principle of PBX Board ................................................300 Figure 159 Front Panel and Rear Panel of PBX Board .....................................301 Figure 160 Relations between PWSB Board and Power Distribution Subrack......303 Figure 161 Operating Principle of PWSB Board..............................................303 Figure 162 Front Panel of PWSB Board ........................................................304 Figure 163 DIP Switch on PWSB Board ........................................................305 Figure 164 DB15 Socket (male) .................................................................307 Figure 165 Operating Principle of CA Board ..................................................312 Figure 166 Front Panel of CA Board ............................................................313 Figure 167 Operating Principle of CSU Board ..............................................317



Figure 168 Front Panel of CSU Board.........................................................319 Figure 169 Application of ZXWM M900 (no more than 48-Channel System).......323 Figure 170 Application of ZXWM M900 (80/96-Channel System) .....................324 Figure 171 Application of ZXWM M900 (160/176-Channel System)..................325 Figure 172 2 M Supervisory System............................................................332 Figure 173 100 M Supervisory System ........................................................336 Figure 174 Integrated Wavelength Supervision Subsystem.............................342 Figure 175 Position of OWM Board in OTM Equipment....................................343 Figure 176 Position of OWM Board in OADM Equipment .................................344 Figure 177 Power Management Domain.......................................................348 Figure 178 Division of Power Management Domain (80-Channel System) .........349 Figure 179 Division of Power Management Domain (More Than 80 Channels)....350


Tables

Table 1 Chapter Summary ..................................................................................... ii Table 2 Typographical Conventions......................................................................... iv Table 3 Mouse Operation Conventions .................................................................... iv Table 4 Safety Signs .............................................................................................v Table 5 Structural Parameters of ZTE Cabinet.............................................................1 Table 6 Cabinet Configurations of ZXWM M900 ...........................................................6 Table 7 Relations between Boards and Slots (for 2 M Supervisory System without APSF) 12 Table 8 Relations between Boards and Slots (for 2 M Supervisory System with APSF)..... 13 Table 9 Relationship between Boards and Slots (for 100 M Supervisory System)............ 14 Table 10 Serial Number of Racks ............................................................................ 16 Table 11 Serial Number of Subracks........................................................................ 17 Table 12 Type and Function of Interfaces on OA Backplane......................................... 17 Table 13 Signal Definition of Pins in J1/j17 Socket..................................................... 19 Table 14 Signal Definitions of Pins in J2 Socket ......................................................... 19 Table 15 Signal Definition of Pins in J8 Socket .......................................................... 20 Table 16 Signal Definition of Pins in J11 Socket......................................................... 20 Table 17 Signal Definition of Pins in J3 Socket .......................................................... 20 Table 18 Signal Definitions of Pins in J12 Socket ....................................................... 21 Table 19 Functions of Components in OTU Subrack ................................................... 22 Table 20 Type and Function of Interfaces on OTU Backplane....................................... 24 Table 21 Relationship between Boards and Slots in TMUX Subrack............................... 26 Table 22 Types and Functions of Interface on TMUX Backplane ................................... 27 Table 23 Components Functions of Orderwire Phone Bracket....................................... 29 Table 24 Functions of Components in Independent Fan Unit........................................ 30 Table 25 Functions of Components in Power Distribution Subrack ................................ 33 Table 26 Functions of Components in Monitoring Plug-in Box ...................................... 34 Table 27 Structures of Components in ODF Plug-in Box.............................................. 36 Table 28 Functions of Components of DCM Plug-in Box .............................................. 37 Table 29 Available Boards for ZXWM M900............................................................... 39 Table 30 Front Panel Descriptions of OTU Board and Related Operation Information ....... 48 Table 31 Relations between OTU Board and Indicator Status....................................... 49 Table 32 Performance and Alarm Messages of OTU Board........................................... 50 Table 33 Front Panel Description of OTUF Board and Related Operation Information....... 55 Table 34 Performance and Alarm Messages of OTUF Board ......................................... 57 Table 35 Front Panel Descriptions of OTU10G Board and Related Operation Information . 63 Table 36 Performance and Alarm Messages of OTU10G Board ..................................... 64



Table 37 Signal Definition of EOUT10G Board ........................................................... 68 Table 38 Description of EOTU10G Board’s Front Panel and Related Operation Information

.................................................................................................................. 70 Table 39 Performance, Alarm and Event Messages of OTU10G Board.......................... 71 Table 40 Functions of SRM41/SRM42 Board.............................................................. 75 Table 41 Front Panel Descriptions of SRM42/SRM41 Board and Related Operation Information

.................................................................................................................. 79 Table 42 Correspondence Relations between the Working Status and Indicator Status of the

SRM41/SRM42 Board..................................................................................... 80 Table 43 Performance Messages of SRM42/SRM41 Board ........................................... 82 Table 44 Alarm Messages of SRM42/SRM41 Board..................................................... 84 Table 45 Event Messages of SRM42/SRM41 Board..................................................... 86 Table 46 Description of GEM2 Board’s Front Panel and Related Operation Information .. 89 Table 47 Relations between the Working Status and Indicator Status of GEM2 Board.... 91 Table 48 Performance Messages of GEM2 Board ...................................................... 91 Table 49 Alarm Messages of GEM2 Board ............................................................... 92 Table 50 Front Panel Descriptions of GEMF Board and Related Operation Information ..... 97 Table 51 Correspondence Relations between the Working Status and Indicator Status of

GEMF Board ................................................................................................. 98 Table 52 Performance Messages of GEMF Board ........................................................ 99 Table 53 Alarm Messages of GEMF Board ............................................................... 100 Table 54 Description of GEM8’s Front Panel and Related Operation Information ......... 105 Table 55 Relations between the Working Status and Indicator Status of GEM8 Board.. 106 Table 56 Performance Messages of GEM8 Board .................................................... 106 Table 57 Alarm Messages of GEM8 Board ............................................................. 108 Table 58 Event Messages of GEM8 Board ............................................................. 111 Table 59 Descriptions of DSA Board’s Front Panel and Related Operation Information . 115 Table 60 Relations between the Working Status and Indicator Status of DSA Board.... 116 Table 61 Performance Messages of DSA Board ...................................................... 119 Table 62 Alarm Messages of DSA Board ............................................................... 121 Table 63 Event Messages of DSA Board................................................................ 123 Table 64 Types of DSAF Board............................................................................ 125 Table 65 Description of DSAF Board’s Front Panel and Related Operation Information . 129 Table 66 Relations Between Working Status and Indicator Status of DSAF Board........ 130 Table 67 Performance Messages of DSAF Board .................................................... 130 Table 68 Alarm Messages of DSAF Board.............................................................. 132 Table 69 Event Messages of DSAF Board .............................................................. 134 Table 70 Description of DSAE Board’s Front Panel and Related Operation Information. 140 Table 71 Relations Between the Working Status and Indicator Status of DSAE Board .. 140 Table 72 Performance Messages of DSAE Board .................................................... 143 Table 73 Alarm Messages of DSAE Board ............................................................. 143 Table 74 Event Messages of DSAE Board.............................................................. 145 Table 75 Description of SMU Board’s Front Panel and Related Operation Information .. 149 Table 76 Relations Between the Working Status and Indicator Status of SMU Board ... 150

Tables


Table 77 Performance Messages of SMU Board...................................................... 150 Table 78 Alarm Messages of SMU Board............................................................... 151 Table 79 Event Messages of SMU Board ............................................................... 153 Table 80 Front Panel Descriptions of OCI Board and Related Basic Operation............... 157 Table 81 Performance and Alarm Messages of OCI Board ......................................... 159 Table 82 Front Panel Descriptions of OBM Board and Related Basic Operation.............. 162 Table 83 Performance and Alarm Messages of OBM Board ........................................ 165 Table 84 Type List of OMU Board .......................................................................... 166 Table 85 Front Panel Descriptions of OMU Board and Related Basic Operation ............. 168 Table 86 Performance and Alarm Messages of OMU Board ........................................ 170 Table 87 Front Panel Descriptions of VMUX Board and Related Basic Operation............ 174 Table 88 Performance and Alarm Messages of VMUX Board....................................... 175 Table 89 Type List of ODU Board .......................................................................... 176 Table 90 Front Panel Descriptions of ODU Board and Related Basic Operation.............. 178 Table 91 Performance and Alarm Messages of ODU Board ........................................ 180 Table 92 Front Panel Descriptions of OAD Board and Related Basic Operation.............. 183 Table 93 Performance and Alarm Messages of OAD Board ........................................ 185 Table 94 WBU Board Type ................................................................................... 186 Table 95 Front Panel Descriptions of WBU Board and Related Basic Operations .......... 188 Table 96 Performance, Alarm and Event Messages of WBU Board............................. 191 Table 97 Types of WSU Board............................................................................. 192 Table 98 Front Panel Descriptions of WSU Board and Related Basic Operations .......... 197 Table 99 Performance, Alarm and Event Messages of WSU Board............................. 200 Table 100 Description of WBM Board’s Front Panel and Related Operation Information 203 Table 101 Performance, Alarm and Event Messages of WBM Board .......................... 205 Table 102 Front Panel Descriptions of SDM Board and Related Basic Operations........... 207 Table 103 Performance and Alarm Messages of SDM Board....................................... 209 Table 104 Type List of EOA Board ......................................................................... 210 Table 105 List of Board Subtype ........................................................................... 211 Table 106 Front Panel Descriptions of EOBA Board and Related Basic Operations ......... 216 Table 107 Front Panel Descriptions of EOLA Board and Related Basic Operations.......... 218 Table 108 Front Panel Descriptions of EOPA Board and Related Basic Operations ......... 220 Table 109 Front Panel Descriptions of EONA Board and Related Basic Operations ......... 222 Table 110 Performance Messages of EOA Board ...................................................... 224 Table 111 Alarm Messages of EOA Board ............................................................... 225 Table 112 Event Messages of EOA Board................................................................ 226 Table 113 Front Panel Descriptions of DRA Board and Related Basic Operations ........... 229 Table 114 Performance and Alarm Messages of DRA Board ....................................... 231 Table 115 Front Panel Descriptions of LAC Board and Related Basic Operations ........... 234 Table 116 Performance and Alarm Messages of LAC Board........................................ 236 Table 117 Front Panel Descriptions of OWM Board and Related Basic Operations.......... 238 Table 118 Performance and Alarm Messages of OWM Board...................................... 240 Table 119 Front Panel Descriptions of OPM Board and Related Basic Operations........... 242 Table 120 Performance and Alarm Messages of OPM Board....................................... 243



Table 121 Performance and Alarm Messages of MCPD Board..................................... 246 Table 122 Front Panel Descriptions of MCPD Board and Related Basic Operations......... 247 Table 123 Front Panel Descriptions of OP Board and Related Basic Operations ............. 249 Table 124 Correspondence Relations between the Working Status and Indicator Status of OP

Board ........................................................................................................ 250 Table 125 Performance and Alarm Messages of OP Board ......................................... 255 Table 126 Front Panel Descriptions of OPMS Board and Related Basic Operations ....... 257 Table 127 Relations between the Working Status and Indicator Status of OPMS Board 259 Table 128 Event Messages of OPMS Board............................................................ 259 Table 129 Front Panel Descriptions of OPCS Board and Related Basic Operations ....... 262 Table 130 Performance, Alarm and Event Messages of OPCS Board.......................... 264 Table 131 Front Panel Descriptions of OMCP Board and Related Basic Operations......... 267 Table 132 Correspondence Relations between the Working Status and Indicator Status of

OMCP Board ............................................................................................... 268 Table 133 Performance and Alarm Messages of OMCP Board..................................... 271 Table 134 Front Panel Descriptions of NCP Board and Related Basic Operations ........... 273 Table 135 Correspondence Relations between the Working Status and the Indicator Status of

NCP/NCPF Board ......................................................................................... 274 Table 136 Performance and Alarm Messages of NCP Board ....................................... 275 Table 137 Front Panel Descriptions of OSC Board and Related Basic Operations........... 277 Table 138 Performance and Alarm Messages of OSC Board ....................................... 279 Table 139 Front Panel Descriptions of OHP Board and Related Basic Operations ........... 283 Table 140 Performance and Alarm Messages of OHP Board ....................................... 283 Table 141 Front Panel Descriptions of NCPF Board and Related Basic Operations.......... 285 Table 142 Front Panel Descriptions of OSCF Board and Related Basic Operations ......... 288 Table 143 Correspondence Relations between the Working Status and the Indicator Status of

OSCF Board................................................................................................ 289 Table 144 Correspondence Relations between the Working Status and the Indicator Status of

the Optical/Electrical Interfaces on OSCF Board ............................................... 290 Table 145 Performance and Alarm Messages of OSCF Board ..................................... 292 Table 146 Front Panel Descriptions of OHPF Board and Related Basic Operations ......... 295 Table 147 Performance and Alarm Messages of OHPF Board ..................................... 296 Table 148 Front Panel Descriptions of APSF Board and Related Basic Operations.......... 298 Table 149 Correspondence Relations between the Working Status and the Indicator Status of

APSF Board ................................................................................................ 299 Table 150 Panel Descriptions of PBX Board and Related Basic Operations.................... 301 Table 151 Performance and Alarm Messages .......................................................... 302 Table 152 Corresponding Relations between Running Status and Indicator Status of PWSB

Board ........................................................................................................ 305 Table 153 Description of Cabinet No...................................................................... 305 Table 154 Definitions of Pins in -48_In1/-48_In2 Power Socket ................................. 306 Table 155 Definitions of Pins in Alm_In Socket........................................................ 306 Table 156 Definitions of Pins in Alm_Out Socket...................................................... 307 Table 157 Definitions of Pins in Warn Socket .......................................................... 308

Tables


Table 158 Definitions of Pins in Sp_Alm Socket ....................................................... 308 Table 159 Performance and Alarm Messages of PWSB Board..................................... 309 Table 160 Front Panel Descriptions of OAD Board and Related Basic Operation ............ 310 Table 161 Performance and Alarm Messages of FCB Board ....................................... 311 Table 162 Front Panel Descriptions of CA Board and Related Basic Operations ............. 313 Table 163 Correspondence Relations between the Working Status and Indicator Status of CA

Board ........................................................................................................ 314 Table 164 Performance and Alarm Messages of CA Board ......................................... 316 Table 165 Front Panel Descriptions of CSU Board and Related Operation Information.. 319 Table 166 Relations Between the Working Status and Indicator Status of CSU Board .. 320 Table 167 Performance, Alarm and Event Messages of CSU Board............................ 321 Table 168 Wavelength Allocation (8/32/40 Channel, C Band) .................................... 326 Table 169 Wavelength Allocation (48/96 Channel, C Band) ....................................... 326 Table 170 Wavelength Allocation (80 Channel, C Band)............................................ 328 Table 171 Wavelength Allocation (80 Channel, L Band) ............................................ 329 Table 172 Requirements on the Creation of NEs in a 2 M Supervision System.............. 334 Table 173 Requirements on the Creation of NEs in a 100 M Supervision System .......... 338 Table 174 Configuration Principle of IP Address of Optical Interfaces on OSCF Board .... 339 Table 175 EMS Software Configurations of Integrated Wavelength Supervision Subsystem

................................................................................................................ 345 Table 176 Hardware/Software Needed in Power Management of OMS Layer ................ 349 Table 177 Working Conditions of OMS Layer Power Management............................... 351 Table 178 Configurations of OMS Power Management Subsystem .............................. 354



Index


Index

3-pin power socket (J1/J17)...............19

APS................................................13

APSF Board ................................... 296

Automatic Lock of Service Type ..........45

Basic Fittings in Cabinet ..................... 3

Alarm Panel ....................................4 Cable Area ......................................4 Front Door.......................................4 Grounding Copper Busbar ..............4 Heat Dissipation Aperture...............5 Mounting Hole ................................4 Outlet...............................................4

Board Slots Mode .............................12

Boards arrangement for 100 M supervisory system....................14

Boards arrangement for 2 M supervisory system (with APSF)...................................................13

Boards arrangement for 2 M supervisory system (without APSF)........................................12

CA Board ...................................... 311

Common Interface Area ....................15

CSU Board .................................... 316

DB9 socket (female) (J3/J12).............20

DB9 socket (male) (J2/J8/J11) ...........19

DCM Plug-in Box ..............................36

DeMUX module .............................. 155

DRA Board .................................... 226

C-band RAMAN module............228 L-band RAMAN module ............228

DSA Board .................................... 111

DSAE Board................................... 136

DSAF Board................................... 123

Aggregate side ............................124

Clock function ............................124 Clock Processing Unit ................127 Control and communication unit 156 Convergence & Framing Unit ....126 Coupler .......................................155 Interleaver ...................................155 Optical power monitoring module

................................................155 OTN Optical Module..................127 Tributary Optical Module ...........126 Tributary side..............................123

EOA Board .................................... 209

EOBA .................................210, 215 EOLA..................................210, 217 EOPA..........................210, 219, 221

EVOA ........................................... 232

FCB Board..................................... 310

GEM2 Board .................................... 86

GEM8 Board .................................. 102

GEMF Board

Aggregate side ..............................94 Control and communication unit ..96 Demultiplexing direction ..............95 GE convergence unit.....................95 GE optical module ........................95 Multiplexing direction ..................94 OTN optical module .....................96 OTN processing unit.....................95 Tributary side................................94

GEMF Board .................................... 94

GFP data encapsulation format......... 135

Independent Fan Unit ....................... 29

J10 ...............................................16

LAC Board

Control and communication unit 233



Coupler........................................233 EVOA .........................................233 EVOA drive circuit .....................233 GFF .............................................233 LACG..........................................232 LACT ..........................................232 Optical power measuring unit .....233

LAC Board ..................................... 232

MAC controller unit ...........................95

Manual Lock of Service Rate...............45

Manual Lock of Service Type ..............45

Monitoring Plug-in Box ......................34

MUX module .................................. 155

NCP Board..................................... 271

NCPF Board ................................... 283

Non-specific wavelength optical

transmitting module......................47

OA Board

1510/1550 multiplexer ........213, 214 A1510/1550 demultiplexer .213, 214 Control and communication unit214,

215 Coupler................................213, 214 EDFA, EDFA drive circuit .213, 215 Optical power monitoring module

.........................................213, 215 OA redundancy mode...................... 254

OA shared configuration mode.......... 253

OA Subrack ...................................... 9

Backplane......................................10 Board area .....................................10 Chute .............................................10 Dustproof net ................................10 Fan area.........................................10 Fiber cable reel-in box ..................11 Lug ................................................10 Orderwire phone bracket...............10

OAD Board .................................... 181

OADM.............................................. 7

OBM Board .................................... 160

Broadband multiplexer................161 Control and communication unit161,

167, 177 Coupler........................161, 167, 177

Optical power monitoring module................................161, 167, 177

OCI Board..................................... 154

ODF Plug-in Box .............................. 34

ODU Board.................................... 176

Control and communication unit 181 OADM ........................................181 Optical power monitoring module

................................................181 OHP Board .................................... 280

Control and communication information processing ...........281

Orderwire overhead information processing ...............................281

Transparent user channel information processing ...........281

OHPF Board .................................. 293

OLA .................................................7

OMCP Board.................................. 265

Control and communication unit 266 Optical switch module ................265

OMU Board

OMU16.......................................166 OMU32.......................................166 OMU40.......................................166 OMU8.........................................166 OMU80.......................................166

OMU Board ................................... 166

OP Board ...................................... 247

concurrent transmitting direction248 OCH 1+1 Protection ...................251 OMS 1+1 Protection...................253 preferred receiving direction.......248

OPCS Board .................................. 260

OPM Board.................................... 240

OPMS Board .................................. 255

Orderwire Phone Bracket................... 29

OSC Board .................................... 275

OSCL ..........................................275 OSCT ..........................................275

OSCF Board .................................. 286

OTM.................................................7

OTU Board

client side ......................................44

Index


Control and communication unit ..47 line side .........................................44 Optical receiving module..............46 Optical transmitting module .........47 OTU (Regenerator, OTUG) ..........45 OTU (Terminal) ............................44 Performance and overhead

supervision unit.........................47 OTU Board ......................................44

OTU redundancy configuration mode .251

OTU shared configuration mode........ 252

OTU Subrack ...................................21

Board Slots....................................23 Common Interface Area................24

OTU10G Board.................................65

OTUF Board

AFEC ............................................60 Control and communication unit ..54 Control and Communication Unit.69 FEC ...............................................60 FEC framer....................................54 FEC Framer...................................69 Optical receiving module..............54 Optical Receiving Module ............69 Optical transmitting module .........54 Optical Transmitting Module........69 Regenerator OTU10G (OTU10G G)

...................................................60 Regenerator OTUF (OTUFG).......52 Single-channel bidirectional

OTU10G ...................................59 Terminal OTUF ............................51

OTUF Board.....................................51

OWM Board ................................... 236

1×2 optical switch.......................237 Control and communication unit 238 Drive circuits...............................237 TF................................................237 Wavelength supervisor................237

PBX Board .................................... 300

PCB ............................................... 42

Power Alarm Subrack ....................... 31

Power Distribution Subrack................ 32

PWSB Board.................................. 302

RAMAN......................................... 226

RM41/SRM42 board.......................... 77

Aggregate optical module.............77 Clock processing unit ...................78 Control and communication unit ..78 Convergence unit ..........................77 Tributary optical module ..............77

SDH overhead processing unit ........... 95

SDM Board.................................... 205

Serial number of cabinet ................... 16

Serial number of subrack .................. 16

Slots for PBX Boards......................... 17

SMU Board.................................... 145

Specific wavelength optical transmitting

module ....................................... 47

Structure of Boards in OA/OTU/TMUX

Subrack ...................................... 41

Structure of FCB Board ..................... 43

Structure of PBX Board ..................... 42

Structure of PWSB Board .................. 43

TMUX Subrack ................................. 25

VMUX Board.................................. 171

AWG...........................................172 Control and communication unit 173 Coupler .......................................172 Optical power monitoring module

................................................173 Temperature control and drive

circuit ......................................172 VOA............................................172

VOA ............................................. 171

WBM Board ................................... 200

WBU Board ................................... 185

WSU Board ................................... 191

Documents

sjzl20081768-ZXWM M900 (V2.20) Hardware Manual_156108.pdf